Home

RX USER`S MANUAL

Contents

1. Register Function name Bune lon R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW v on Forward regeneration ese PAH 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 143Fh Not used 1440h Not used 1441h Thermal warning level C061 R W 0 to 100 1 00 OFF Disabled 1442h Alarm code selection C062 R W 01 3 bit 02 4 bit 0 01 1443h O Hz detection level C063 R W 0 00 to 100 00 Hz 1444h Fin overheat warning level C064 R W 0 to 200 1 C 1445h to Not used 144Ah 02 Loop back test Communication speed 03 2400 bps 144Bh selection C071 R W 04 4800 bps Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps 144Ch Communication station C072 R W 1 to 247 e No selection 144Dh Communication bit length C073 R W f 7 bit selection 8 8 bit Per 00 No parity 144Eh ee parity C074 R W 01 Even 02 Odd 144Fh Communication stop bit C075 R W g 1 bit 3 selection 2 2 bit 00 Trip 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration 1450h Communication error C076 R W l stop _ selection 02 Ignore 03 Free RUN Free run stop 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 1451h Communication error C077 R W 0 00 to 99 99 0 01 s timeout 1452h Communication wait time C078 R W 0 to 1000 1 ms Communication method 00 ASCII oe selection 079 RW 01 ModBus RTU m 1454h Not used 1455h O adjustment C081
2. 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2550 2 12 MININOTE 670 700 12 lees 380 480 250 7 12 suoiediyineds Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing HE3G3RX B4750 B4900 2 12 ps 670 700 E 7 PUUUCTUTONUYTOTUTOUTYTOUUTETTUTECTYTTTTT CTT TTTTTETTT TTT LODOUIOIUUDOUIIIUTIOONIIITUROOONIIUDDUIIITTDOOIILITTDOI INNIY y A 300 390 D D p 268 7 13 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX B411K B413K N b12 e gt
3. Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current A Rated current b312 3rd electronic thermal level b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection 00 Reduced TRQ Reduced torque 2nd electronic thermal characteristics b213 oe 01 Const TRQ Constant torque 00 characteristics selection itis characteristics 3rd electronic thermal 02 Free set Free setting b313 SH characteristics selection b015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 Hz frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 A current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 C061 Thermal warning level 0 to 100 80 Related functions C021 to C025 C026 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 1 Set a percentage relative to the electronic thermal multiplication value When the value reaches 100 an overload trip E05 occurs 4 46 suoloun4 4 2 Function Mode Electronic Thermal Level Motor Protection Level Example 3G3RX A2150 Trip time s Rated current 64 A Setting range 12 8 A 20 to 64 0 A 100
4. 376 390 9 5 83 190 244 7 9 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2300 A4300 2 10 S O AUT OTOTT TUTTE TTT P 510 540 Ao K y O ol pooo 195 7 10 suoneaoads Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2370 A2450 A4370 A4450 A4550 7 11 2 012 AJ UT UT TTT SAUUTTNTTUTENTTU OUT OU OUT UUTUUTTY TUTTO UATE TINI 520 550 300 390 V e OOOOO O 250
5. 710 740 AALUUDUINULUDUOTUONUTNUTUUTEUROTUOUNTOUTELTUTTOUUOUUTUUTEATEATENLL 12 380 480 j TUT TT y 270 7 14 suolediineds Specifications 7 3 Options 7 3 Options Braking Unit AX BCROOOOOOL TE Dimensional Drawing B S l OVERCURRENT rower a h i I gt 5 oee Yy nd B1 a T Dimensions Reference B B1 H H1 T S AX BCR4015045 TE 82 5 40 5 150 138 220 6 AX BCR4017068 TE AX BCR2035090 TE AX BCR2070130 TE 130 64 5 205 193 208 6 AX BCR4035090 TE AX BCR4070130 TE AX BCR4090240 TE 131 64 5 298 280 300 9 Specifications Specifications Voltage Reference Permanent Peak 5s max Minimum Brak Brak connectable fase re ta Current A KVA Current A AKVA resistor Ohms AX BCR2035090 TE 35 13 90 32 4 100 200V AX BCR2070130 TE 70 25 130 47 2 8 125 AX BCR4015045 TE 15 11 45 33 16 50 AX BCR4017068 TE 17 13 68 51 11 63 400V AX BCR4035090 TE 35 26 90 67
6. Register Function name Pune lon R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 1226h A028 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 8 A028 Hz 1227h LOW R W 1228h A029 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 9 A029 Hz 1229h LOW R W 122Ah ee R W Multi step speed HIGH F 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 10 A030 Hz 122Bh LOW R W 122Ch ADAT HAY Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 11 A031 Hz 122Dh LOW R W 122Eh A092 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 12 Hz 122Fh 092 R W LOW 1230h AOSS R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 13 A033 Hz 1231h R W LOW 1232h A094 R W Multi step speed HIGH gt 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 14 A034 Hz 1233h R W LOW 1234h A035 R W Multi step speed HIGH 4 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 15 A035 Hz 1235h LOW R W 1236h Not used 1237h Not used 1238h Jogging frequency A038 R W _ Starting frequency to 999 pe 00 FRS Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation 01 DEC Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled in operation 02 DB DC injection braking on jogging A stop Disabled in operation 1239h Jogging stop se
7. 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2055 A2075 A2110 A4055 A4075 A4110 2 07 260 170 13 6 82 7 8 suolediineds Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2150 A2185 A2220 A4150 A4185 A4220 gt ILE STOP
8. AT Auxiliary frequency A006 A005 Main frequency reference reference Reversibility terminal O2 L terminal OFF O L terminal Disabled 00 Not ON OI L terminal Disabled 00 03 reversible OFF O L terminal Disabled 01 ON O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 00 OFF O L terminal Enabled With AT Not E le 1 o allocated toa i Example 1 ON Ol L terminal Enabled versibl multi function OFF O L terminal Enabled input 01 ON O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 00 OFF O L terminal Enabled Example 2 ON OFL terminal Enabled 02 Reversible OFF O L terminal Enabled 01 ON O2 L terminal Disabled 00 O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 01 Addition of the O L and Enabled Not With AT NOT OIL terminals reversible allocated to a multi function 02 Aonar mA tL and Enabled Reversible input OI L terminals Addition of the O L and Not og E OIL terminals Disabled reversible Example 1 Not reversible Example 2 Reversible wl S wf ss Main frequency a Z fol fo Main frequency reference reference Olor O terminal o _ ____ amp __ Ol or O terminal Auxiliary Auxiliary frequency o frequency o reference reference O2terminal O2 terminal fo fo2 fol fo2 fo2 fol fo2 fol a Real frequency reference Real frequency Forward reference 4 13 4 2 Function Mode External Frequency Voltage Current Adjustment External analog input frequen
9. For the A344 parameter there are only two options available 00 VC and 01 VP 4 62 suoloun4 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop Function e After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the overvoltage level eYou can select from three modes in momentary power interruption non stop selection b050 Functions Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled Selection of non stop 01 V Cnst STOP Enabled deceleration b050 function at momentary stop 00 power interruption 02 NS1 Enabled without recovery gt 03 NS2 Enabled with recovery Starting voltage of non stop b051 function at momentary 0 0 to 1000 0 220 440 V power interruption 4 Stop deceleration level of b052 nonstop functionat 0 0 to 1000 0 360 720 v momentary power interruption 1 4 Deceleration time of non b053 stop function at momentary 0 01 to 3600 00 1 00 S power interruption 3 Deceleration starting width b054 of non stop functionat 00 to 10 00 0 00 Hz momentary power interruption 3 Proportional gain setting of 0 00 to 2 55 non stop function at Proportional gain for DC voltage constant b055 0 20 momentary power control interruption b050 02 03 only Integral time setting of non 0 000 t0 69 939 b056 stop function at momentary penia time for DGVoltage consta
10. Terminal block screw washer 2 13 2 2 Wiring E Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals The terminal arrangement on the Inverter main circuit terminal block is shown below Terminal arrangement Applicable model CHARGE LED indicator PD 1 P short circuit b EMC filter function switching method J61 Filter disable pin J62 tf Dummy plug green Filter enable pin Short plug When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached In order to enable the EMC filter function set up the plug inserted into the filter enable pin J61 and filter disable pin J62 as shown in the table below Confirm that electrical power has been disconnected before performing this setup Not doing so may result in electric shock Also use with the plug inserted Filter enable pin J61 Filter disable pin J62 EMC filter disabled Dummy plug green Short plug EMC filter enabled factory default Dummy plug green 3G3RX A2004 to A2037 3G3RX A4004 to A4037 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M4 Others M4 ah Ground terminal with short circuit bar shaded area for EMC filter e switching EMC filter function ee method PD 1 P Ja short circuit bar When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled 3G3RX A2
11. omron HITACHI O O POWER RUN WARNING ALARM LOCAL REMOTE READ WRITE lt gt FWD REV STOP RUN RUN RESET oe ASWARNING Rick of olectric shock Warning Description fe th RBOBENDSOET ra WARNING Risk of electric shock oBAHD BROMTSUSRRHMBEARS FAL o Bab RUBRRNE 1 OMARION EAEC FAL o Read manual before installing e Wait10 minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply Checking Before Unpacking Checking Before Unpacking Checking the Product On delivery be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter RX model that you ordered Should you find any problems with the product immediately contact your nearest local sales representative or OMRON sales office Checking the Nameplate rypewamt SG3RX A2004 Elf Ni INPUI S0H2 60Hz 200 240V SP j OUTPUT 0 400Hz 200 240V 3P DATE 1110 S N 162306200000 REV ABAI MODEL SJ700D OO4LFEI ve Banufacturer Hitech Industrial Equipment Systems Ce 1 1 1 Higashinarashino Narashino Chiba JAPAN Sales and Service OMRON EUROPE Y NE 1209 Checking the Model 3G3RX A2055 EF F Built in filter E Europe standard ____ Max applicable mo
12. ee 4 2 frequency JUMP eee eeee eet eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeteaeeteeeeeee 4 30 frequency limita ccc ecatibanianndeniciiGes 4 28 lower lIMit ea a E aes 4 28 Upper ME a A E 4 28 inital Ser EN ae eean anane aapa aa aaen innara 4 56 initalzato h a aeaa aeea sranane oaa aaan riepa Sa iaaii ieee R R AnaS 4 70 input power MONItOT ssseesessesrissesrreserrinnerriennrrrennernes 4 4 internal DC injection braking 4 26 4 28 EE E E E T ET 4 44 4 45 J DLE EEEE A TEETE A PL aed 4 18 jogging operation nssseesnnennsennesnnneinsennnrnnnrinnnnne 4 18 K KG OEE EE E E E E E od TEA 4 4 L MAO ce a de ae E rt main circuit terminal manual torque boost maximum frequency MA ested cence sceeteg E T 4 107 momentary power interruption non stop 2 4 60 momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop SElOCTION ceeeceeceeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 4 42 4 44 MP aecaiczet teen E A ach eta et ett EA 4 109 multi function input Monitor s s s 4 2 multi function input terminal selection wee 4 79 multi function output MONItOF s es 4 2 multi function output terminal ee eeeeeeeeeee 4 95 operation frequency function Operation Method cc cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeees operation ready Signal c eerie operation selection during option error 4 111 Orientation FUNCTION ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeteeee
13. 4 2 Function Mode Timing example of switching from Inverter to commercial power MU I UIN L Ko m QL aA C e Inverter output frequency Operation ooo Timing example of switching from commercial aaa eo to Inverter MIU I UN ee ret time of MC2 and MC3 a TS _2 0 5 to 1s C L O m o lt gt lt Retry wait time b003 0 5 t015 Operation Operates after frequency matching 4 86 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reset This function resets an Inverter trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 3 to 100 0 noua Refer to Momentary Power Interruption nods Retry walt uime Trip Retry Restart page 4 42 ua S Time from reset to restart Frequency matching 0 00 to 400 00 b007 lower limit frequency Refer to Momentary Power Interruption 0 00 Hz setting Trip Retry Restart page 4 42 00 ON RESET Trip reset at power on example 1 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset 01 OFF RESET Trip reset when the power is OFF example 2 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset 02 On in Trip Enabled only during trip C102 Reset selection Reset when the power is OFF 00 E example 1 Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset 03 Trip RESET Trip reset only example 1 The Inverter does not initialize internal data at trip reset Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset 00 0 Hz start 01
14. Code Description Oih An unsupported function has been specified 02h Specified address does not exist 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 21h Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing into the holding register a cer Oth 81h O3h 83h 05h 85h 06h 86h OFh 8Fh 10h 90h The Inverter does not allow this function during operation e Has issued the enter command during operation UV e Has written into the register during trip UV e Has written into the read only register coil 22h e Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed Saving the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command Even if using the command to write into the holding register O6h or into the consecutive holding registers 10h no change can be saved in the Inverter s memory element If the Inverter power shuts off without saving any changes the holding register returns to the status before the changes were made To save the holding register changes in the Inverter s memory element the Enter Command must be issued according to the following procedure When the control parameters are changed the motor parameters must be re calculated In this case perform re calculation with this register To issue the Enter command Write all memory data into the holding register with the write command 06h and write re calculated motor parameters into holding register 09
15. AX REM19 38KO0000 IE wn xe D TA O te H e M Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l T KG AX REM19K0030 IE 30 19000 AX REM19K0020 IE 20 19000 206 350 140 190 50 8 1 AX REM19K0008 IE 8 19000 AX REM19K0006 IE 6 19000 AX REM38K0012 IE 12 38000 306 350 140 290 50 14 5 7 18 7 3 Options Simplified Selection Table for Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Inverter Braking resistor unit External resistor 10 ED M t RX Braking min 3 on Hebb ee Braking 10 sec max for built in Braking are or Unit resistance torque 5 sec max for Braking Unit torque AX BCR Q 3 pha Type AX Resist Q Type AX Resist Q 0 55 2004 180 REMO00K1200 IE 200 180 50 REMO00K1200 IE 200 1 1 2007 100 REM00K2070 IE 70 200 1 5 2015 140 REM00K4075 IE 75 130 REM00K2070 IE 70 2 2 2022 35 90 REM00K4035 IE 35 180 4 0 2037 REM00K4075 IE 75 50 REMOO0K6035 IE 35 100 T 5 5 2055 Built in 16 75 REMO00K9017 IE 17 150 8 REM00K4035 IE 35 S 7 5 2075 55 REM01K9017 IE 17 110 gt 09 10 of 11 0 2110 REMOO0K6035 IE 35 40 REM02K1017 IE 17 75 n 2 15 0 2150 REMO00K9017 IE 17 55 REM03K5010 IE 10 95 ic 7 5 v 18 5 2185 7
16. To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Acceleration Deceleration Time Set an acceleration deceleration time for the motor For a slow transition set to a large value and for a fast transition set to a small one Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit F002 Acceleration time 1 F202 2nd acceleration time 1 F302 8rd acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 s F003 Deceleration time 1 F203 2nd deceleration time 1 F303 8rd deceleration time 1 Acceleration deceleration POR time input type 00 OPE Digital Operator 01 Option 1 02 Option 2 9o 03 EZSQ Drive Programming Related functions A004 A204 A304 P031 C001 to C008 To switch to 2nd 3rd acceleration time 1 or 2nd 3rd deceleration time 1 allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 8 Functions 4 2 Function Mode The set time here indicates the acceleration deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency Output frequency Max frequency A004 A204 A304 x Output frequency set value Actual Actual acceleration deceleration time time F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 SSS eWhen the LAD cancel LAC function is selected in the multi function input selection and the signal is turned on the acceleration deceleration time is ignored and
17. f 00 Sign Signed 1623h Folarity selection attorque P035 R W 01 Direction Depends on the RUN reference via O2 p ER direction 00 OFF None 01 OPE Digital Operator 1624h Torque bias mode P036 R W 02 O2 Terminal O2 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 3 1625h Torque bias value P037 R W 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 f 00 Sign Signed 1626h Torque bias polarity P038 R W 01 Direction Depends on the RUN selection R direction 1627h P039 R W Speed limit value in torque HIGH 0 01 0 00 to Maximum frequency 7 control forward P039 Hz 1628 LOW R W 4 212 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes ols No code tion 1629h PO40 R W Speed limit value in torque HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 1st Max frequency control reverse P040 Hz 162Ah LOW R W 162Bh Not used 162Ch Not used 162Dh Not used taen e ee commend Po44 RW 0 0010 99 99 s dog timer 00 Trip 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration 162Fh Operation setting at P045 R W l stop communications error 02 Ignore 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 0 Basic speed I O 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O 4 Extended control I O 1630h Instance Number P046 R W 5 Exten
18. 30 30 or 05 sisi This value is BCC Text data ASCII code 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 50 oj U I mT m oO o OW gt 62 Text data ASCII code STX 2 ACK 6 CR 0D NAK 15 0 30 1 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 9 39 4 4 Communication Function ModBus RTU Method Follow the procedures below in regards to communication between the external controller and the Inverter External controller Inverter 1 Wait time silent interval C078 Operates according to communication error selection C076 when reception times out 1 Frame to be sent from the external control device to the Inverter Query 2 Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external controller Response 3 Unless the Inverter completes reception of a query from the host within the time set in C077 after the Inverter completes a response response transmission the Inverter becomes ready to receive the first data again In this case the Inverter sends no response Also the Inverter s operation conforms to the setting of communication error selection C076 For details refer to the following table The receiving timeout monitor starts after the first transmission reception is performed after power on or reset Receiving timeout is inactive until reception or transmission is performed 3 Communication error timeou
19. Note 1 If the sign of the frequency reference is changed rotation direction will be inverted or gt as a result of operation the Note 2 When the PID function is used the frequency addition function is enabled for a PID target value Note that A145 is displayed in in increments of 0 01 4 41 4 2 Function Mode lt Group B Detailed Function Parameters gt Momentary Power Interruption Trip Retry Restart Restart During Momentary Power Interruption eYou can set whether the Inverter trips or retries restarts when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs elf the retry function is selected in retry selection b001 the Inverter retries for the number of times set in b005 for momentary power interruption or b009 for undervoltage and trips on the next time Under the limitless retry setting the Inverter doesn t trip e You can use b004 to select whether the Inverter trips or not when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs during stop When selecting the retry function set retry condition b008 according to your system lf undervoltage is retained for 40 seconds even during retry operation it results in E09 undervoltage trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 TRIP Alarm 01 0 Hz start ca 02 f match Frequency matching start example 1 E b001 Retry selection 4 6 03 f match Trip Trip after
20. 4 28 suoloun4 4 2 Function Mode To switch to the 2nd 8rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Does not accept any frequency reference beyond the upper lower limits Set the upper limit first Make sure that the upper limit A061 A261 is larger than the lower limit A062 A262 Make sure that the upper and lower limiter settings do not exceed the maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 Make sure that the output frequency F001 and multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 are not lower than the lower limit setting and not higher than the upper limit setting e Neither limit works if set to 0 Hz Disabled when the 3rd control is selected 4 When Using O L and OI L Output frequency Hz e Once the lower limit is set the Inverter outputs the frequency A062 set for the lower limit if 0 V 4 mA 2 Man Ao is input to the frequency reference e _ A061 S C gt LL A062 i Frequency OV 10V reference 4mA 20 mA When Using O2 L e When the lower limit is used for the O2 input the Max frequency rotation at 0 V is fixed to A062 for either forward or A004 A204 7 reverse rotation as described below A061 A062 Reverse 10V Forward A062 PR A061 Max frequency A004 A204 a When the RUN command is set to the terminal A002 01 Terminal Rotation when O2 0 V FW ON A062 for forward rotation RV ON A062
21. Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output When the product life becomes close to the end for the parts including the on board smoothing capacitor or cooling fan but excluding the main circuit smoothing capacitor an alarm can be output through the self diagnostic function Use it as a reference of the parts replacement period For details refer to Life Assessment Monitor d022 page 4 5 Multi function Pulse Counter PCNT PCC page 4 94 or Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection page 4 96 This alarm is output through the self diagnosis based on the expected design life not a guaranteed value Therefore it has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions xipueddy Appendix Appendix 4 EC Declaration of Conformity Appendix 4 EC Declaration of Conformity No EMEC03SC 1 3 omrRon EC Declaration of Conformity We hereby declare that the following products are in conformity with the requirements of the following EC Directive Product Inverter Type 3G3RX series Refer to appending types list Title and No of Directive EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC These products are designed and manufactured in accordance with the following standards EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN61800 3 2004 Test methods Conducted Radiated EN61800 3 2004 EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN61800 3 2004 Test methods ESD EN61800 3 2004 1EC61000 4 2 2001 RF EM Fi
22. Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 When auto tuning without motor rotation is selected H001 01 steps 4 and 5 are not performed The rotation frequency in step 5 is defined as follows T is whichever larger value of acceleration time or deceleration time in step 4 When T lt 0 lt 50s x 40 When 50s lt T lt 100s x 20 When 100s lt T x 10 If a trip occurs during auto tuning the auto tuning processing is forced to stop No error message appears Trip display is given higher priority After removing the cause of a trip perform the auto tuning again If the auto tuning is interrupted by STOP command input by pressing the STOP key or by turning off the RUN command the parameters for auto tuning may remain in the Inverter To perform the auto tuning again initialize the parameters and then set each parameter again This also applies when you restart ordinary operation If the offline auto tuning is performed with free V f setting selected as the control method the Inverter displays an error message and stops processing Even if auto tuning is completed normally the Inverter cannot be operated with the tuning data To do so be sure to set motor parameter selection H002 to 01 Online Auto Tuning Function Online auto tuning compensates for changes in motor parameters resulting from a motor temperature rise or other factor thus ensuring stable operation This function is applicable to 1st 2nd
23. Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A069 Acceleration stop frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 Hz A070 Acceleration stop time 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 Ss Output frequency A069 A070 Frequency reference 4 30 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode PID Function This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate air volume and pressure Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled f 01 ON Enabled AOZ PID Selection 02 ON Reverse output o0 enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 s A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 s A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 Time 00 Ol 01 0 02 Modbus RS485 A076 PID feedback selection communication 00 03 Pulse Pulse train frequency 10 Math Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value s Feedback value A077 Reverse PID function 01 ON Deviation Feedback 00 value Target value A078 PID output limit function 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 00 Disabled A079 PID feedforward selection 01 0 00 02 Ol 03 O2 C044 PID deviation excessive level 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 C052 PID FB upper limit 100 0 0 0 to 100 0 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 Related functions d004 A001 A005 A006 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 eTo use this function set A071 to 01 or 02 eYou can disable the PID operation in progre
24. Rated output voltage 3 phase 200 to 240 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage at CT 95 121 145 182 220 Rated output current A at VT 113 140 169 210 270 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 14 22 30 30 43 Regenerative braking Built in braking resistor circuit Regenerative braking unit separately mounted Braking resistance Q Minimum connection 7 2 suoieodiyineds Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List EThree phase 400 V Class Class 3 phase 400 V Model name 3G3RX A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185 Max at CT 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 applicable kW motor 4P atvTr 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 at CT 1 0 1 7 2 5 3 6 6 2 9 7 13 1 17 3 22 1 26 3 400 V Rated output at VT 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 6 7 7 11 0 15 2 20 9 25 6 30 4 capacity kVA act 12 20 31 43 74 116 158 20 7 266 31 5 480 V at VT 1 5 2 5 4 0 5 5 9 2 13 3 18 2 24 1 30 7 36 5 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 380 to 480 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage at CT 1 5 2 5 3 8 5 3 9 0 14 19 25 32 38 Rated output current A at V
25. p m ES RUN T Frequency Arrival Signal 5 zs eWhen the output frequency reaches the set level a frequency arrival signal is output 9 Parameter Default n Function name Data Unit No setting Arrival frequency during C042 acceleration 0 00 Does not output arrival signal during acceleration 0 01 to 400 00 Outputs arrival signal during 0 00 Hz Arrival frequency during acceleration C045 i acceleration 2 Arrival frequency during C043 deceleration 0 00 Does not output arrival signal during deceleration 0 01 to 400 00 Outputs arrival signal during 0 00 Hz Arrival frequency during deceleration C046 i A deceleration 2 eFor elevating machines use this signal for applying the brake To release the brake use the overtorque signal e Allocate 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 Set frequency exceeded 06 FA3 Set frequency only 24 FA4 Set frequency exceeded 2 or 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz If 06 FA3 or 25 FA5 is set however operation during acceleration is ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz and operation during deceleration is ON
26. Cooling method Forced air cooling Control method Phase to phase sinusoidal modulation PWM Output frequency range 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency precision Digital command 0 01 of the max frequency Analog command 0 2 of the max frequency 25 C 10 C Frequency resolution Digital setting 0 01 Hz Analog setting Max frequency 4000 Terminal O 12 bits 0 to 10 V Terminal O2 12 bits 10 to 10 V Terminal Ol 12 bits 0 to 20 mA Voltage Frequency characteristics V f optionally changeable at base frequencies of 30 to 400 Hz V f braking constant torque reduction torque sensor less vector control sensor less vector control at O Hz Speed fluctuation 0 5 under sensor less vector control or sensor less vector control at 0 Hz Overload current rating 150 60s 200 3s for CT and 120 60s for VT Acceleration Deceleration time 0 01 to 3600 0 s line curve selection Starting torque 200 0 3 Hz under sensor less vector control or sensor less vector control at 0 Hz 150 Torque at 0 Hz under sensor less vector control at 0 Hz when a motor size one rank lower than specified is connected DC injection braking Operates when the starting frequency is lower than that in deceleration via the STOP command when the frequency reference is lower than the operation frequency or via an external input braking power time and frequency are variable Standard
27. E05 Overload protection works to trip the Inverter Display 0 0 to 100 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 4 2 Function Mode 4 2 Function Mode lt Group F Basic Function Parameters gt Output Frequency Setting Monitor Set the Inverter output frequency With frequency reference selection A001 set to 02 you can set the output frequency with F001 For other methods refer to the A001 section in Frequency Reference Selection page 4 10 If A001 is set other than to 02 F001 functions as the frequency reference monitor elf a frequency is set in F001 the same value is automatically set in multi step speed reference 0 A020 To set the 2nd 3rd control use the 2nd multi step speed reference 0 A220 3rd multi step speed reference 0 A320 or use F001 with the SET SET3 terminal turned on To set using the AL SET SETS terminal allocate 08 SET 17 SETS to the desired multi function input 5 When this monitor is used to display a target value of the PID function the monitor value is Q displayed as a percentage 100 Max frequency gt Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 7 F001 Output frequency 0 00 setting monitor A020 Multi step speed reference 0 0 0 Starting frequency to Hz 2nd multi step 1st 2nd 3rd max frequency A220 6 00 speed reference 0 A320 3rd multi step speed reference 0 Related functions A001 A020 A220 A320 C001 to C008
28. For Connection With Cable Conduit Remove the rubber bushing from the conduit connecting portions and connect the cable conduit Do not remove the rubber bushing unless you connect a cable conduit Otherwise the cable sheath may be damaged by the inner edge of the backing plate resulting in short circuit or ground fault 2 4 2 2 Wiring 2 2 Wiring 2 Standard Connection Diagram Braking resistor see LH optional Saal optional QE ER a Tie 3 phase 200 V AC wire A DC reactor r 4 i Design O ggo O O Z lt 3g w N ia i a O To wire the control circuit power 4 supply and main circuit power O Q supply separately be sure to D Relay output 1 remove the J51 connector oO fe os Control circuit wire first power supply Common Multi function output 1 Multi function output 2 A y f Multi function input 1 Multi function output 3 Multi function input 2 Multi function output 4 Multi function input 3 i Multi function output 5 Multi function input 4 a O i i Multi function input 5 Multi function output common Multi function input 6 Multi function input 7 Multi function input 8 RS485 communication For termination resistors Sequence input common Analog monitor output Z Thermistor AM voltage output Analog monitor output current output Frequency setting unit Freq
29. Motor temperature d019 monitor 020 to 200 0 C 4 5 Motor tmp 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life Life assessment 4022 Life C F 2 Cooling fan rpm reduction d022 monitor F bone aaa kia 4 5 Life C F Li C001 O0 0FF J d023 Program counter 0 to 1024 Program Counter do24 Program number 0 to 9999 Program No Drive programming d025 monitor UMO 2147483647 to 2147483647 UMO Drive programming d026 monitor UM1 2147483647 to 2147483647 UM1 Drive programming d027 monitor UM2 2147483647 to 2147483647 UM2 Pulse counter d028 monitor 0 to 2147483647 4 6 Pls Cnt z 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is Position command d029 monitor ees 4 6 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is Set pos selected r 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is Current position d030 monitor sua 29 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is 4 137 Curnt pos selected Clock d031 Clock Setting Data and Time for the LCD digital operator App 2 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Changes paeme Function name Monitor or data range parau during Unit Page No setting operation do60 Inverter mode 00 to 01 Inverter mode Fault frequency d080 monitor 0 to 65535 Time 4 6 Trip Counter Fault monitor 1 Latest i d081 ERR1 4 7 Fault monitor 2 d082 ERR2 4 7 Fault monitor 3 Error code condition of oc
30. N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring 2 1 2 1 Installation Safety Information Installation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places eLocations subject to direct sunlight eLocations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications eLocations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications eLocations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations eLocations subject to corrosive or fl
31. e stria 43 0 2236 377 800 industrial omron at lgium 32 0 2 466 24 80 industrial omron be ech Republic 420 234 602 602 dustrial omron cz Denmark 45 43 44 0O 11 industrial omron dk Finland o 358 0 207 464 200 industrial omron fi France 33 0 156 63 70 00 industrial omron fr o Germany el 49 0 2173 680 00 industrial omron de Hungary 36 0 1399 30 50 industrial omron hu o Italy el 39 02 32 681 industrial omron it Middle East amp Africa el 31 0 23 568 11 00 industrial omron eu Note Specifications subject to change without notice Cat No I560 E2 04 OMRON Netherlands Tel 31 0 23 568 11 00 industrial omron nl Norway Tel 47 0 22 65 75 00 industrial omron no Poland Tel 48 0 22 645 78 60 industrial omron com pl Portugal Tel 351 21 942 94 00 industrial omron pt Russia Tel 7 495 648 94 50 industrial omron ru Spain Tel ind Sw Tel ind 34 913 777 900 ustrial omron es eden 46 0 8 632 35 00 ustrial omron se Switzerland Tel ind Turkey Tel 41 41 748 13 13 ustrial omron ch 90 0 216 474 00 40 industrial omron com tr Un Tel ited Kingdom 44 0 870 752 08 61 industrial omron co uk
32. gt r co D E A f AY S EZ f q z Za LI ee gt 1 we EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled Minimizing radiated interference The 3G3RX frequency inverters meet the limits of EN61800 3 C1 C2 C3 for radiated interference if the specified line filter is used and installation is performed according to our instructions and internal line filter is disabled Installing inverters only with integrated filters will achieve a limited C3 class category of application in a limited range of systems and with limited cable lengths and allowable carrier frequencies 2 25 2 2 Wiring Achievable line conducted interference limits classes Test standard Test Comment EN61800 3 2004 Conducted emissions Pass Category C1 C2 25m motor cable EN61800 3 2004 Conducted emissions Pass Category C2 100m motor cable EN61800 3 2004 Radiated emissions Pass Category C1 C2 25m motor cable g D u 5 EN61800 3 2004 Radiated emissions Pass Category C2 100m motor cable Maximizing immunity Control and signal lines Using EMC compliant cables for control signals To ensure reliable operation of the frequency inverter analog and digital control lines encoder connection all analog inputs the serial interfaces etc should be laid shielded You should allow the effective shielding surface to remain as large as possible i e do not move the shield further away than absolutely necess
33. Allocate 22 DSE to any of the multi function output terminals to enable excessive speed devia tion signal output Set a deviation level in speed deviation error detection level P027 When the deviation between real frequency and reference frequency exceeds the P027 set value the DSE signal turns on When 02 APR2 or 03 HAPR is selected in P012 the Inverter performs absolute position con trol with reference to the absolute position from its origin Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 ASR speed control mode V2 control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode P012 s lection 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 03 HAPR high resolution absolute position control mode P011 Encoder pulses 128 10 65999 1024 Pulse Number of encoder pulses P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 Position loop gain 0 50 rad s Speed deviation error 0 00 to 120 00 poe detection level DSE signal output level 190 at H004 Motor pole number 2 4 6 8 10 Select the number of motor poles 4 Pole selection Multi function inputs 47 PCLR position deviation clear C001 to C008 np 48 STAT pulse train position command input 1 to 8 selection nie permission Multi function output C021 to C025 terminals 11 to 15 selection 22 DSE excessive speed deviation Relay output AL2 COEG AL1 function selection mo Related functions A001 P013 4 124 suoilo
34. O 02 Switches between O O2 terminal AT o 02 O VR Switches between O FREQ k adjuster via terminal AT fe Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is O OI selection used a A005 lat Select 03 OIJ VR Switches between OV FREQ Be deere ls eee NE gt adjuster via terminal AT T Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is lt used 04 02 VR Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 5 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation 00 02 only 01 O OI P auxiliary frequency reference O2 selection not reversible ADOG O2 Select 02 O OI PM auxiliary frequency reference o3 No m 4 12 reversible 03 OFF O2 disabled O start frequency A011 O start FQ 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 2 O end frequency 2 A012 O end FQ 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz O O start ratio o a A013 O start 0 to 100 0 No o 4 14 D O end ratio y a A014 O end 0 to 100 100 No Yo lt 00 External start frequency A015 Toga coe A011 set value 01 No 01 0 Hz O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 A016 Analog in filter 31 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz hysteresis si No E AIS Drive Programming 0 Disable A
35. SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 Drive programming input 1 MI2 Drive programming input 2 MI3 Drive programming input 3 MI4 Drive programming input 4 integrated power clear MI5 Drive programming input 5 MI6 Drive programming input 6 Drive programming input 7 01 12 18 02 03 06 08 no No 4 79 1 C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively when the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON 64 cannot be set optionally When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF C003 has no allocations no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 26 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C
36. for moving between the Option Mode Menu 3 7 3 Details of Option Mode 3 4 Operation 01 English 02 German 03 French 04 Spanish Language Setting language OSsitalian 01 guag g anguag 06 Portuguese 07 Japanese 08 Chinese 09 Turkish 10 Russian st Date 2000 1 1 2099 12 31 2009 01 01 Date and Time ei and Time for the LOD digital Fime 00 00 23 59 00 00 p Format 1 3 1 Set Read lock disable to enable in order 01 Enable Read Lock to protect the parameter saved in LCD i Disabl 02 digital operator from being overwritten 02 Disable Please select the correct INV type using INV Type Select LCD digital operator otherwise COM ee ue 1 Hes LX RX 01 ERROR will be displayed automatically 92 Type 2 JX Sets the number of parameter sets for 01 Single R W Storage Mode READ WRITE mode 02 Quad ue When LCD digital operator remains without key operations for 1 minute LCD backlight will be turned off When a key is pressed it 01 Off Backlight Auto Off wit turned on jo hennnie 01 The Backlight Auto Off function does not work when trip happened The Orange backlight will be enabled or 01 Enable Backlight Flick 1 AES E disabled 02 Disable 9 Use this function to return to default settings of LCD digital operator The next items will be reset 1 Language English 2 Date and Time 2009 01 01 THU 00 00 01 YES Operator Reset 3 Time format 01 YY MM DD 02 NO
37. is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 17 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration e constant speed operation Overload limit b021 selection 02 l ie in constant speed 01 No o OL restrict mode p 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 b022 Overload limit level 0 4 to 55 kW x No A OL restrict level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated 75 to 132 kW current Overload limit parameter b023 Decel rate OL 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s restrict 4 49 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration S TA tant speed operation a Overload limit f cons 8 b024 selection 2 02 Sia in constant speed 01 No S e a OL restrict 2 mode 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration 5 constant speed operation Accelerates 5 during regeneration fa 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 O b025 Overload limit level 2 0 4 to 55 kW x No A g OL restrict 2 level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated 75 to 132 kW current 8 Overload limit b026 parameter 2 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s O Decel rate OL2 rstr Overcurrent b027 suppression func
38. reverse power running Reverse power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 4 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b044 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled forward regeneration Forward regeneration under four quadrant separate setting b045 Torque LADSTOP 00 OFF Disabled 00 selection 01 ON Enabled C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 40 TL Torque limit enabled 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 42 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 4 59 Dual Rating Selection selection b049 in the operator 4 2 Function Mode e Ratings of the inverter are switched to Heavy Duty CT and Normal Duty VT and it enables it The ratings current value changes by switching Heavy Duty CT and Normal Duty VT The method of switching a Heavy Duty and a Normal Duty is done by Heavy Duty Normal Duty Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b049 Dual Rate Selection 00 CT Constant torque 01 VT Variable torque 00 eln the Normal Duty VT there is the item which is not displayed in the parameter of the operator Parameter No Function name Function code Function name d008 Real frequency monitor P024 Position bias amount d009 Torque reference monitor P025 E Hae a compensation enable d0
39. thermal frequency 2 tatah See senting cleetronle b018 R W 0 0 to Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 2 4314h Free setting electronic b019 R W 0to 400 1 Hz thermal frequency 3 1315h Free setting electronic b020 R W 0 0 to Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 3 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 1316h Overload limit selection b021 R W 02 ON Cnst Enabled during constant speed operation 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated nee current 0 4 to 55 kW 1317h Overload limit level b022 R W 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated 0 1 A current 75 to 132 kW 1318h Overload limit parameter b023 R W 0 10 to 30 00 0 01 s 4 194 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Be oly No code tion 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 1319h Overload limit selection 2 b024 R W 02 ON Cnst Enabled during constant speed operation 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated ree current 0 4 to 55 kW 131Ah Overload limit level 2 b025 R W 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated 0 1 A
40. time setting 0 to 65535 0 No h 4 52 RNT ONT time Hanae 00 FREE Forward and Reverse are Rotation direction enabled 2993 Aeon 01 FWD Only Forward is enabled OPE Ser i eos Ieee 02 REV Only Reverse is enabled Reduced voltage ae boas statup selection oe valage anetra maho e no 45s Reduced V start n E 00 All Complete display 5 Display selection 01 Utilized Individual display of functions b037 Display restriction 02 User User setting 00 No 4 53 03 Compare Data comparison display 04 Basic Basic display Initial screen b038 selection 000 to 202 001 No 4 56 Initial display User parameter automatic setting 00 OFF Disabled b039 function selection 01 ON Enabled 99 DG aay S Auto U param regist 00 4 quadrant Four quadrant separate setting b040 Torque limit selection 01 TRQ input Terminal switch 00 No 2 4 57 0 TRQ limit select 02 O input Analog input 4 59 E 03 Option 1 E 04 Option 2 g Torque limit 1 z Four quadrant mode 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 4 57 b041 forward power 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No RTA 4 59 running no Torque limit disabled TRQ limit FW POW 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 19 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range f during
41. 00 5 Register start number LSB 07 6 Number of holding registers LSB 02 6 toa start number 1 00 7 CRC 16 MSB 95 7 e start number 1 02 8 CRC 16 LSB 8A 8 CRC 16 MSB 36 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 9 CRC 16 LSB 37 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 4 169 Read the data received in response as follows 3 Transfers data by the number of data bytes In this example the Inverter sends response data on two holding registers 4 bytes Response buffer 4 5 6 7 Holding register start number 0 MSB 0 LSB 1 MSB 41 LSB Response data 00h 07h 00h 02h Trip cause Overvoltage trip During deceleration If the holding register content has not been read out normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into the Coil 05h gt Writes into one coil The following table shows the coil status change Coil status OFF gt ON ON gt OFF Change data MSB FFh 00h Change data LSB 00h 00h Example Issue the RUN command to the Inverter with slave address 10 To run the Inverter set 03 in A002 The coil number of the RUN command is 1 Query Response No Field name ste No Field name Pa 1 Slave address OA 1 Slave address OA 2 Function code 05 2 Function code 05 3 Coil start number MSB 2 00 3 Co
42. 07 EzSQ Drive Programming 10 Math Operation function result 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 1202h RUN command selection A002 R W 03 RS485 ModBus communication 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 1203h Base frequency A003 R W 30 to Max frequency 1 Hz 1204h Maximum frequency A004 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 00 O 02 Switches between O OI terminal 01 O 02 Switches between O O2 terminal AT 1205h O OI selection A005 R W 92 OVR SWitenice Dereon O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 03 OI VR Switches between OI FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 04 02 VR Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 0 02 only 1 O OI P auxiliary frequency reference not reversible T2o6nX O2 SElecNon A006 RW 2 O OI PM auxiliary frequency reference reversible 3 OFF O2 disabled 1207h to Not used 120Ah 120Bh AONI HIGH 0 01 O start frequency R W 0 00 to 400 00 120Ch Ren Pal LOW 120Dh Mola HIGH 0 01 O end frequency R W 0 00 to 400 00 120Eh AOE pal LOW 120Fh O start ratio A013 R W 0 to 100 1 4 186 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Bogie Function name paneton R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes al No code tion 1210h O end ratio A014 R W 0 to 100 1 00 External start frequency 1211h O start selection A015 R W A011 set value 01 0 Hz 1 to 30 1
43. 10 Improving A c shielding 3 d 10 Oo performance 10 5 10 10 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 Frequenz MHz 3 C f z Aluminum sheating with 4 ie r I Double layer copper wire Seen q copper wire Nia Sa braid CO 2a Meandering copper cable eo Double layer copper wire 2 c E of armoured steel wire 5 g braid with magnetically _ screened intermediate layer ar Single layer copper wire E n b 3 KXT a braid with varying 6 j Cable unnng in oonan OOS percentages of cable j made of copper or stee covering Controller signal shields connect only to the ends Single end or both but never midway Control signals are not emitter therefore the target is to create a coverage acting as antenna for the radiated emissions and drain them through single point to the ground multiple shielding points at different potentials will create undesirable recirculating noise currents through ground loops Ensure controller signals shield continuity Control lines should remain without interruptions directly connecting signal source and signal reception Should the case this is not possible terminal box plug connector or contactor relay absolutely needed then this elements should be selected of the highest quality and adequate for the signal to be managed it is not the same a START STOP 24VDC signal than a 5VDC TTL encoder signal than a 1Vpp sinusoidal signal of a SINCOS technology encoder from lower to highest sensivity to connection quality
44. 200 to 200 1 1011h Output voltage monitor d013 R 0 0 to 600 0 0 1 V 1012h Input power monitor d014 R 0 0 to 999 9 kW d015 1013h HIGH Integrated power monitor R 0 0 to 999999 9 0 1 h 1014h aoe LOW d016 1015h l HIGH Total RUN time R 0 to 999999 1 h 1016h ae LOW d017 1017h l HIGH Power ON time monitor R 0 to 999999 1 h 1018h SPIRA LOW 1019h Fin temperature monitor d018 R 020 to 200 0 0 1 C 101Ah Motor temperature monitor d019 R 020 to 200 0 0 1 C 101Bh _____ Not used 101Ch 2 0 Capacitor on the main circuit board 101Dh Life assessment monitor d022 R 2 1 Cooling fan rotation speed reduced 4 184 suoun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name nuncion R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code 101Eh to Not used 1025h 1026h DC voltage monitor d102 R 0 0 to 999 9 0 1 V 1027h Regenerative braking load d103 R 0 0to 100 0 0 1 rate monitor 1028h Electronic thermal monitor d104 R 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 1029h to Not used 102Dh d025 102Eh HIGH User monitor 0 q055 R 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 102Fh LOW 1030h nen User monitor 1 R 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 1031h d026 LOW d027 1032h HIGH User monitor 2 R 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 1033h do27 LOW d028 1034h l HIGH R Pulse count
45. 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 0 Hz detection signal 4 101 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation V2 control mode selection 4 124 23 POK Position ready Orientation function 4 134 24 FA4 Set frequency exceeded 2 Frequency arrival signal 4 98 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 Overload limit Overload warning 4 49 27 ODce Analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc Analog OI disconnection detection Window comparator function 4 66 29 O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output PID function 4 31 32 NDc Network error Network error 4 104 4 95 4 2 Function Mode Data Description Reference item Page 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 Logic operation function 4 102 36 LOGA4 Logic operation output 4 37 LOGS Logic operation output 5 38 LOGE Logic operation output 6 39 WAC Capacitor life warning signal Capacitor life warning signal 4 103 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal Cooling fan speed drop signal 4 104 41 FR Starting contact signal Starting contact signal 4 105 42 OHF Fin overheat warning Fin overheat warning 4 105 43 LOC Light load detection signal Light load detection signal 4 106 44 MO1 Drive programming output 1 45 MO2 Drive programming output 2 46 MO3 Drive programming output 3 47 MO4 Drive programming output 4 i a a o 48 MO5 Driv
46. A094 ae deceleration selection function input 09 example 1 01 Preset FQ Switched by setting r example 2 00 A294 2nd 2 step acceleration 02 FWD REV Enabled only when deceleration selection switching forward reverse example 3 A095 2 step acceleration frequency i 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 Hz A295 2nd 2 step acceleration frequency A096 2 step deceleration frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 Hz A296 2nd 2 step deceleration frequency Related functions F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 C001 to C008 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 37 4 2 Function Mode Select an acceleration deceleration time switching method from the following three Switching via a multi function input Automatic switching at a specified frequency Automatic switching only when switching between forward reverse If the 3rd control function is selected however switching by the 2 step acceleration deceleration frequency is disabled eTo switch via a multi function input allocate 09 2CH to any of C001 to C008 Example 1 When A094 A294 is set to 00 Example 2 When A094 A294 is set to 01 Acceleration 2 __ Deceleration 2 A096 A296 Deceleration 1 Output Output frequency frequency Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration time 1 time 2 fime2 t
47. Add direction frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 14 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation EL S curve ratio 1 A150 during acceleration 0 to 50 10 No S EL S start accel g EL S curve ratio 2 g A151 during acceleration 0 to 50 10 No EL S end accel Q 4 39 5 EL S curve ratio 1 A152 during deceleration 0 to 50 10 No 2 EL S start decel Q 2 EL S curve ratio 2 A153 during deceleration 0 to 50 10 No EL S end decel 00 TRIP Alarm 01 0 Hz start Retry selection 02 f match Frequency matching start b001 y 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency 00 No E Restart mode UV matching deceleration stop 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching 4 42 restart Allowable momentary bog a interruption 03 to 25 0 1 0 No s Allowable UV time Retry wait time b003 Retry wait time UV 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 4 87 wn o Z Momentary power 99 OFF Disabled z interr ption gt 01 ON Enabled 5 Bade undervoltage trip 02 Decel OFF Disabled during stop and og e A a during stop selection 2 d deceleration stop 5 UV trip on stop x 4 42 Momentary power 5 interruption retry time 00 16 times _ Z b095 selection 01 No limit o9 Me
48. As well shield should be guaranteed continuity by passthrough contact and never become grounded in this interruption point We recommend high quality connectors that handle the shielding twisted pairs differential signals e5 9 S S 8 9 9 control signal shield passthrough Encoders and sensors from the field In this case follow the recommendations of the manufac turer of the sensor device Most encoders and sensors with shielded cables will recommend 360 wrapping of the shield both at the sensing end and at the inverter end For many of them the shield ing and grounding will be integral to the body of the sensor 2 27 2 2 Wiring Direct connection as much as possible Direct connection to the communications port of the control unit is mandatory to reduce connection impedance This is very important if there is a long distance between the system and you expect there can be different PE Potential between the systems Shield surface maximization The effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible i e do not move the shield of conductors further away than absolutely necessary Avoid pigtails as much as possible Avoid long unshielded cable runs Control system in the same cabinet Connect shield in both sides never midway All analog and digital control lines are laid shielded With compact systems if the frequency inverter and the con
49. C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 05 4 106 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Forward Run Signal This signal is output while the Inverter is running forward eWhile the Inverter is running in reverse or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output eget 10 C025 terminal 11 to 15 selection E 51 FWR forward run signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection Reverse Run Signal This signal is output while the Inverter is running in reverse eWhile the Inverter is running forward or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021t0 0025 terminal 11 to 15 selection E 52 RVR reverse run signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection Output frequency kHz Signal during forward operation Signal during reverse operation Fatal Fault Signal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C0210 G02S terminal 11 to 15 selection E 53 MJA fatal fault signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection eIn addition to an alarm this signal is output if any of the following trips occurs These trips are caused by hardware No Error code Description 1 E10 CT error 2
50. F004 selection Operator rotation direction 00 FWD Forward 01 REV Reverse 00 _ 4 9 4 2 Function Mode lt Group A Standard Function Parameters gt Frequency Reference Selection Select the method for using the frequency reference Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 Frequency reference 03 RS485 ModBus communication aa selection 04 Option 1 9i _ 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 EzSQ Drive Programming 10 Math Operation function result Related functions A005 A141 to A143 A145 A146 Data Frequency reference source 00 Set a frequency with the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Set a frequency via terminals O L Ol L O2 L 02 Set a frequency via the Digital Operator F001 03 Set a frequency through the ModBus communication 04 Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 1 05 Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 2 06 Set a frequency as a pulse train by using 3G3AX PGO1 07 Drive Programming 10 The operation result of the frequency operation function is defined as a frequency reference 4 10 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode RUN Command Selection Select the method for using the RUN STOP command Parameter No Functio
51. FQ arrive decel 2 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 98 C052 PID FB upper limit PID FBV high limit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 No C053 PID FB lower limit PID FBV low limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 31 C055 Overtorque level Forward power running OV TRQ FW POW C056 Overtorque level Reverse regeneration OV TRQ RV REG C057 Overtorque level Reverse power running OV TRQ RVPOW C058 Overtorque level Forward regeneration OV TRQ FW REG 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 200 No 200 No 200 No 200 No 4 100 C061 Thermal warning level E Thermal warning 0 to 100 80 No 4 46 C062 Alarm code selection Alarm code output 00 OFF Disabled 01 3 bit 02 4 bit 00 No 4 101 C063 0 Hz detection level OHz detection level 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 No Hz 4 101 C064 Fin overheat warning level Heatsink warning 0 to 200 120 No C 4 105 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 31 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter A Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page o setting operation Communication 02 Loop back test
52. Gate array communications error 23 Input phase loss protection 24 Main circuit error 25 IGBT error 30 Thermistor error 35 Brake error addition 36 Emergency shutoff error 37 Low speed range electronic thermal 38 Option 1 errors 0 to 9 60 to 69 Option 2 errors 0 to 9 70 to 79 4 183 lt Holding Register Number List Monitor gt 4 4 Communication Function Bed ee Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code d001 1001h l HIGH Output frequency monitor J00 R 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz 1002h LOW 1003h Output current monitor d002 R 0 0 to 9999 0 0 1 A FWD Forward 1004h Rotation direction monitor d003 R STOP Stop REV Reverse d004 1005h HIGH PID feedback value monitor R 0 00 to 999000 00 1006h doo4 LOW Anti z 2 0 Terminal 1 to 2 7 Terminal 8 1007h Multi function input monitor d005 R 2A8 Terminal FW z 7 AA 5 A 1008h Multi function output do06 R 2 0 Terminal 11 to 2M Terminal 15 monitor 246 Relay terminal te Output f it HIGH TP ES I R ESA R 0 00 to 39960 00 0 01 IOoAk after conversion d007 LOW d008 100Bh HIGH R Real frequency monitor 400 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz 100Ch goes R LOW 100Dh Torque reference monitor d009 R 200 to 200 1 100Eh Torque bias monitor d010 R 200 to 200 1 100Fh Not used 1010h Output torque monitor d012 R
53. H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 H060 H260 H061 H261 4 117 4 2 Function Mode Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is at 2 1 kHz or lower the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 Set a torque limit value b041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out a Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 Torque Monitor Function e This function allows you to monitor an estimated motor output torque when sensorless vector a control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit a V f characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector control a A044 A244 selection 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 00 aa 05 V2 Sensor vector control e C027 FM selection 02 Output TRQ Output torque 0 C028 AM selection 11 Out TRQ sign Output torque signed 00 C029 AMI selection C028 only H003 H203 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 0 Factory
54. Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage in EEPROM 0901h to Not used 1000h 1FO1h Coil control word R W Register coil 0001h to OOOFh 1E01h Coil status word R Register coil 0010h to 001Fh Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 182 EN suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Inverter Trip Factor List Trip factor high order factor Trip factor low order Inverter status Name Code Name Code No trip factor 0 During reset 0 Overcurrent protection during constant speed 1 During stop 1 Overvoltage protection during deceleration 2 During deceleration 2 Overcurrent protection during acceleration 3 During constant speed 3 Overcurrent protection during stop 4 During acceleration 4 Overload protection 5 Operates at frequency 0 5 Braking resistor overload protection 6 During startup 6 Overvoltage protection 7 During DB 7 EEPROM error 8 During overload limit 8 Undervoltage protection 9 During SON FOC 9 CT error 10 CPU error 11 External trip 12 USP error 13 Grounding protection 14 Incoming overvoltage protection 15 Momentary power interruption protection 16 Power module abnormal temperature 20 during FAN stop Power module abnormal temperature 21
55. OPO Option board output no Not used When C062 is used to select the alarm code eS output the multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forcibly changed to ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 Acn Alarm code output respectively 00 21 03 07 01 05 No 4 95 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 43 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C027 FM selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 03 Pulse FQ Digital output frequency 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 08 Pulse Digital current monitor 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 12 YAO Drive programming 19 OP1 Option board 1 20 OP2 Option board 2 00 No 4 109 4 118 C028 Analog monitor AM selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Out
56. Output 13 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S 5 C135 Output 13 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C136 Output 14 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No s 4 108 oJ C137 Output 14 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 w C138 Output 15 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 amp E C139 Output 15 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 jo 3 C140 Relay output ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 6 c141 Relay output OFF 4 to 100 0 0 0 delay C142 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C143 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 1 00 AND CHa Output Sig 01 OR 00 operator selection 02 XOR C145 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 z selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C146 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2 Logic output signal 2 Po AND 5 CIAF pada A DIOR 00 Q 02 XOR No 4 102 E C148 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 oO C149 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 e selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 3 007AND c150 oe Output Sig 01 OR 00 operator selection 02 XOR C151 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is
57. Output frequency Output voltage Carrier Frequency eYou can change the PWM waveform carrier frequency output from the Inverter Parameter No Function name Data HD Data ND Default setting Unit 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 KW 0 5 to 12 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 b083 Carrier frequency kHz 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 0 5 to 8 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 eWith the carrier frequency set high you can reduce metallic noise from the motor However this increases noise or leakage current from the Inverter Helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity To raise the carrier frequency fc derate the output current as shown in the following table Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal level If the existing electronic thermal value is lower than the derating value the above setting is not required eTo raise the carrier frequency reduce the output current or derate the rated current as shown in the graph below Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Derating at fc Derating at fc Capacit Max fe Deratingatfc Deratingatfc Max fc 12 kHz 8kHz 15 kHz 10 kHz pacry kHz 12 kHz ND 15 kHz HD kHz for 75 to 132 for 75 to 132 kW kW ND HD 0 4 kw 15 100 100 15 100 100 0 75 kW 15 100 100 15 100 100 1 5 kW 15 100 100 15 100 100 2 2 kW 15 100 100 15 100 100 3 7 kW 15 90 100
58. Reverse 0010h Rotation direction R 0 Forward Interlocked with d003 1 Ready 0011h Inverter ready R 0 Not ready 0012h Not used 1 During trip 0013h RUN during RUN R 0 Normal 0014h FA1 constant speed arrival signal R TSON P g 0 OFF FA2 over set frequency arrival 1 ON Ooth signal R 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 176 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description 1 ON 0016h OL overload warning R 0 OFF 0017h OD excessive PID deviation R 1 ON 0 OFF 1 ON 0018h AL alarm output R 0 OFF FA3 set frequency only arrival 1 ON 0019h signal R 0 OFF 1 ON 001Ah OTQ overtorque R 0 OFF IP signal during momentary power 1 ON 001Bh interruption R 0 OFF 001Ch UV signal during undervoltage R TON 0 OFF og 1 ON 001Dh TRQ torque limit R 0 OFF f 1 ON 001Eh RNT RUN time over R 0 OFF 001Fh ONT Power ON time over R TON 0 OFF 1 ON 0020h THM therm
59. absolute position control mode 00 No 4 136 5 Control pulse setting 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position jal control mode O Pulse train mode 00 Mode 1 P013 selection 01 Mode 2 00 No 4 127 Pulse train mode 02 Mode 3 Orientation stop P014 position 0 to 4095 0 No Home search stop Orientation speed Starting frequency to Max frequency upper P015 setting ha g treq y en y Upp 5 00 No Hz limit 120 0 4 134 Home search speed Orientation direction setting 00 FWD Forward side Pole Home search 01 REV Reverse side 99 No direction 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 41 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page P017 Position ready range setting Home search range O to 10000 No Pulse 4 127 4 134 P018 Position ready delay time setting Home search delay 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 No 4 127 4 134 P019 Electronic gear setting position selection E gear position 00 FB Position feedback side 01 REF Position command side 00 Yes P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator E gear ratio Num 1 to 9999 Yes P021 Electronic gear ratio denominator E gear ratio Den 1 to 9999 Yes P022 Position
60. current 75 to 132 kW 131Bh Overload limit parameter 2 b026 R W 0 10 to 30 00 0 01 s Overcurrent suppression 00 OFF Disabled 1316h function poet RW 01 ON Enabled 7 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated Active Frequency current 0 4 to 55 kW LAIRD Matching restart level wee RW 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated OSAI current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency 131Eh Matching restart b029 R W 0 10 to 30 00 0 01 s parameter Starting frequency at 00 Off FQ Frequency at interruption 131Fh Active Frequency b030 R W 01 Max FQ Max frequency Matching restart 02 Set FQ Set frequency 00 Lock SFT Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Only FQ SFT Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parame ter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 1320h Soft lock selection b031 R W 02 Lock Data other than b031 cannot be changed 03 Only FQ Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 RUN chg mode Data other than pa rameters changeable during opera tion cannot be changed 1321h Not used 1322h Not used 1323h ic R W RUN time Power ON time 0 to 65535 1 h setting b034 1324h LOW R W 00 FREE Forward and Reverse are Rotation direction limit enabled 12N selection p939 RW 01 FWD Only Forward is enabled E 02 REV Only Reverse is enabled 0 Reduced voltage startup time Short 1326h Reduced voltage s
61. e 1 2 5 2 2 3G3RX A4022 2 2 2 M4 2 4 L 20A max 1 8 4 0 3G3RX A4040 2 2 2 M4 2 4 La 20A max 1 8 5 5 3G3RX A4055 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 R2 5 eet 40A 4 0 max 7 5 3G3RX A4075 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 3 5 5 am 40A 4 0 max 11 3G3RX A4110 5 5 5 5 5 5 M6 R5 5 6 FO 40A 4 4 max 15 3G3RX A4150 8 8 8 M6 8 6 S 75A 2 4 9 max 8 18 5 3G3RX A4185 14 14 14 M6 14 6 Bi 75A ile 4 9 max Q ro 22 4 5 g 3G3RX A4220 14 14 14 M6 14 6 75A 4 9 max D Oo 30 3G3RX A4300 22 22 Me 22 6 5 100 A 4 9 max eS xs i 4 A 8 1 37 3G3RX A4370 38 22 M8 38 8 20 0 max 100 A o 45 3G3RX A4450 38 22 M8 38 8 8 1 5 150A 20 0 max 2 55 3G3RX A4550 60 30 M8 R60 8 8 1 150 A 20 0 max 100 4 20 0 75 3G3RX B4750 38 x 2 38 M10 100 10 22 0 max 225 A 100 4 20 0 90 3G3RX B4900 38 x 2 38 M10 100 10 22 0 max 225 A i 150 4 7 20 0 110 3G3RX B411K 38 x 2 60 M10 150 10 35 0 max 300 A 132 3G3RX B413K 80x2 80 M10 80 10 20 0 350 A 35 0 max 1 When the cable is connected without using the crimp terminal bare wires use the square washer included with the product Note The cable size is based on the HIV cable 75 C heat resistance 2 18 u s q 2 2 Wiring E Connection for Separating Inverter Control Circuit Power Supply from Main Power Supply If the Inverter protection circuit is activated to turn off the magnetic contactor of the Inverter input power supply the
62. e The graph on the right shows the time limit characteristics with the electronic thermal level b012 set to 64 A 60 3 0 0 69 8 96 128 Motor current A 109 150 200 Ratio to the rated 4 current of the Inverter Electronic Thermal Characteristics The frequency characteristics are integrated with the above b012 b212 b312 set values eA general purpose motor requires reduced load current because the lower the output frequency is the lower the cooling capability of its self cooling fan The reduced torque characteristics are designed to fit the heat radiation of a general purpose motor Functions Reduced Torque Characteristics Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012 b212 b312 for each frequency Example 3G3RX A2150 Rated current 64 A b012 64 A Base frequency 60 Hz Output frequency 20 Hz Torque os Trip time s x1 0 x0 8 x0 6 60 Inverter output 3 0 0 5 16 50 frequency Hz ok 20 60 0 55 8 76 8 102 4 Motor current A 87 2 120 160 Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter Base frequency Constant Torque Characteristics Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor Example 3G3RX A2150 Rated current 64 A b012 64 A Output frequency 2 5 Hz Torque Output current value A x1 0 b020 x0 8 b018 x0 6 b016 Inverter output 0 255 60 frequency Hz O b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Max frequency Hz 4 47 4 2 Functi
63. key the cursor will appear on the first row of the four d group inverter parameters Use the S or key to move between the four Monitor B inverter parameters 3 Pressing the key the cursor will appear on the function code of the d inverter parameters selected Use the S or key to select other function code e Pressing the key the function code is selected and then displayed on the Monitor B display Mode e Pressing the key the change will be cancelled 3 10 uonesado Operation 3 4 Operation 6 Function Mode 1 Please select Function Mode by using the 4 or a key at the navigation level 2 Pressing the key the cursor will appear in the function code Then use the S amp or LA key to select the function that will be changed 3 After that pressing 4 key the cursor will appear in the parameter value Use the A or key to select the value to be set e To store the parameter value press the key e Pressing the Jj key changes will be cancelled 3 11 TION M1 STOP ALL a o a 3 4 Operation 7 Trip Mode 1 Select the R or key to select trip mode at the navigation layer 2 Pressing the key the past trip information 6 trip errors and the warning information 1 time that are recorded on the inverter will be displ
64. speed selection 037 2400 bps co71 SP lt 04 4800 bps 05 No as Baud rate selection Comm baud rate 05 9600 bps i 06 19200 bps Communication C072 station No selection 1 to 247 1 No Modbus address Communication bit 7 7 bit C073 length selection 8 8 bit 8 No Comm Data length 4 146 z Communication 00 No parity C074 parity selection 01 Even 00 No 2 Parity 02 Odd z Communication stop 4 4 S C075 bit selection s ee 1 No 2 Stop bit i E 00 Trip O Communication error 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop O C076 selection 02 Ignore 02 No Comm error mode 03 Free RUN Free run stop 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop Communication error 4 104 C077 timeout 0 00 to 99 99 0 00 No S 4 146 Comm Timeout Communication wait C078 time O to 1000 0 No ms Comm wait time 4 146 ommunication f 00 ASCII C079 method selection 01 ModBus RTU 01 No Comm mode O adjustment Factory Cosi O span calibration 01069535 default RS E E Ol adjustment Factory GOS Ol span calibration ag pean defauit eS E E O2 adjustment Factor C083 02 span 0 to 65535 YI Yes Q m default calibration n Thermistor lt adjustment Factory C085 PTC span 0 0 to 1000 0 default Yes 4 75 calibration Debug mode Ann C091 selection 9 D a h h 00 No Ea Debug mode select ge 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SE
65. 01h 03h the Inverter makes the slave address and function code the same as the query and attaches the read data to the query 4 166 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Abnormal Response gt Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 elf an error aside from a communication error is found in the query content the Inverter returns exception responses without performing any operation eTo determine the cause of an error check the function code of the response The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added eCheck the details of the error with the exception code Exception code 4 167 Code Description Oth An unsupported function has been specified 02h Specified address does not exist 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 21h Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing into the holding register The Inverter does not allow this function e Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation 22h e Has issued the enter command during operation UV e Has written into the register during trip UV e Has written into the read only register coil lt No Response gt The Inverter ignores the query and does not respond if e The broadcast is received eA communication error is detected in receiving a query e The query slave address
66. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 0 2 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 EU mode b085 01 0 2 kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 4 0 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 5 5 kw 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 EU mode b085 01 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 90 kW 110 132 150 160 EU mode b085 01 90kW 110 132 150 160 elf the data is a numeric value refer to the function code list Example When acceleration time F002 is set to 30 00 sec the data is 3000 Negative response Refer to page 4 161 4 158 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 159 lt Command 07 gt Writes data to a specified setting item Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 10 36 ana FF Communication with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 07 Parameter Parameter No for data 4 bytes 1 Parameter data 7 Data Decimal ASCII code Spytesa is Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 1 Allowable pa
67. 1 V 002Ch Fault monitor 3 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 002Dh Fault monitor 3 RUN time LOW 002Eh Fault monitor 3 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 002Fh Fault monitor 3 ON time LOW 0030h Fault monitor 4 factor See Inyener Trip FactorList page 4 183 0031h Fault monitor 4 Inverter status See Inverter Trip Factor List page 4 183 0032h Fault monitor 4 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 i 0033h Fault monitor 4 frequency LOW Hz 0034h Fault monitor 4 current d084 AUPE CEAT vel Me REIRE UTE a 0 1 A 0035h Fault monitor 4 voltage 0036h Fault monitor 4 RUN time HIGH 0037h Fault monitor 4 RUN time LOW 0038h Fault monitor 4 ON time HIGH 0039h Fault monitor 4 ON time LOW tripping DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V Total RUN time before the trip 1 h Total power ON time before the trip 1 h Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 181 4 4 Communication Function ee Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution o code 003Ah Fault monitor 5 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List _ page 4 183 003Bh F
68. 10 00 Yes H252 gain 1 00 P gain M2 Limit at 0 Hz a 116 foHz Speed limit 100 9 2 di T 0 0 to 100 0 Yes 2nd limit at Zz 6 zi H260 OHz Speed limit M2 109 0 g Boost amount at SLV 5 H061 startup 0 Hz 50 4 117 O Bst HiTQ start SLV 2nd boost amountat 9 to 50 Yes SLV startup 0 Hz Hee Bst HiTQ start SLV a M2 For PI proportional H070 gain switching 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes PI P gain term For PI integral gain H071 switching 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes PI gain term 4 89 For P proportional H072 gain switching 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 Yes P gain term Ho73 cal switching time 0 to 9999 100 Yes ms Gain switching time 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 40 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default aus Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation Operation selection at option 1 error 00 Trip o O01 Error mode OP1 01 RUN Continues operation 99 No card 4 111 Operation selection at option 2 error 00 Trip _ p002 Error mode OP2 01 RUN Continues operation 99 No card Encoder pulses pa P011 FB Encoder PPR 128 to 65535 1024 No Pulse 4 133 4 134 00 ASR speed control mode V2 control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode 4 124 a P012 selection 02 APR2
69. 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 14000047 DE 10100069 DE 116 1 95 064001 16 DE 1 108 135 133 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 70 04410167 DE 136 9 5 5 20 120 152 135 94 7 03350219 DE 146 6 00 02330307 DE 160 11 4 150 177 160 115 7 2 400V 01750430 DE 182 6 14 3 01200644 DE 161 88 17 0 195 162 5 185 10 00920797 DE 196 123 25 5 00741042 DE 188 109 34 0 00611236 DE 198 119 38 0 240 200 228 00501529 DE 2 42 0 228 149 a 00372094 DE 12 48 8 00312446 DE 67 0 216 133 00252981 DE 300 250 288 67 0 00213613 DE 236 153 79 0 7 21 7 3 Options Specifications Voltage inverter Iype lie addict Reference Current value A Inductance mH A2004 0 4 AX RC10700032 DE 3 2 10 70 A2007 0 7 AX RC06750061 DE 6 1 6 75 A2015 1 5 AX RC03510093 DE 9 3 3 51 A2022 2 2 AX RC02510138 DE 13 8 2 51 A2037 3 7 AX RC01600223 DE 22 3 1 60 A2055 5 5 AX RC01110309 DE 30 9 14 A2075 T5 AX RC00840437 DE 43 7 0 84 200V A2110 11 0 AX RC00590614 DE 61 4 0 59 A2150 15 0 AX RC00440859 DE 85 9 0 44 A2185 A2220 18 5 to 22 AX RC00301275 DE 127 5 0 30 A2300 30 AX RC00231662 DE 166 2 0 23 A2370 37 AX RC00192015 DE 201 5 0 19 A2450 45 AX RC00162500 DE 250 0 0 16 A2550 55 AX RC00133057 DE 305 7 0 13 A4004 0 4 AX RC43000020 DE 2 0 43 00 A4007 0 7 AX RC27000030 DE 3 0 27 00 A4015 1 5 AX RC14000047 DE 4 7 14 00 A4022 2 2 AX RC10100069 DE 6 9 1
70. 18 A097 01 02 03 04 A131 19 A097 01 02 03 04 A132 20 Any of b012 b212 and b312 02 b015 to b020 21 b021 01 02 03 b022 b023 22 b024 01 02 03 b025 b026 23 b050 01 b051 to b054 24 b095 01 02 b090 b096 25 b098 01 02 b099 C085 26 b120 01 b121 to b127 27 PA to C008 05 and A028 to A035 28 Any of C001 to C008 06 A038 A039 29 Any of C001 to C008 07 A053 to A055 A059 30 any or coot 1o coos See e e a 31 A to C008 08 and A246 A247 32 Any of C001 to C008 08 and A241 A242 A243 A244 00 01 4 54 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode No Display requirements Parameters displayed when the requirements are met Any of C001 to C008 08 and 33 A244 03 04 H202 H205 H250 H251 H252 Any of C001 to C008 08 and 34 A244 04 H260 H261 Any of C001 to C008 08 35 A244 03 04 and H202 00 PE ANE ES Any of C001 to C008 08 38 A244 03 04 and H202 01 02 Reato ees Any of C001 to C008 08 and 37 A094 01 02 A295 A296 38 Any of C001 to C008 11 b088 F302 F303 A303 A304 A320 A342 A343 A392 A393 b312 39 Any of C001 to C008 17 b313 H306 40 Any of C001 to C008 18 C102 41 Any of C001 to C008 27 28 29 C101 42 Any of C021 to C026 03 C040 C041 43 Any of C021 to C026 26 C040 C111 44 Any of C021 to C026 02 06 C042 C043 45 A
71. 2 C012 R W S operation selection 140Dh Multi function input 3 C013 R W _ operation selection 140Eh Multi function input 4 C014 R W operation selection 140Fh Multi function input 5 C015 R W nee NO SY operation selection 01 NC 1410h Multi function input 6 C016 R W _ operation selection 1411h Multi function input 7 C017 R W _ operation selection 1412h Multi function input 8 C018 R W operation selection 1413h FW terminal operation C019 R W zi selection 1414h Not used 4 202 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register i poise Function name paneton R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes gu No code tion 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning C021 R W _ 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FA3 set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal during momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over d 12 ONT Power ON time over Multi function output C022 R W 13 THM thermal warning terminal 12 selection 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FAS set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 Multi
72. 268435456 when APR2 is selected 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is d030 Current position selected 4 6 monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is 4 137 selected d031 Clock Setting Data and Time for the LCD digital operator d060 Inverter mode 00 to 01 dogo Faultfrequency 9 to 65535 Time 46 monitor d081 Fault monitor 1 Latest 4 7 d082 Fault monitor 2 Error code condition of occurrence 4 7 d083 Fault monitor 3 Output frequency Hz gt Output current A 4 7 Internal DC voltage V ___ d084 Fault monitor 4 RUN time h 4 7 d085 Fault monitor 5 gt ON time h 4 7 d086 Fault monitor 6 4 7 3 Warning code d090 Warning monitor 0 to 385 4 7 d102 DC voltage monitor 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 7 Regenerative d103 braking load rate 0 0 to 100 0 4 7 monitor diag Electronic thermal 00 to 100 0 47 monitor 3 22 uonesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Basic Function Mode F Parameter Default Changes Function name Monitor or data range s during Unit Page No setting i operation Gutpatiequane 0 0 Starting frequency to 1st 2nd 3rd max F001 ae Hs sia y frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 8 9 0 00 to 400 00 F002 Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 F202 2nd acceleration 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F302 gt 3rd acceleration 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes
73. 3 Hz enabling high precision operation eTo use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 A244 to 03 eTo use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Motor Parameter Selection page 4 115 eNote the following before use Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the motor size specified elf sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below arraren Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item status Speed change ratio is a Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to set H021 H221 H031 Power negative value parameter x 1 2 runnin io i g Speed change ratio isa Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually down to set H021 H221 H031 positive value parameter x 0 8 Increase motor parameter R1 gradually up to set H020 H220 H030 ___ Insufficient torque at low parameter x 1 2 Regeneration frequency several Hz t ter duall to set ncrease motor parameter lo gradually up to se H023 H223 H033 parameter x 1 2 During Shock occurs during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 startup startup During Reduce the speed response HO005 H205 S Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 Insuffici
74. 4 12 external DC injection braking 0 ee eee 4 25 external thermistor external trip EXT eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeneee F SSS F Rescectige ieee AE AEE 4 88 fatal fault SiQnal eee eee eee ee eee cee tee teeteaes 4 107 fault MONIOF 3 2 ieee ei ee aed aia Faaa 4 7 capacitor life Warning eee eet eeeeeeeeeees 4 103 Carrier freQUeNCy ceeeseeseseeeeeeeseesereeseneneeeeeaes 4 68 CAS es Sarat ite cic A a AEN 4 89 Commercial switching eee eee teen nena communication fUNCtION 0 cee ee ee eee tees constant torque characteristics VC a control Circuit terminal eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeees control gain switching cece eee eee Control method eesseceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesensenees 4 21 Cooling fan control ee ee eee eee testes eee teeteaeeees 4 74 cooling fan speed drop signal c ee 4 104 Current position MONItOM eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 Index 1 Fl tots ioren tee ee cate caer eee ace 2 20 fin overheat Warning eee eset eeseeteeeeteeeaes 4 105 fin temperature Monitor 0 cece eee eee eteeeeeeeeeeee 4 4 frO rUN StOD 0casccecctieedenesiccnesneesteeee eae daeeeetnest 4 71 free run stop selection and stop selection 4 70 frequency addition function 0 eee 4 41 frequency arrival Signal 00 eee eee eects 4 98 frequency conversion coefficient
75. 8 5 100 AX BCR4070130 TE 70 52 130 97 5 5 125 AX BCR4090240 TE 90 67 240 180 3 2 250 7 3 Options Braking Resistor AX REMOOKOOOD IE Dimensional Drawing AX REMO00K1200 400 IE AX REM00K2 4 6000 IE _ a i JA C My 4 VY 4 4 Vi id Fi WY ip L W HG K jp g 7 f PA e j H a J lig Lia Di 4 mil 2 a A Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l T KG AX REM00K2070 IE 70 200 AX REMO00K2120 IE 120 200 105 27 36 94 0 2 AX REM00K2200 IE 200 200 AX REM00K4075 IE 75 400 AX REM00K4035 IE 35 400 200 27 36 189 0 425 AX REMO00K4030 IE 30 400 AX REMO00K5120 IE 120 500 260 27 36 249 0 58 AX REMO0K6100 IE 100 600 320 27 36 309 0 73 AX REMOOK6035 IE 35 600 7 16 suoiediineds Specifications 7 3 Options AX REM00K9000 IE AX REM00K9070 IE 70 900 AX REM00K9020 IE 20 900 200 62 100 74 1 41 AX REM00K9017 IE 17 900 AX REM01K9000 IE AX REM01K9070 IE 70 1900 200 62 100 74 1 41 AX REM01K9017 IE 17 1900 7 17 7 3 Options AX REM02 03KO000 1E Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l T KG AX REM02K1070 IE 70 2100 310 100 240 295 210 7 AX REM02K1017 IE 17 2100 AX REM03K5035 IE 35 3500 365 100 240 350 210 8 AX REM03K5010 IE 10 3500
76. A E20 Abnormal temperature due to the cooling fin s speed drop 1 1 0 1 E21 Abnormal temperature 1 1 1 0 E24 Input phase loss protection 1 1 1 1 E50 to E79 Network error Options 1 2 E Errors 0 to 9 Output Signal Logic Operation e This function performs output signal logic operations inside the Inverter e All output signals are operation targets However the logic operation outputs LOG1 to LOG6 are not subject to operations Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal 11 to 15 selection 33 LOG1 Logic operation output C142 C143 C144 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 C145 C146 C147 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 C148 C149 C150 36 LOG4 Logic operation output 4 C151 C152 C153 Relay output 37 LOG5 OES ee Logic operation output 5 C154 C155 C156 05 38 LOG6 Logic operation output 6 C157 C158 C159 C142 C145 C148 Logic output signal Select 00 to 50 from the putter output C151 C154 C157 selection 4 data other than LOG1 to LOG6 00 Select operand 1 C143 C146 C149 Logic output signal O output m z C152 C155 C158 selection 2 Select operand 2 C144 C147 C150 Logic output signal a ae 00 o C153 C156 C159 operator selection 02 XOR 4 102 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode eYou can select from three types of operators AND O
77. A343 3rd manual torque 5 0 g boost frequency Oo 6 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 5 01 VP Special reduced torque S a characteristics A044 oe 02 Free V f characteristics 00 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 V2 Sensor vector control 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque No 4 21 2nd V f characteristics A244 characteristics 02 Free V f characteristics 00 selection 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 V2 Sensor vector control 3rd V f 00 VC Constant torque characteristics A344 characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque 00 selection characteristics A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Yes 4 24 Automatic torque A046 boost voltage 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes 8 2nd automatic m A246 torque boost voltage O to 255 100 D compensation gain 5 4 20 a Automatic torque 5 A047 boost slip 0 to 255 100 S compensation gain Yes 2nd automatic A247 torque boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 27 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Pais N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page o setting o
78. AX RAI00072700 DE 165 210 g 110 27 0 7 26 suo1eaoads Specifications 7 3 Options Specifications Voltage Max Eea Reference current value Inductance 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAI02800100 DE 10 0 2 8 2 2 to 3 7 AX RAI00880200 DE 20 0 0 88 5 5 to 7 5 AX RAI00350335 DE 33 5 0 35 3 phase 200V 11 0 to 15 0 AX RAI00180670 DE 67 0 0 18 18 5 to 22 0 AX RAI00091000 DE 100 0 0 09 30 0 to 37 0 AX RAI00071550 DE 155 0 0 07 45 0 to 55 0 AX RAI00042300 DE 230 0 0 04 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAI07700050 DE 5 0 7 7 2 2 to 4 0 AX RAI03500100 DE 10 0 3 5 5 5 to 7 5 AX RAI01300170 DE 17 0 1 3 11 0 to 15 0 AX RAI00740335 DE 33 5 0 74 3 phase 400V 18 5 to 22 0 AX RAI00360500 DE 50 0 0 36 30 0 to 37 0 AX RAI00290780 DE 78 0 0 29 45 0 to 55 0 AX RAIO0191150 DE 115 0 0 19 75 0 to 90 0 AX RAIO0111850 DE 185 0 0 11 110 0 to 132 0 AX RAI00072700 DE 270 0 0 07 Chokes AX FEROOOO RE Dimensional Drawing I X l oO 0 wy Om o o L H Reference D Motor Dimensions Weight diameter KW Kg E Ww H X Y m AX FER2102 RE 21 lt 2 2 85 22 46 70 5 0 1 AX FER2515 RE 25 lt 15 105 25 62 90 5 0 2 AX FER5045 RE 50 lt 45 150 50 110 125 30 5 0 7 AX FER6055 RE 60 lt 55 200 65 170 180 45 6 1 7 7 27 7 3 Options M AX OP05 E 123 7 28 suolediineds Specifications 7 3 Options Digital O
79. Ae R W HIGH 0 01 Ol end frequency K 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 102 1284h LOW R W 1285h Ol start ratio A103 R W 0 to Ol end ratio 1 1286h Ol end ratio A104 R W Ol start ratio to 100 1 00 Start FQ Use OI start frequency 1287h Ol start selection A105 R W A101 01 0 Hz 1288h to Not used 128Ch 128Dh AL R W HIGH 0 01 O2 start frequency x 400 00 to 400 00 Hz 111 128Eh Low R W 128Fh A112 Rw HIGH 0 01 O2 end frequency REE 400 00 to 400 00 Hz 1290h LOW R W 1291h O2 start ratio A113 R W 100 to O2 end ratio 1 1292h O2 end ratio A114 R W O2 start ratio to 100 1 1293h to Not used 12A4h 12A5h Acceleration urve A131 R W 01 Small curve to 10 Large curve parameter iem o ea ONEIN A132 R W 01 Small curve to 10 Large curve parameter 12A7h to Not used 12AEh 00 Operator Digital Operator F001 01 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 02 O Input O Operation frequency input 03 Ol Input Ol _ en A setting Alal RAY 04 Modbus RS485 communication 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency 4 192 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes ols No code tion 00 Operator Digital Operator F001 01 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 02 O Input O Operation frequency inpu
80. Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C160 Input terminal response time 1 Input 1 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C161 Input terminal response time 2 Input 2 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C162 Input terminal response time 3 Input 3 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C163 Input terminal response time 4 Input 4 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C164 Input terminal response time 5 Input 5 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C165 Input terminal response Input terminal response time 6 Input 6 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C166 Input terminal response time 7 Input 7 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C167 Input terminal response time 8 Input 8 resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms C168 FW terminal response time Input FW resp time 0 to 200 x 2 ms No ms 4 108 C169 Others Multi step speed position determination time Multi spd determ time 0 to 200 x 10 ms No ms 4 16 4 137 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 36 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default mee Function name Monitor or data range 5 duri
81. Bits left r a S 4 A Interchange the Hi and Lo SAMRGRG raat by 1 bit to bytes of CRC g Overflow bit after shift Tl c gt O m fe Completed Babee Se eee elec E See Shee ecco so sell Shift by 1 byte against target data lt Header and Trailer Silent Interval gt Wait time from receiving the query from the master to the response by the Inverter Be sure to provide 3 5 characters 24 bits as the wait time If the length does not reach 3 5 characters the Inverter does not respond The actual communication wait time is the total of the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting Message Configuration Response lt Total Communication Time gt The time from receiving query to the response by the Inverter is the total of the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting elf sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response be sure to provide the silent interval length 3 5 characters at the minimum lt Normal Response gt elf the query is the loop back function code 08h the Inverter sends back a response of the same content as the query elf the query is the function code to be written into the holding register or coil 05h O6h OFh 10h the Inverter sends back the query as it is in response e f the query is the function code to be read from the holding register or coil
82. E11 CPU error 3 E14 Grounding protection 4 E20 Abnormal temperature due to cooling fan stop 5 E23 Gate array communications error 6 E25 Main circuit error 4 107 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Output Terminal ON Delay OFF Delay eYou can set ON OFF delay times for each output terminal Output terminal ON delay time OFF delay time 11 C130 C131 12 C132 C133 13 C134 C135 14 C136 C137 15 C138 C139 RY AL C140 C141 e All output signals immediately turn on off when the specified conditions are satisfied Depending on the selected signal chattering may occur In such a case use this function to hold or delay the signal Set the parameters for individual output terminals multi function output terminals 11 to 15 and the a relay output terminal six terminals in total For the output terminals and the corresponding 3 parameters refer to the table below ie Function code Item Data Default setting Unit rr C130 C132 C134 C136 0 0 to 100 0 C138 C140 Output ON delay Set an ON delay time 9 0 C131 0133 C135 C137 0 0 to 100 0 C139 C141 Output OFF delay Set an OFF delay time 0 9 Input Terminal Response Time eYou can set a sampling time individually for multi function input terminals 1 to 8 as well as the FW terminal This helps remove chattering or other noise e f the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering increase the set v
83. E72 0 pulses during position control Position control range trip Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position exceeds the setting values of the position limit range specification for E63 0 E73 0 Forward P072 and Reverse P073 during absolute position control 3G3AX PG01 Shuts off the output and displays an error if a connection mounting connection error failure of the PG board is detected E69 0 E79 0 Note Check the DIP switch settings on the PG board for any abnormal operation Function List of the DIP Switches on the PG Board 3G3AX PG01 DIP switch Switch No Description ON Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder A B phase is not connected 1 OFF Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder A B phase is not connected SWENC ON Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder Z phase is not 3 connected OFF Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder Z phase is not connected ON With the termination resistor between SAP and SAN 150 Q 1 3 OFF Without the termination resistor between SAP and SAN WR ON With the termination resistor between SBP and SBN 150 Q 2 OFF Without the termination resistor between SBP and SBN Protection function display when the digital command board 3G3AX DI01 is mounted Name Description Error Code 3G3AX DI01 Shuts off the output and displays an error if a timeout occurs i
84. EDC Reactor Connection Terminal PD 1 P e This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor for power factor improvement By factory default a short circuit bar has been connected between the terminals PD 1 and P Before connecting the DC reactor remove this short circuit bar e The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or less If the DC reactor is not used do not remove the short circuit bar If you remove the short circuit bar without connecting the DC reactor no power is supplied to the Inverter main circuit disabling operation MExternal Braking Resistor Connection Terminal P RB Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal P N e The Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a regenerative braking circuit To improve braking capability mount the optional external braking resistor to this terminal Do not mount a resistor whose resistance is lower than the specified value Doing so may damage the regenerative braking circuit The Inverters with 30 kW or higher capacity do not incorporate a regenerative braking circuit To improve braking capability the optional regenerative braking unit and braking resistor are required In this case connect the regenerative braking unit terminals to the Inverter terminals P N The cable length should be 5 m or less Twist the two wires Do not connect any device other than the optional regenerative braking unit or external brakin
85. HBinary Operation e By allocating 02 to 05 CF1 to CF4 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select from multi step speeds 0 to 15 Use A021 to A035 multi step speeds 1 to 15 to set frequencies for speeds 1 to 15 When the Digital Operator is selected as the frequency reference speed 0 is set with A020 A220 A320 or F001 refer to page 4 8 When the control circuit terminal block is selected speed 0 is set with terminals O O2 and Ol Multi step speeds CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 11th Oth OFF Frequency from OFF the Digital Operator 1st ON or the external OFF analog input terminal 2nd OFF ON 3rd ON OFF 4th OFF OFF 1st 5th ON ON a F e U Uaa ON CH i Seo A A ath OFF F 9th OFF ON T LT L OFF CF3 10th OFF J l ON CF4 11th SN ON a 12th oFF FW OFF ___ 13th ON ON 14th OFF ON 15th ON For multi step speed binary operation you can set the wait time until which the terminal input is determined in multi step speed position determination time C169 This prevents the transition status before the input determination from being applied lf no input is made after the time set in C169 the data is determined Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Without determination time C169 With determination time C169 Frequency refe
86. No 01 0x0000000000000001 0x0000000000000004 0x0000000000000008 0x000000000000000D The transmission frame is therefore STX 01 02 000000000000000D BCC CR 4 152 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 153 e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 161 Negative response Refer to page 4 161 lt Command 03 gt Reads all monitor data eTransmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 03 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Data 104 bytes Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Each monitor value 4 4 Communication Function Monitor item Unit Magnification Data size Description Output frequency Hz x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCI
87. OFF 0045h IRDY operation ready signal R 1 ON P yee 0 OFF 0046h FWR forward run signal R Pon Cee ns 0 OFF 1 ON 0047h RVR reverse run signal R 0 OFF 1 ON 0048h MJA fatal fault signal R 0 OFF x F 1 Writing 0049h During data write R 0 Normal 1 Error 004Ah CRC error R 0 No error 2 1 Error 004Bh Overrun error R 0 No error 2 f 1 Error 004Ch Framing error R 0 No error 2 1 Error 004Dh Parity error R 0 No error 2 1 Error 004Eh Checksum error R 9 0 No error 004Fh Not used WCO 1 ON 0059h window comparator O i 0 OFF WCOI 1 ON 09301 window comparator Ol R 0 OFF WCO2 1 ON Ooae window comparator O2 m 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 179 4 4 Communication Function lt Holding Register Number List Frequency Reference and Trip Monitor gt AES Function name aes R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0001h tae RW Output frequency setting monitor 9 90 1040
88. ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the control circuit terminal block elf you switch on off this function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation turn off the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again Analog Command Hold Function eWhile the AHD terminal is turned on the Inverter keeps external analog input results on hold Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 65 AHD analog command held 4 93 eWhile the AHD terminal is turned on you can use the UP DWN function based on the reference value of the analog signal kept on hold by this function elf UP DWN selection C101 is set to 01 the Inverter can store an UP DWN result elf the power is turned on with the AHD terminal turned on or if the RS terminal is turned on and then off the Inverter employs the data kept on hold immediately before AHD terminal ON l Analog input value Frequency reference p ie a Note1 If the control function is switched via the SET SET3 terminal with the AHD terminal turned on the set frequency is retained To change the control function turn off the AHD terminal once and keep the analog signal on hold again Note 2 If this function is frequently used the internal storage element s
89. Output torque 03 Pulse FQ Digital output frequency 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 08 Pulse Digital current monitor 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 12 YAO Drive programming 19 OP1 Option board 1 20 OP2 Option board 2 00 No 4 109 4 118 C028 AM selection AM Function When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 08 Pulse Digital current monitor 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 11 Out TRQ sign Output torque lt signed gt 13 YA1 Drive programming 19 OP1 Option board 1 20 OP2 Option board 2 00 No C029 AMI selection AMI Function When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 09 Motor tmp Motor temperatur
90. PID scale A075 A075 0 01 to 99 99 Can be set in increments of 0 01 Display 0 00 to 999000 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 4 1 Monitor Mode Multi function Input Monitor d005 This monitor indicates the input status of the multi function input terminals The item that the built in CPU recognizes to be significant is indicated as being ON This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example FW Multi function input terminals 7 2 1 ON Multi function input terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF VUON iO aya Beaty K O A i HLHLLLLHH 1 i Awe 7 6 54 3 2 I f H001 00 OFF Ciper Multi function Output Monitor d006 eThis monitor indicates the output status of the multi function output terminals eThis monitor displays the output status of the built in CPU not the control circuit terminal status Example Multi function output terminals 12 11 ON Relay output terminal AL2 Multi function output terminals 15 14 13 OFF MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL a096 Output AL215141312 11 l f H001 00 OFF Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 Displays a gain conversion value based on the coefficient set in frequency conversion coefficient b086 This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data e g motor rpm d007 display Output frequency d001 x Frequency conversion coefficient b086 b086 0 1 to 99 9 Can be set in increments of 0 1 Example To display 4 pole
91. Pulsedrain modeseiection 01 Mode 2 forward reverse command pulse train 02 Mode 3 forward pulse train reverse pulse train 00 4 127 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Position read 0 10710000 P017 asy Set a value equivalent to encoder x4 5 range setting oi ead multiplication P018 F oerion ready 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 s delay time setting P019 Electronic gear setting 00 FB Position feedback side 00 o position selection 01 REF Position command side P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 o numerator P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 o denominator P022 PORNON Coni 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 feedforward gain P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 50 rad s P024 Position bias amount 2048 to 2048 0 rad s M ltitun tioninputs 47 PCLR position deviation clear C001 to C008 np 48 STAT pulse train position command 1 to 8 selection oe input permission Frequency reference for the pulse train position control mode is calculated with the following formu la Frequency reference Hz 6 4 x P x Kv AP ENC 255 P Kv ENC AP Number of motor poles Position loop gain Position deviation Number of encoder pulses In the position control mode the acceleration deceleration time settings are disabled The Inverter is automaticall
92. R No Of restart UV g Input phase loss G f s protection selection 00 OFF Disabled F 5 p006 Phase loss 01 ON Enabled 90 Ne 446 3 detection Frequency matching 4 42 poo7 lower limit frequency 9 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 71 setting 4 87 Restart min FQ 00 TRIP Alarm 01 0 Hz start Trip retry selection 02 f match Frequency matching start b008 Restart mode OV 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency 00 No 4 42 OC matching deceleration stop 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 15 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b009 Undervoltage retry time selection Under voltage retry 00 16 times 01 No limit 00 No b010 Overvoltage overcurrent retry time selection No Of restart OV OC 1to3 No Time 4 42 b011 Momentary power interruption Trip restart Trip retry wait time Retry wait time OV OC 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No b012 Electronic thermal level E Thermal Level b212 2nd electronic thermal level E Thermal Level M2 b312 3rd electronic thermal level E Thermal Level M3 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current
93. R W 0 to 65535 1 1456h Ol adjustment C082 R W 0 to 65535 1 1457h O2 adjustment C083 R W 0 to 65535 1 1458h Not used 1459h Thermistor adjustment C085 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 145Ah to Not used 145Eh 4 206 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funetion R W Monitor and setting parameters hes oly No code tion 145Fh Debug mode selection c091 R W o9 Do not change 1460h to Not used 1468h 00 Not save Do not store the frequency 1469h UP DWN selection C101 R W data 01 Save Store the frequency data 00 ON RESET Trip reset at power on 01 OFF RESET Trip reset at power off 146Ah Reset selection C102 R W 02 On in Trip Enabled only during trip Reset at power on 03 Trip RESET Trip reset only 00 0 Hz start Reset frequency matching 01 f match Frequency matching start _ aoe selection C103 RAY 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart 146Ch Not used 146Dh FM gain setting C105 R W 50 to 200 1 146Eh AM gain setting C106 R W 50 to 200 1 146Fh AMI gain setting C107 R W 50 to 200 1 1470h Not used 1471h AM bias setting C109 R W 0 to 100 1 1472h AMI bias setting C110 R W 0 to 100 1 i 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 1473h Overload warning level 2 C111 R W 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated
94. RE 13 2 3G3RX A4004 3G3RX A4007 3G3RX A4015 AX FIR3010 RE 305 125 45 290 110 M5 1 9 38G3RX A4022 3G3RX A4040 3G3RX A4055 Footprint 3G3RX A4075 AX FIR3030 RE 312 212 50 296 189 M6 2 2 3G3RX A4110 3G3RX A4150 3x400 V 3G3RX A4185 AX FIR3053 RE 451 252 60 435 229 M6 4 5 38G3RX A4220 3G3RX A4300 AX FIR3064 RE 598 310 70 578 265 M8 7 0 3G3RX A4370 AX FIR3100 RE 8 0 3G3RX A4450 455 110 240 414 80 AX FIR3130 RE 8 6 3G3RX A4550 3G3RX B4750 Book type AX FIR3250 RE 13 0 3G3RX B4900 386 260 135 240 235 38G3RX B411K AX FIR3320 RE 13 2 3G3RX B413K 7 23 7 3 Options Output AC Reactor AX RAOQOOOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing T ri C1 Dimensions Weight Reference Kg A B2 C2 D E F AX RAO11500026 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO07600042 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO04100075 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO03000105 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO01830160 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 AX RAO01150220 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 P AX RAO00950320 DE 180 85 205 140 55 6 6 5 AX RA000630430 DE 180 95 205 140 65 6 9 1 9 AX RAO00490640 DE 180 95 205 140 65 6 9 1 O AX RAO00390800 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 om AX RAO00330950 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 AX RAO00251210 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 AX RAO00191450 DE 240 120 275 200 85 6 18 6 AX RAO00161820 DE 240 150 275 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAO001
95. Rated current No b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection E Thermal Character Electronic Thermal b213 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection E Thermal Character M2 b313 3rd electronic thermal characteristics selection E Thermal Character M3 00 Reduced TRQ Reduced torque characteristics 01 Const TRQ Constant torque characteristics 02 Free set Free setting 00 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 16 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 Free E Thermal FQ 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 Free E Thermal FQ 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 Free E Thermal FQ 3 0 to 400 No Hz Electronic Thermal b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 Free E Thermal l 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 Free E Thermal l 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 Free E Thermal l 3 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17
96. Recovery level Less than 60 of the rated current 15 0 60 55 of the rated current 12 0 72 67 of the rated current 9 0 Oo 84 79 of the rated current 6 0 c gt 96 91 of the rated current 3 0 LL Carrier frequency 15 0 kHz Werrtererereteceretraecerererecerevreesererererevetieeseret es 12 0 KHZ eeeceeeeeeseseeeeseeseseers r i Ge a 9 0 kHz ennai osise a n ee 6 0 kHz nnn re coo Wes a 3 0 kHz 0 50 N n 7 00 Output current 60 72 84 96 The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second The upper limit of carrier frequency variable with this function conforms to the set value of carrier frequency b083 and the lower limit is 3 kHz Note When b083 is 3 kHz or lower this function is disabled regardless of the b089 setting 4 73 4 2 Function Mode Regenerative Braking Function This function applies to the Inverter models with a built in regenerative braking circuit 8G3RX A2220 A4220 or lower models eWith the built in regenerative braking circuit this function allows an external braking resistor to consume the motor s regeneration energy as heat This function is useful for a system in which the motor works as a generator when it is rapidly decelerated eTo use this function configure the following settings Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 0 Does not operate 0 0 to 100 0 A regenerative braking usage rate for 100 secon
97. Terminal O D 01 Ol Terminal Ol 5 Torque reference 02 O2 Terminal O2 ao input selection 03 OPE Digital Operator 99 Me o 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 4 126 Torque reference 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW s P034 Setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 9 YES 6 Polarity selection at P F 00 Sign Signed 2 P039 ps rorerence Via 01 Direction Depends on the RUN direction 99 ne 2 6 00 OFF None 01 OPE Digital Operator PO36 Torque bias mode 02 O2 Terminal O2 00 No 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 4 126 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW alee P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Yes o Torque bias polarity 00 Sign Signed nOee selection 01 Direction Depends on the RUN direction o0 No a Speed limit value in P039 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz forward 4 126 Speed limit value in P040 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz reverse DeviceNet comm P044 Watch dog timer 0 00 to 99 99 1 00 No s 00 Trip f 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop Poas Qporaon oti toe nore wo no 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 54 Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default CENGEE Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation 0 Basic s
98. The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 2 suoieisdo sdueuDd UIeLy Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy spi If an error occurs in the external equipment or devices the Inverter Has any error occurred in the external External receives an input signal then the devices when the external trip function is E12 0 4 84 trip drives output is shut off selected Available with the external trip Correct the external device error function selected Appears when the Power IS tumed When the USP function was selected did on with the RUN signal input into the you turn on the power with the RUN USP trip Inverter E13 0 4 84 i signal input into the Inverter Cancel the Available with the USP function RUN command and turn on the power selected Protects the Inverter if a ground fault Is there any ground fault Check the between the Inverter output unit and output wires and motor Ground the motor is detected when turning Is there any error in the Inverter itself fault trip on the power E14 0 Disconnect the output wires to check a This function does not work when Is there any error in the main circuit there is residual voltage in the Check the main circuit Refer to Chapter motor 6 Repair Replace Appears if the incoming voltage continue
99. Unit Page o setting operation je ie mode 0 t0 200 0 4 to 55 kW b042 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No reverse regeneration no Torque limit disabled TRQ limit RV REG q Torque limit 3 Four quadrant mode 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 4 57 b043 reverse power 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No E eta 4 59 running no Torque limit disabled TRQ limit RV POW 5 3 H k ee mode 0 t0 200 0 4 to 55 kW b044 q 7 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled TRQ limit FW REG q Torque LADSTOP i b045 selection sy eer 00 No 4 59 TRQ limit LADSTOP Reverse rotation a 0046 prevention selection H E 00 No 4 59 D Rev RUN protect 5 b049 Dual rate selection O CT Constant torque 00 No _ Dual rate select 01 VT Variable torque 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 20 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b050 Selection of non stop function at momentary power interruption Ctrid decel select 00 OFF Disabled 01 V Cnst STOP Enabled deceleration stop 02 NS1 Enabled without recovery 03 NS2 Enabled with recovery 00 No b051 Starting voltage of non stop function at momentary
100. a shorter integral time b056 but if too short the same situation may occur e If the proportional gain b055 is too small the voltage drops immediately after this function starts resulting in an undervoltage trip 4 2 Function Mode Example 1 Example 2 Main circuit P N voltage Main circuit P N voltage MAn eee Vpn V Vpn V p 7 PREE A b052 Main circuit DC voltage poSI DC voltage kept constant Output Time Output Time frequenc pees freguenc E TEN roueg i Hz a Hz b050 03 Operation b050 02 03 PET Deceleration stop Deceleration stop a i i i a N Time UN Time aa Power recovery Power recovery 9 o Note The main circuit DC voltage level while the function is running may fall below the b052 set value depending on the proportional gain and integral time settings Window Comparator Disconnection Detection ODc OIDc O2Dc The Inverter activates the window comparator output when the O OI O2 analog input value is within the upper and lower limit levels of the window comparator This function allows you to monitor analog input based on the desired level e g to detect a disconnection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection C021 to C025 terminals 11 to 15 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection selection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 54 WCO window comparator O C026
101. above in relation to the base code data e Parameters are rewritten into the data of the base code rewritten at start up 5 11 Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 0 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance DANGER Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock A N CAUTION Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn h Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power Q Do not dismantle repair or modify this product ON Doing so may result in an injury Safety Information Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement Precautions for Use Operation Stop Command e Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal during t
102. ad ea a 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 05 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 b060 O Set an upper limit level Zo Setting range 0 to 100 b063 Ol Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis Window comparator Width x 2 O OV O2 upper limit level Set an upper limit level Setting range 100 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 100 b066 O2 b061 O Set a lower limit level Setting range 0 to 100 b064 Ol Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis Window comparator Width x 2 O OI 02 lower limit level Set a lower limit level Setting range 100 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 b067 02 100 4 66 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b062 O Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower a S limit levels b065 Ol Window comparator 0 01 02 hysteresis width Setting range 0 to 10 se 0 k Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit b068 02 level x 2 b070 O 0 to 100 no ignored Set an analog input application value used for WCO WCOI b071 Ol Analog operation level at WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc output ao O OI O2 disconnection 100 to 100 no ignored Set an analog input b072 02 application value used for WCO WCOI WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc output eYou can set hysteresis widths for the window comparator upper
103. allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 48 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default mee Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation C152 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C153 Logic output signal 4 An 00 operator selection 02 XOR C154 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 S C155 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 a 00 AND No 4 102 w C156 Logic output signal 5 01 OR 00 g ie operator selection 02 XOR oO C157 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 2 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 o C158 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C159 Logic output signal 6 a oe 00 operator selection 02 XOR c160 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 1 c161 NPUt terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 2 c162 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 3 2 c Input terminal 3 C163 faeponsstine 4 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 o w c164 pul terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 No ms 4 108 response time 5 gigs MPUtterminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 6 E c166 INPUt terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 respons
104. and lower limit levels eYou can set limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for O Ol and O2 inputs For the WCO WCOI WCO2 output you can fix the analog input application value to the desired value Set values in O OI O2 disconnection operation levels b070 b071 b072 If no is set the analog input value is directly reflected ODc OlIDc O2Dc outputs are the same as WCO WCOI WCO2z2 respectively O Ol O2 inputs Max 100 Min O Ol 0 O2 100 WCO WCOI WCO ODc OlIDc O2Dc 4 67 Hysteresis width b062 b065 b068 Analog inp Analog application value f ut value Window comparator upper limit level 6061 b064 b067 Analog operating level on disconnection b070 b071 b072 Window comparator lower limit level 6060 b063 b066 4 2 Function Mode Starting Frequency Set the frequency for starting Inverter output when the RUN signal is turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 Hz Use mainly to adjust the starting torque eWith starting frequency b082 set high the starting current increases possibly causing the current to exceed the overload limit and overcurrent protection to work to trip the Inverter elf 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 V2 sensor vector control is selected in control method selection A044 this function is disabled FW b082
105. at an altitude of 1000 m or less Design Cable Carrier Cable Carrier Model Cat length m frequency Model Cat length m frequency KHz kHz 3G3RX A2004 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4004 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A2007 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4007 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A2015 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4015 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A2022 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4022 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A2037 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4040 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A2055 C3 1 1 3G3RX A4055 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2075 C3 1 1 3G3RX A4075 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2110 C3 1 1 3G3RX A4110 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2150 C3 1 1 3G3RX A4150 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2185 C3 1 1 3G3RX A4185 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2220 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4220 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2300 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4300 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2370 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4370 C3 1 2 5 3G3RX A2450 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4450 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A2550 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4550 C3 5 2 5 3G3RX A4750 C3 10 2 5 3G3RX A4900 C3 10 2 5 3G3RX B411K C3 10 2 5 3G3RX B413K C3 10 2 5 2 33 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Operation Method cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 3 3 ECD DIS lay e E 3 4 Test Run Procedure ccccccceeeeeeeeensseseneeees 3 5 OPERA Oe raana ea eeoa oar Senone sesacenstows ne 3 6 Read Write function and operation 3 13 Test RUN Operation cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 3 14 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital OP OR
106. b023 b026 Overload Warning elf the applied load is large the Inverter can output an overload warning signal before an overload trip occurs This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the carrier machine or an operation line stop due to overload protection of the Inverter e Allocate 03 OL or 26 OL2 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Two types of overload warning signals are available for output Overload limit level b022 b025 Overload warning level C041 C111 Output current Ce E E E 4 50 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Overcurrent Suppression Function e This function suppresses overcurrent caused by a steep current rise in rapid acceleration eYou can set whether to enable or disable this function with b027 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Overcurrent suppression 00 OFF Disabled boar function 01 ON Enabled 00 Note If you use the Inverter with an elevating machine disable this function Otherwise the machine may slide down Output frequency Desired Actual acceleration after suppression operation Time Output current Suppression level about 160 of the rating Time Soft Lock Function eYou can set whether to enable or disable the writing of various code data This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous
107. b037 Display selection 02 User User setting 00 03 Only FQ Data comparison display 04 Basic Basic display __no No allocation U001 to U012 User selection no d001 to P196 Select the code you want to display Among all codes 4 53 4 2 Function Mode Windividual Display of Functions lf a specific function is not selected its relevant parameter is not displayed For details on the display requirements refer to the following table No Display requirements Parameters displayed when the requirements are met 1 Aoo1 01 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C081 to C083 C121 to C123 2 A001 10 A141 to A143 3 A002 01 03 04 05 b087 4 A017 01 a d027 P100 to P131 Note that P100 to P131 cannot be 5 A041 01 A046 A047 6 A044 00 01 A041 A042 A043 7 A044 03 04 05 H002 H005 H050 8 A044 04 HO60 H061 9 ne x OOS and H020 to H024 10 ares z S o op and H030 to H034 11 Either of A044 or A244 03 04 05 d008 to d010 d012 b040 to b046 H001 H070 to H073 12 Either of A044 or A244 02 b100 to b113 13 A051 01 02 A052 A056 to A058 14 A051 01 02 A053 to A055 A059 d004 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A072 to A078 15 A071 01 02 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C044 C052 C053 C081 to C083 C121 to C123 16 A076 10 A141 to A143 17 A094 01 02 A095 A096
108. control not to 3rd control Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H002 H202 Motor parameter selection 00 Standard motor parameter 01 Auto tuning parameter 02 Auto tuning parameter Online auto tuning data enabled 00 Note the following before use Be sure to perform the offline auto tuning before the online auto tuning This function calculates online auto tuning data during offline auto tuning Even with a general purpose motor perform offline auto tuning once e After the motor is stopped online auto tuning is performed for 5 seconds max For tuning R1 and R2 this function performs DC excitation once The tuning result is not displayed If the RUN command is input during this period priority is given to the RUN command and the online auto tuning is aborted The tuning result is not reflected 4 113 4 2 Function Mode eWith DC injection braking during stop selected online auto tuning starts after DC injection braking is completed elf FOC and SON are allocated to terminals online auto tuning is not performed Operating Procedure 1 Set motor parameter selection H002 to 02 online auto tuning enabled Set auto tuning selection H001 to 00 disabled 2 Turn on the RUN command The Inverter automatically performs online auto tuning during stop Secondary Resistance Compensation Function Temperature Compensation e This function compensat
109. conversion doog Real frequency 400 00 to 400 00 _ Hz 43 monitor doog Torque reference 509 to 200 EZ 4 3 monitor doin TOrgue bias 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do12 Output torque 200 to 200 ne 43 monitor do13 OVtput voltage 0 0 to 600 0 o v 4 3 monitor d014 Input power monitor 0 0 to 999 9 Ww 4 4 dois Power ON time 0 0 to 999999 9 4 4 monitor d016 Total RUN time 0 to 999999 h 4 4 doiz Power ON time 0 to 999999 h 4 4 monitor doig in temperature 990 to 200 0 zZ oC 4 4 monitor 3 21 3 9 Parameter List Parameter s Default a Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation doig Motor temperature 59 to 200 0 oC 4 5 monitor 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan rpm reduction i d022 Life C F do22 Life assessment F 4 5 monitor d023 Program counter 0 to 1024 d024 Program number 0 to 9999 do25 Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UMO doze Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UM1 do27 Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UM2 doz Pulse counter 0 to 2147483647 4 6 monitor 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is d029 Position command selected 4 6 monitor 268435456 to
110. current 75 to 132 kW 0 1 A 1474h to Not used 147Ch 147Dh O zero adjustment C121 R W 0 to 65535 1 147Eh Ol zero adjustment C122 R W 0 to 65535 1 147Fh O2 zero adjustment C123 R W 0 to 65535 1 1480h to Not used 1485h 4 207 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Beng lon R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 1486h Output 11 ON delay C130 R W 0 1 s 1487h Output 11 OFF delay C131 R W 0 1 s 1488h Output 12 ON delay C132 R W 0 1 s 1489h Output 12 OFF delay C133 R W 0 1 s 148Ah Output 13 ON delay C134 R W 0 1 s 148Bh_ Output 13 OFF delay C135 R W 0 1 s 0 0 to 100 0 _ _ 148Ch Output 14 ON delay C136 R W 0 1 s 148Dh Output 14 OFF delay C137 R W 0 1 s 148Eh Output 15 ON delay C138 R W 0 1 s 148Fh Output 15 OFF delay C139 R W 0 1 s 1490h Relay output ON delay C140 R W 0 1 s 1491h Relay output OFF delay C141 R W 0 1 s Logic output signal 1 Same as C021 to C026 o agen selection 1 Cite RW except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 1 Same as C021 to C026 o 14331 selection 2 C143 RAW except LOG1 to LOG6 Logi tput signal 1 00 AND 1494h ee a at C144 RW 01 OR Z Re 02 XOR Logic output signal 2 Same as C021 to C026 1429M selection 1 oe RAN except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 2 Same as C021 to C026 D Taper selection 2 ous R
111. default kW H004 H204 Motor pole number 2 4 6 8 10 4 Pole selection eTo use the monitor via the Digital Operator select display code d012 eTo use the monitor with a signal from the control terminal block refer to Digital FM Terminal page 4 109 or Analog Output AM AMI Terminals page 4 110 e If VC special VP or free V f setting is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 A244 this function is disabled and the display or the output signal from the control terminal block is not defined eFor a torque monitor value of this function the output torque at the rated frequency equivalent to the motor s output rating during synchronous rotation is indicated as 100 e Since this function estimates output torque based on the motor current the accuracy is approx 20 when a motor with the same output capacity as the Inverter is used 4 118 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Preliminary Excitation Function FOC This function supplies excitation current from an input terminal to establish magnetic flux preliminarily when 03 Sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A004 A244 e Allocate 55 FOC to the desired multi function input The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the FOC terminal is turned on when FOC is allocated elf the FOC terminal is turned off during operation the Inverte
112. delay Alarm RLY OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 4 108 C142 Logic output signal 1 selection 1 Log out 1 operand A Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 C143 Logic output signal 1 selection 2 Log out 2 operand B Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 34 xipueddy Output terminal operation function Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Function name No Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page Logic output signal 1 operator selection Log out 1 operator C144 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 Logic output signal 2 selection 1 Log out 2 operand A C145 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 2 selection 2 Log out 2 operand B C146 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 2 operator selection Log out 2 operator C147 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 Logic output signal 3 selection 1 Log out 3 operand A C148 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 3 selection 2 Log out 3 operand B C149 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG
113. details b050 b051 Operation 02 without recovery b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant control power recovery example 1 b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop normal operation example 2 power recovery 03 with recovery b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant control power recovery example 1 b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at i ti le 2 power recovery Operation normal operation example 2 4 65 lf operation of this function results in deceleration stop the Inverter is forced to stop even if the FW command is ON To restart the Inverter make sure that the incoming voltage has recovered and input the FW command again 4 Make sure that the b051 b052 set values are larger than the undervoltage level 200 V class 210 V 400 V class 410 V If undervoltage occurs this function is disabled Make sure that b051 is smaller than b052 If the proportional gain setting b055 is excessively increased when the difference between b051 and b052 is large the Inverter may accelerate immediately after this function starts resulting in overcurrent 5 When b050 02 03 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant e Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain 6055 control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip e Response also becomes quicker with
114. does not correspond with the slave address set for the Inverter The time interval between 2 pieces of data that configure the message is less than a 3 5 character length Query data length is inappropriate Note If the timer is set in the master to monitor response but no response is returned within the set time period send the same query again 4 4 Communication Function MExplanation of Each Function Code lt Reading Coil Status 01h gt Reads out the coil status ON OFF Example Read multi function input terminals 1 to 6 on the Inverter with slave address 8 Refer to the following table for the multi function input terminal status ie ee 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coils 13 and 14 are OFF Coil No 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Query Response No Field name Fane No Field name eee 1 Slave address 08 1 Slave address 08 2 Function code 01 2 Function code 01 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Number of data bytes 01 4 Coil start number LSB 06 4 Coil data 17 5 Number of coils MSB 00 5 CRC 16 MSB 12 6 Number of coils LSB 06 6 CRC 16 LSB 1A 7 CRC 16 MSB 5C 4 Transfers data by the number of data bytes 8 CRC 16 LSB 90 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 When specifying the value of O or over 32 for the number of reading coils the error c
115. environments MEMC compliant Installation of Drive Systems 2 23 Introduction This document describes the electromagnetically compatible setup of your drive system with OMRON 3G3RxX series inverters Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC Read this information carefully and follow the instructions If necessary provide this information to third parties HF interference results from rapid switching of electric currents and voltages All AC DC and servo drives very rapidly switch large currents and voltages in the process to supply connected electric motors They become major sources of interference generating both line conducted and radiated interference The additional use of line filters also called interference suppression filters and installation in a metal housing or a switch cabinet further improve the existing interference immunity For the best possible damping of interference special line filters have been developed which guarantee you easy assembly and installation along with the necessary electrical reliability However effective EMC countermeasures is only ensured if the suitable filter is selected for the particular drive and installed in accordance with these EMC recommendations Selection of line filter to reduce line conducted interference To reduce line conducted interference use the appropriate line filter for each frequency inverter The below table show you a list of the available line filters for OMRON 3G3RX frequency
116. excitation Preliminary excitation function 4 119 56 MI1 Drive Programming input 1 57 MI2 Drive Programming input 2 58 MI3 Drive Programming input 3 59 Ml4 Drive Programming input 4 Drive Programming input 1 to 8 60 MI5 Drive Programming input 5 61 MI6 Drive Programming input 6 62 MI7 Drive Programming input 7 63 MI8 Drive Programming input 8 65 AHD Analog command held Analog command held 4 93 C001 to 66 CP1 Position command selection 1 C008 67 CP2_ Position command selection 2 4 139 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit signal Absolute position control mode 70 ORG Zero return startup signal 71 FOT Forward driving stop 4 142 72 ROT Reverse driving stop 73 SPD Speed Position switching 4 140 74 PCNT Pulse counter Multi function pulse counter 4 94 75 PCC Pulse counter clear 82 PRG Drive program start Drive program start no NO Noallocation eYou can select NO or NC contact input for each multi function input terminal aramee Function name Data psiault Unit No setting 00 NO C011to Multi function input 1 to 01 NC 00 C018 8 operation selection You can set NO and NC contact inputs individually for multi function input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal e NO contact ON with the contact closed OFF with the contact open Co19 FW terminal operation e NC contact ON with the contact open OFF 00 selection with the contact closed e A term
117. for design Chapters Operation Describes names of parts the Inverter s operations including how to use p P the keys on the Digital Operator and the monitor function Chapter 4 Functions Describes the functions of the Inverter Chapter 5 Maintenance Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails P Operations including the solutions to possible troubles troubleshooting Inspection and Describes items for periodical inspection and or maintenance for the Chapter 6 A Maintenance Inverter ae Provides Inverter specifications as well as the specifications and Chapter 7 Specifications dimensions of peripheral devices P Describes the summarized parameter settings as a reference for users Appendix who have used this Inverter and understood the functions as 2 Contents MTEFOQUGH OM xc sauces seein a3s a a a a aaa 1 Read and Understand this Manual ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeees 2 Safety PISCAUTIONS eseun e a doen ueuathoataeenls 5 Precautions for Safe USennsreneryke in e ed oi E 7 Precautions for Correct USC cccccccssseseeeeeeecaeeeseeeeceeeceaaeseeeeeeessnaaaagees 8 Checking Before Unpacking xsicicieseseissviavassustvads sanciscenes tacsvenedtaeedssaveateencsa 10 Revision FAIS LOM octet ota per tet eek RARE aoa rate tata nnn nn neee 11 About This WieaUell ssszthis sess sora ccar esc ucigisn on aucesaseebuceedessotaerecesseeunesessooe 12 Chapter 1 Overview ali s
118. frequency A003 A203 A303 gt Maximum frequency Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 z A004 A204 A304 A020 A220 A320 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt Orientation speed setting P015 gt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt f x Frequency upper limit z 2 Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference O A020 A220 gt A061 A261 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt S Orientation speed Frequency upper limit A061 A261 P015 lt Frequency lower limit Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 E A062 A262 A020 A220 A320 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 lt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 lt Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 2 Starting frequency A020 A220 A320 b082 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 lt Jogging frequency A038 lt Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 are Jump frequency 1 2 3 A020 A220 A320 2 Jump width A063 A064 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 lt gt A065 A066 5 A067 A068 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 gt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt 3 2 Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference O A020 A220 gt Free Vi frequency 7 b112 Multi step speed reference 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt Free V f frequencies 1 to 6 b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 Free V f frequencies 2 to 6 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 gt Free VA frequency 1 b100 Free V f frequency 1 b100 gt Free V f frequency 2 b10
119. frequency matching 00 deceleration stop 1 3 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart example 1 3 Allowable 0 3 to 25 0 b002 momentary power If the momentary power interruption is within the set 1 0 S interruption time time the Inverter follows the setting in b001 ae 0 3 to 100 0 b003 Retry wait time Time before restart 1 0 S Momentary power 00 OFF Disabled b004 LO aE trip 017 ON Enabled 4 00 during stop 02 Decel OFF Disabled during stop and deceleration selection 2 4 stop Momentary power 00 16 times b005 interruption retry sts 00 i 01 No limit time selection Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 b007 matching lower When the motor free running frequency falls below 0 00 Hz limit frequency this lower limit frequency the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz i setting examples 3 and 4 00 TRIP Alarm 01 0 Hz start b008 Trip retry selection 02 f match Frequency matching start 00 me 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart b009 Undervoltage retry 00 16 times 00 o time selection 01 No limit Overvoltage 1to3 b010 overcurrent retry Select the number of retry times in the event of 3 Time time selection overvoltage overcurrent 2 b011 Trip retry wait time 9 310 190 0 1 0 S Time before restart 4 42 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default s
120. function input and then turn it on off The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz eWhen this function operates the acceleration time becomes longer than the set time e If sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method V f characteristics refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 and 03 is selected for b021 b024 the frequency increases when a current exceeding the overload limit level flows during regenerative operation elf overload limit parameter b023 b026 is set too short an overvoltage trip may occur because of regenerative energy from the motor caused by automatic deceleration of this function even during acceleration Make the following adjustments if this function operates before the frequency reaches the target value during acceleration Increase the acceleration time Refer to Acceleration Deceleration Time page 4 8 Increase the torque boost Refer to Torque Boost page 4 19 4 2 Function Mode Increase the overload limit level b022 b025 Overload limitlevel LL Ngee cence ence cece eee b022 b025 Decelerates according to the set overload limit parameter Output current Max frequency A004 A204 A304 Target frequency n ae i Inverter output frequency
121. inverter The line filters up to 46A 200V class or 58A 400V class rated current are built in footprint style they are fitted behind the respective frequency inverter and thus require no additional surface space for installation These filters are intended for installation in switch cabinets as standard Vertical mounting next to the frequency inverter is also possible The line filters from 64A 200V class or 75A 400V class rated current are built only in booktype style and can be installed beside the frequency inverter 2 2 Wiring Voltage Inverter model Listed filter Voltage Inverter model Listed filter 3 x 200V 3G3RX A2004 3G3RX A2007 3G3RX A2015 3G3RX A2022 3G3RX A2037 AX FIR2018 RE 3G3RX A2055 3G3RX A2075 3G3RX A2110 AX FIR2053 RE 3G3RX A2150 3G3RX A2185 3G3RX A2220 AX FIR2110 RE 3G3RX A2300 AX FIR2145 RE 3G3RX A2370 3G3RX A2450 AX FIR3250 RE 3G3RX A2550 AX FIR3320 RE 3 x 400V 3G3RX A4004 3G3RX A4007 3G3RX A4015 3G3RX A4022 3G3RX A4040 AX FIR3010 RE 3G3RX A4055 3G3RX A4075 3G3RX A4110 AX FIR3030 RE 3G3RX A4150 3G3RX A4185 3G3RX A4220 AX FIR3053 RE 3G3RX A4300 AX FIR3064 RE 3G3RX A4370 AX FIR3100 RE 3G3RX A4450 3G3RX A4550 AX FIR3130 RE 3G3RX B4750 3G3RX B4900 AX FIR3250 RE 3G3RX B
122. is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 00 FWD Forward 01 REV Reverse 00 No 4 9 App 4 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Extended Function Mode Parameter Default BAT a N Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page O setting operation 00 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Terminal Freg encviret rence 02 Digital Operator F001 guSney 03 RS485 ModBus communication 4 10 A001 _ selection i 01 No Frequency source 04 Option 1 4 144 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 EZSQ Drive programming 10 Math Operation function result 01 Terminal RUN command 02 Digital Operator F001 A002 selection 03 RS485 ModBus communication 01 No 4 11 RUN cmd source 04 Option 1 D 05 Option 2 E Base frequency 3 4 11 b A003 Base Frequency 30 to Maximum frequency A004 50 4 112 8 2nd set base A203 frequency 30 to 2nd maximum frequency A204 50 No Hz Base Frequency M2 4 11 3rd set base A303 _ frequency 30 to 3rd maximum frequency A304 50 Base Frequency M3 aoo4 Maximum frequency A003 to 400 50 Max Frequency 2nd maximum A204 frequency A203 to 400 50 Max Frequency M2 Ne He ala 3rd maximum A304 frequency A303 to 400 50 Max Frequency M3 00 O O2 Switches between O OI terminal AT 01
123. is not performed the Inverter performs position control with the position at power on defined as the origin lt Low speed zero return P068 00 gt ORL terminal fw Output frequency Origin lt High speed zero return 1 P068 01 gt Low speed zero return frequency P070 Position ORL terminal Taw Output 2 frequency lt High speed zero return 2 P068 02 gt __ High speed zero return frequency P071 Position 4 F Low speed zero return frequency P070 ORG terminal ORL terminal _ CT Output l 2 High speed zero return frequency 4 141 frequency P071 Low speed zero return frequency P070 7 A Origin Position Low speed zero return frequency P071 1 The Inverter accelerates to the low speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the low speed zero return speed 3 The Inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is input 1 The Inverter accelerates to the high speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the high speed zero return frequency 3 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on 4 The Inverter runs in reverse at the low speed zero return frequency 5 The Inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is turned off 1 The Inverter accelerates to the high speed zer
124. key to enter b084 parameter FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys put the parameter b084 to 2 Press the Set key to change the parameter b084 to 2 With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys write the parameter b180 Press the Set key to enter b180 parameter 3 15 3 6 Test Run Operation Key sequence Display example Description gt NEXT PACE lt With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys put the parameter b180 to 1 Press the Set key to change the parameter b180 to 1 and initialize parameters uonesado No load Operation eStart the no load motor i e not connected to the mechanical system using the Digital Operator Stopping the Motor e After completing the no load operation press the STOP RESET key The motor will stop Actual Load Operation e After checking the operation with the motor in the no load status connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load Connecting the Mechanical System e After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis and the mechanical system Operation via the Digital Operator Because a possible error may occur during operation make sure that the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible Use the Digital Operator to operate the Inverter the same way as in no load o
125. level Hysteresis 9 ves l width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limit levels b062 O hysteresis Pn Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes y Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level b063 Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 l 100 Yes 4 66 Ol upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range O to 100 A posa Ol lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis o Yeg e width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limit ievels 2 b065 npa Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes Ol hysteresis width heh cane fut Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit O level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 a pore O2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 190 ves R width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 i poe O2 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 199 mee e width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limit levels b068 O2 h a Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes y Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Analog operation AGS b070 level at O 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b071 level at Ol 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog
126. motor rpm Motor rpm N min 120 x f Hz P pole f Hz x 30 As such when b086 30 0 a motor rpm of 1800 60 x 30 0 is displayed Display 0 00 to 39960 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 suonun4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Note When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator the output frequency can be changed with the Increment Decrement key during operation only The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001 Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference The data storage accuracy depends on each frequency reference Real Frequency Monitor d008 When a motor with an encoder is connected to a load and the PG board 3G3AX PG01 is used this monitor displays the real frequency of the motor regardless of the control method Display In forward rotation 0 00 to 400 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz In reverse rotation 0 00 to 400 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz Note 1 To use this monitor set the number of encoder pulses P011 and the motor pole number selection H004 or H204 correctly Note 2 The monitored value does not depend on V f characteristics selection A044 Torque Reference Monitor d009 When torque control is selected for sensor vector control this monitor displays the currently entered torque reference value Display 200 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Torque B
127. not be stopped 2 When b130 01 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant e Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain b133 control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip e Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time b134 but if too short the same situation may occur lt Group C Multi function Terminal Function gt The RX has eight input terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 five open collector output ter minals 11 12 13 14 and 15 one relay output terminal AL2 and AL1 SPDT contact two analog output terminals AM and AMI as well as one digital output terminal FM Multi function Input Selection eYou can use the following functions by allocating them to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 To allocate the functions set the following data in C001 to C008 For example C001 corresponds to input terminal 1 The same two functions cannot be allocated to the multi function input terminals If you attempt to allocate the same two functions to the terminals by mistake the terminal where you allocated the function last takes precedence The previous data is set to no no allocation and the terminal function is disabled e After allocating functions to terminals 1 to 8 make sure that the function settings have been stored meee Data Function name Reference item Page 01 RV Rever
128. oe 2 output Fo 2 20 00Hz he co 1 During DC injection braking Foutput current 4 00A H 4 P N DC voltage V at the time of tripping g During overload limit as a m a m a a a a aue a ae i 4 4 y i A y J During forcing servo ON l f am 1 l 1 1 XT PACA i Q Y l Note The trip monitor display shows the Inverter status T TRIP M1 STOP ALL foie at the time of tripping not the actual motor operation me 1 Example i 1 5 Total RUN time h before the trip While PID control is used or the frequency reference o ERRI P2 Ext Trip gt is input using analog signals voltage current the a SS a eae 1 4 Inverter may alternate frequently between oO Foc Voltage 400 2Vdc l f A wy acceleration and deceleration because of the signal F SS OS AE CA SA OEE A OS E A i fluctuations even if the motor seems to operate at a lt b RUN time 15hr 1 constant speed S SS SS oaoa l cus In this case the onscreen Inverter status at the time c on time Shr i i aru of tripping may differ from the actual operation cee ee eee ee ee oe we oe oe oO i 6 Total power ON time h before the trip cb 1 4 I l E i 5 9 5 2 Warning Function 5 2 Warning Function The following table shows the details of warning display and parameter correction Target code Condition Base code Frequency upper limit A061 A261 gt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt Base
129. of 1 minute Inverter Mode d060 Dual ratting Refer to b049 parameter Display 00 Constant torque 01 Variable torque Fault Frequency Monitor d080 Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped Display 0 to 65535 Displays in increments of 1 time suoiloun4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Fault Monitors 1 to 6 d081 to d086 Refer to 7 Trip Mode in Chapter 3 4 Operation Warning Monitor d090 elf the set data is inconsistent with other data a warning code is displayed eWhile this warning remains in effect the Warning LED indicator stays lit until forced to rewrite or correct the data For details on the Warning display refer to 5 2 Warning Function Display 0 to 385 DC Voltage Monitor d102 Displays the DC voltage between P and N of the Inverter During operation the monitor value changes depending on the actual DC voltage of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 V Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor d103 Displays a regenerative braking load rate When the monitor value comes close to exceeding the value set in usage rate of the regenerative braking function b090 E06 Braking resistor overload protection works to trip the Inverter Display 0 0 to 100 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 Electronic Thermal Monitor d104 4 7 Displays an electronic thermal load rate When the monitor value comes close to exceeding 100
130. operation b072 level at O2 100 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 37 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Pais N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page o setting operation b078 Integrated power Cleared with the Enter key after changing to 00 Yes _ clear 01 a 4 4 ntegrated power b079 display gain 1 to 1000 1 No b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 No Hz 4 68 ua to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz Derating enabled 4 68 b083 Carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 4 120 i 3 0 No kHz Derating enabled 00 no Clears the trip monitor 01 Trip data Initializes data 02 Parameters Clears the trip monitor and Raa Ae initializes data BOES Initiali ation selectign 03 Trip Param Clears the trip monitor and 99 Ne E parameters 4 70 04 Trp Prm EzSQ Clears the trip monitor parameters and Drive program b085 Initialization l gl 01 No parameter selection Do not change poge Frequency 0 1 to 99 9 1 0 Yes 42 conversion coefficient 00 ON Enabled a 0087 STOP key selection 01 OFF Disabled 00 No 4 70 9 02 Only RESET Disabled only during stop O 00 0 Hz start Free run stop 01 f match Frequency matching start 3 poss selection 02 Actv f match Active F
131. or three wattmeter method Wout values Output Calculated from the measured values of output voltage Eour power output current lout and output power Wout factor Wout P Pfour PfouT 78 Eour lout x 100 6 9 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance For output voltage use a measurement device Measurement Method of Output Voltage that displays effective values of fundamental wave For current and electric power use a Power supply measurement device that displays all effective values The Inverter output Diode waveform under PWM 600V 0 1 Amin 200 V class control has a margin of 1000 V 0 1 A min 400 V class error especially ata A Moving coil type low frequency Effective value of fundamental wave VAC 300 V 200 V class General purpose Vac 1 1 x VDC 600 V 400 V class testers are not applicable because of noise in many cases fo o c D gt DC 6 10 soueUD UIe Y pue UOI DedsuU Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List ccceseeeeeees 7 1 7 2 Dimensional Drawing ssccseseeseenees 7 7 TE ODUGIS a E 7 15 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List 7 1 Standard Specification List EThree phase 200 V Class Class 3 phase 200 V Model name 3G3RX A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A2185 Max at
132. output and displays an error if the DC Is there any rapid deceleration voltage between P and N exceeds Increase the deceleration time the specified level because of Is there any ground fault Overvolt age trip regenerative energy from the motor E07 0 Check the output wires and motor or increase of the incoming voltage Has the motor been rotated driven from the during operation load side Trips when the DC voltage between Reduce regenerative energy P and N reaches approximately 400 V DC for 200 V class and 800 V DC for 400 V class Shuts off the output and displays an P large electrical noise source EEPROM ele Fe occursiin tne builtin Countermeasures against electrical noise error ecauseror aoe nal noise E08 0 Has the cooling efficiency been reduced 2 3 or abnormal temperature rise Note This may be a CPU error depending on the case Check that there is no clogging in the cooling fan and fin if so clean it Replace the cooling fan if faulty 1 The reset command is not accepted until approximately 10 seconds after the trip occurs protection function works 2 The reset command is not accepted if the EEPROM error E08 0 occurs Turn off the power once If you find E08 when turning on the power again it is possible that the internal memory element of the drive has been damaged or the parameters have not been memorized correctly Perform the user initialization to set the paramet
133. output E terminal 11 to 15 selection 39 WAC Relay output AL2 AL1 Capacitor life warning signal on PCB function selection C026 05 4 103 4 2 Function Mode Network Error e Enabled only when ModBus RTU is selected for RS485 communication lf a reception timeout error occurs this signal is output until reception of the next data Set a time before reception timeout in communication error timeout C077 For details refer to 4 4 Communication Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 farninal 11 to 15 selection B 32 NDc network error C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 l 0 00 timeout Set a time before reception timeout External controller Inverter Monitor timer Communication trip time C077 Communication disconnection detection signal NDc Cooling Fan Speed Drop Signal e This signal is output when detecting that the Inverter s built in cooling fan rotation speed is reduced to 75 or less elf 01 is selected in cooling fan control b092 this signal is not output even while the fan is stopped eWhile this signal is output check the cooling fan for clogging eLife assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C02
134. parameters and Drive program Initialization 01 b085 parameter selection Do not change 01 No Initial data select ge Frequency a 0086 conversion coefficient 0 1 to 99 9 1 0 Yes 4 2 D FQ scale factor fe 100 ON Enabled b087 one eae 01 OFF Disabled o No 4 70 y 02 Only RESET Disabled only during stop Free run stop 00 0 Hz start h 01 f match Frequency matching start b088 selection 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Matchin 00 No a E Restart after FRS i q y 9 restart Automatic carrier b089 reduction re E ca 00 No 4 73 Auto Carrier reduce Usage rate of pogo egensrative braking 00 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 74 function BRD use ratio Stop selection 00 Decel Stop Deceleration gt Stop 4 DOSI Stop mode select 01 Free RUN Free run stop 90 Ne 9 b092 Cooling fan control 00 Alws ON Always ON 01 No Cooling fan crtl 01 ON in RUN ON during RUN Regenerative braking 00 OFF Disabled b095 function operation 01 RUN ON Enabled Disabled during 00 No SN selection stop 4 74 BRD ctrl select 02 Alws ON Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking b096 function ON level att oy No V BRD activation 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 23 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Cinge N Function name M
135. position HIGH to Position range specification forward A command 2 P062 side 1643h LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 1644h P063 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward 1 command 3 P063 side 1645h LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 1646h P064 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward A command 4 P064 side 1647h LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 1648h P065 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward A command 5 P065 side 1649h LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 164Ah P066 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward 1 command 6 PO66 side 164Bh LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 164Ch P067 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward 1 command 7 P067 side 164Dh LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 00 Low speed 164Eh Zero return mode P068 R W 01 High speed 1 02 High speed 2 Zero return direction 00 FWD Forward side 164Fh selection nee ae 01 REV Reverse side o fe50n ICONS Peedero retum P070 R W 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 frequency Hz 1651h High speed zero return P071 R W 0 00 to Maximum frequency ag frequency Hz 1652h Pora R W Posi
136. power to the Inverter control circuit is also turned off and the alarm signal cannot be kept on If the alarm signal must be kept on use control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To 2 Connect control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To to the primary circuit of the magnetic contactor according to the following procedure Connection method Incoming electricity specifications 200 V class 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 282 to 339 V DC 400 V class 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 537 to 678 V DC yy 1 Disconnect the connected wire 2 Disconnect the J51 connector Design 3 Connect the control circuit power cable to the control circuit power supply terminal block To separate the control circuit power supply Ro To from the main circuit power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 observe the following instructions e For wiring between terminals Ro and To terminal screw size M4 use a cable of 1 25 mm or more e Connect a 3 A fuse to the control circuit power supply cable e f the control circuit power supply Ro To is turned on before the main circuit power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 ground fault detection at power on is disabled e To use a DC power supply for the control circuit power supply Ro To set the multi function output terminal contact selection C031 to C036 for the multi function output terminals 11 to 15 and relay output terminals AL2 AL1 ALO to 00 If
137. programming input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG Drive program start NO no allocation RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6
138. s 4 8 time 1 F003 Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 F203 2nd deceleration 9 94 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F303 gt 3rd deceleration 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F004 Operator rotation 00 FWD Forward 00 No 4 9 direction selection 01 REV Reverse 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 23 Extended Function Mode 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A001 Frequency reference selection 00 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 03 RS485 ModBus communication 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 EZSQ Drive programming 10 Math Operation function result 01 No 4 10 4 144 A002 RUN command selection 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 03 RS485 ModBus communication 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 01 No Basic setting A003 Base frequency 30 to Maximum frequency A004 50 A203 2nd set base frequency 30 to 2nd maximum frequency A204 50 A303 3rd set base frequency 30 to 3rd maximum frequency A304 50 No Hz A004 Maximum frequency A003 to 400 50 A
139. set values EE LOCAL REMOTE key It changes from Local to Remote mode Press the key during 2 seconds to change from Local to Remote or Remote to Local When it is in Local the OPE led will be ON Use Local to control the motor with LCD digital operator keys Run Fwd Run Rev and Stop Reset It transfers inverter parameters to the LCD digital operator s READ key memory mS WRITE ke It copies one Parameter Set or a Parameter Set Drive waar y Programming saved in LCD digital operator to the inverter ley e ESC key It returns to the above layer Fo SET key It jumps to the below layer or stores the change introduces on the edit layer after that it jumps to the above layer 3 17 3 7 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator Name Function UP ke It is used to move up the cursor it increases a function code in y 1 or increases a parameter value i i r function DOWN key Itis used to move down the cursor it decreases a function code in 1 or it decreases a value It is used to move the cursor to the left or it moves to previous PREV PAGE key mode when the display is a navigation level NEXT PAGE key It is used to move the cursor to the right or it moves to the next JAGE NEXT PACE mode when the display is a navigation level j It is used to run forward the motor only when the operation FWD RUN key command A002 is reset in Digital operato
140. setting Unit 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque characteristics A044 A244 V f characteristics 02 Free V f characteristics 1 00 A344 selection 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 1 05 V2 Sensor vector control Wictor barametet 00 Standard motor parameter H002 H202 pars 01 Auto tuning parameter 00 selection i 02 Online auto tuning parameter H003 H203 Motor capacity 02 to 160 0 Factory default kW selection Hoo4 H204 Motor pole number 37476 8710 4 Pole selection H020 H220 Motor parameter R1 0 001 to 65 535 Dependsonthe o motor capacity H021 H221 Motor parameter R2 0 001 to 65 535 Dependsonthe o motor capacity H022 H222 Motor parameter L 0 01 to 655 35 Dependsonthe H motor capacity H023 H223 Motor parameter IO 0 01 to 655 35 Pepends ome 4 motor capacity H024 H224 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 2 Depends onthe kgm motor capacity Ho30 H230 Motor parameter R1 0001 to 65 535 Pepende ane re auto tuning data motor capacity Motor parameter R2 Depends on the pees auto tuning data DCO ROSS 20 motor capacity 2 Hos2 H232 Motor parameter L 9 44 to 655 35 Depends one ary auto tuning data motor capacity H033 H233 Motor parameter IO 0 01 to 655 35 Depends on the A auto tuning data motor capacity Motor parameter J 42 Depends on the 2 H034 H234 auto tuning data 0 001 to 9999 00
141. si 00 No parity 4 146 S C074 iets 01 Even 00 No 2 pary 02 Odd O Communication stop 1 1 bit ov eN Sor bit selection 2 2 bit No E 00 Trip fe Coriunicshoreattor 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop O co76 selection 02 Ignore 02 No 03 Free RUN Free run stop 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop co77 COmMmunication error a do to 99 99 0 00 No Si Da timeout 4 146 C078 apes walt 9 to 1000 0 No ms Cc ASCII EE ommunication 00 C079 method selection 01 ModBus RTU 91 o D 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 46 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Cietie N Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page o setting operation C081 O adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory Yes default C082 Ol adjustment 0 to 65535 Eaciory Yes z default E Factor cos3 02 adjustment 0 to 65535 Y yes 2 default Coss Hemet 0 0 to 1000 0 Facta Sag I a nl 7 adjustment default Debug mode Use 00 Q091 selection Do not change 9y N E E 00 Not save Do not store the frequency C101 UP DWN selection data 00 No 4 90 01 Save Store the frequency data 00 ON RESET Trip reset at power on 01 OFF RESET Trip reset when the power o is OFF 4 87 zg C102 es
142. the Digital Operator Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits Select using the Digital Operator Starting method One side start using host command it ti Set using i k Gio Taes the Digital Operator Connection 1 N N 32 max Use the Digital Operator to select a station No Error check Overrun Framing BCC Vertical Horizontal parity Overrun Framing CRC 16 Horizontal parity lt RS485 Port Specifications and Connections gt For the RS485 communication function use the TM2 terminal on the control terminal block board block board eminal Description abbreviations SP Transmission Reception SN Transmission Reception aey terminal RP Termination resistor enabling terminal SN Termination resistor enabling terminal Control terminal The following wires are recommended for TM2 4 145 4 4 Communication Function Single wire Stranded wire Stranded wire with solderless terminal Wire strip length Tightening torque Connection Connect the Inverters parallel to each other as shown below For the termination Inverter short circuit the RP and SN terminals Also if the RS485 communication function is used with a single Inverter the RP and SN terminals must be short circuited Short circuiting the RP and SN terminals activates the termination resistor inside the control terminal block board suppressing signal reflection 0 14 to 1 5 mm If two equa
143. the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid a possible overcurrent trip Turn on the PIDC terminal after turning off PID operation AVR Function This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter fluctuates With this function output voltage to the motor is based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 02 OFF during deceleration A082 AVR voltage selection 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 400 o 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 Related functions d004 A001 A005 eWith A081 AVR selection set whether to enable or disable this function eNote that the Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage eTo avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR selection to Always ON A081 00 Parameter No Data Description Note 00 Always ON Enabled during acceleration constant speed and deceleration 01 Always OFF Disabled during acceleration constant speed and deceleration noe Disabled only during deceleration in order to reduce the energy OFF during Paling 02 a regenerated to the Inverter by increasing the motor loss This will deceleration f f avoid a possible trip due to regeneration during deceleration 4 35 4 2 Function Mode Automatic En
144. the output frequency instantaneously follows the reference frequency eTo switch between the 1 st 2nd Srd acceleration times or between the 1st 2nd 3rd deceleration times allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input refer to Multi function Input Selection page 4 79 and use the SET SETS eYou can set the acceleration deceleration time via 1 the Digital Operator 2 optional board 1 or 3 optional board 2 Even if a short acceleration deceleration time is set the actual time cannot be shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time that is determined by the mechanical inertia moment and the motor torque If you set a time shorter than the minimum time an overcurrent overvoltage trip may occur Acceleration Time Ts s Jp m x Nm 9 55x Tg T Deceleration Time Ts B JL Jm x Nm 9 55x Tg T Ji Inertia moment of the load converted to the motor shaft kg m2 Ju Inertia moment of the motor kg m Nu Motor rotation speed r min Ts Max acceleration torque with the Inverter driving N m Te Max deceleration torque with the Inverter driving N m Ti Required driving torque N m For short time deceleration use a braking unit optional Operator Rotation Direction Selection Select the rotation direction applied to the RUN command via the Digital Operator This is disabled at terminals Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit
145. width for the upper and lower limit levels 1347h Window comparator O2 b068 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 4 197 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name oncion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 1348h Not used 1349h cod operation levelat 6070 R W 0 to 100 no ignored 1 O disconnection 134ah need operation levelat lt 674 R W 0 to 100 no ignored 1 9 Ol disconnection 134Bh Naog operation levelat 6072 R W 100 to 100 no ignored 1 O2 disconnection 134Ch to Not used 1350 1351h Integrated power clear b078 R W D with the Enterkeyafterchanging 1352h Pdi power display b079 R W 1 to 1000 1 1353h Not used 1354h Not used 0 01 1355h Starting frequency b082 R W 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 1356h Carrier frequency b083 R W 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 0 1 kHz 00 no Clears the trip monitor 01 Trip data Initializes data 02 Parameters Clears the trip monitor pa aa and initializes data 1357h Initialization selection b084 R W 03 Trip Param Clears the trip monitor and parameters 04 Trp Prm EzSQ Clears the trip moni tor parameters and Drive Program 1358h Initialization parameter b085 R W gi SN selection
146. 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a mechanical delay time from when the b123 t 0 00 s stopping release signal is turned off until the brake is closed 0 00 to 5 00 Brakewaittmefor Set a wait time longer than the time from b124 when the release signal is released until the 0 00 Ss confirmation j brake outputs the release completion signal to the Inverter 0 00 to 400 00 b125 Brake release frequency Seta frequency to output the brake release 0 00 Hz signal 1 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW b126 Brake release current 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW Rated current 0 00 to 400 00 b127 Brake input frequency Set a frequency to close the brake during 0 00 Hz stop Related functions C001 to C008 C021 to C025 1 Set a brake release frequency higher than the starting frequency b082 2 If the set current is too low sufficient torque may not be provided when the brake is released In any of the following cases the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER Brake error E36 e The output current is lower than the release current after the brake release establishment wait time b121 elapses eWhen the brake confirmation BOK signal is used the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the brake confirmation wait time b124 during acceleration or does not turn off within the brake confirmation wait time b124 during deceleration or the brake confirmation sig
147. 0 10 A4040 4 0 AX RC06400116 DE 11 6 6 40 A4055 55 AX RC04410167 DE 16 7 4 41 A4075 7 5 AX RC03350219 DE 21 9 3 35 A4110 11 0 AX RC02330307 DE 30 7 2 33 A4150 15 0 AX RC01750430 DE 43 0 1 75 400V A4185 A4220 18 5 to 22 AX RC01200644 DE 64 4 1 20 A4300 30 AX RC00920797 DE 79 7 0 92 A4370 37 AX RC00741042 DE 104 2 0 74 A4450 45 AX RC00611236 DE 123 6 0 61 A4550 55 AX RC00501529 DE 152 9 0 50 B4750 75 AX RC00372094 DE 209 4 0 37 B4900 90 AX RC00312446 DE 244 6 0 31 B411K 110 AX RC00252981 DE 298 1 0 25 B413K 132 AX RC00213613 DE 361 3 0 21 7 22 wn D Q f 9 5 7 7 3 Options External EMC Filter AX FIROOOO RE Dimensional Drawing Footprint Dimensions Book Type Dimensions D cS a drive mounts 2 Ea n n output flexes Y Dimensions i Voltage Inverter model Model wel hi L Ww H x Y M Filter type 3G3RX A2004 3G3RX A2007 3G3RX A2015 AX FIR2018 RE 305 125 45 290 110 M5 2 0 38G3RX A2022 Footprint 3G3RX A2037 3G3RX A2055 3G3RX A2075 AX FIR2053 RE 312 212 56 296 110 M6 2 5 5 3x200 V 3G3RX A2110 arar 3G3RX A2150 4 3G3RX A2185 AX FIR2110 RE 8 0 k 3G3RX A2220 Oo 3G3RX A2300 AX FIR2145 RE 455 110 240 414 80 Book type 8 6 3 3G3RX A2370 2 AX FIR3250 RE 13 un 3G3RX A2450 38G3RX A2550 AX FIR3320
148. 0 9 991 auto tuning data H234 kgm 252Dh LOW R W 252Eh to Not used E 253Ch 253Dh 2nd PI proportional gain H250 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 253Eh 2nd PI integral gain H251 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 253Fh 2nd P proportional gain H252 R W 0 01 to 10 00 0 01 2540h to Not used 2546h 2547h 2nd limit at 0 Hz H260 R W 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 pedan od boost amountat SEN Thag RW loto50 1 startup 0 Hz 2549h to Not used 3102h Data on H203 2nd motor capacity selection is the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Motor capacity kW 90 110 132 150 160 4 4 Communication Function lt Holding Register Number List 3rd Setting gt Resis Function name Fumer R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F302 3103h HIGH R W 3rd acceleration time 1 S305 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 3104h LOW R W F303 3105h HIGH R W 3rd deceleration time 1 z 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 303 3106h LOW R W 3107h to Not used 3202h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode 3rd Setting gt Regis Function name Eee R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 3203h 3rd set base frequenc
149. 0 Yes P169 to Op I F cmd W reg 10 Option I F cmd R P170 register 1 to 10 to Op I F cmd R reg 1 0000 to FFFF 0000 Yes P179 to Op I F cmd R reg 10 Profibus node P180 address 0 to 125 0 No Profibus Node adrs P181 Profibus clear mode 00 Clear 00 No Profibus CLR mode 01 Last value 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 45 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Changes N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page O setting i operation Pofeus Mae Joo po P182 i 01 Conventional 00 No Frofibus Map 02 Flexible Mode selection i CANOpen Node address P185 CANOpen Node 0 to 127 0 No adrs 00 Auto 01 10Kbps CANOpen 02 20Kbps communication 03 50Kbps P186 speed 04 125Kbps 06 No CANOpen com 05 250Kbps speed 06 500Kbps 07 800Kbps 08 1Mbps CompoNet node address P190 CompoNet Node 0 to 63 0 No address DeviceNet node P192 address 0 to 63 63 No DeviceNet MAC ID ML2 frame length 00 32 bytes P195 ML2 frame length 01 17 bytes o9 No a _ ML2 node address Bie ML2 node address 2NI0SE a Ne o _ U001 User 1 selection no d001 to P196 no U002 User 2 selection no d001 to P196 no U003 User 3 selection no d001 to P196 no U004 User 4 selection no d001
150. 0 motor capacity kgm 1 For 1st control A044 all items 00 to 05 are selectable However for 2nd control A244 and 3rd control A344 the selectable range is 00 to 04 and 00 to 01 respectively For ND the selectable range is 00 to 02 2 Convert moment of inertia J into motor shaft data The larger the J value the faster the response resulting in a steep torque rise the smaller the J value the slower the response resulting in a gradual torque rise After setting the J value adjust the response speed in speed response H005 H205 4 115 4 2 Function Mode Arbitrary Motor Parameter For arbitrary settings of motor parameters the function codes vary depending on the setting of 1st 2nd control and on the set value of the motor parameter selection e When 1st 2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to 00 gt Directly enter H020 to H024 e When 1st 2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to 01 or 02 gt Directly enter H030 to H034 e If offline auto tuning has not been performed the motor parameters in the same capacity rank as the Inverter standard motor parameters are set in HO30 H230 to H034 H234 Sensorless Vector Control This function estimates and controls motor rpm and output torque based on the Inverter s output voltage and current as well as the motor parameter settings This control method provides high starting torque in a low frequency range 0
151. 0 to 7 PO60 to P067 is limited by this con trol range setting You cannot set a position command beyond the position range Teaching Function This function starts or stops the motor at a desired position and stores the current position as a po sition command in a desired position command area Allocate 45 ORT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 When V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 absolute position control or 03 high reso lution absolute position control the relevant terminal serves as a teaching terminal Related functions C001 to C008 P012 P074 lt Teaching Procedure gt 1 In teaching selection P074 select the position command you want to set 2 Move the workpiece Input the RUN command with the ORT terminal turned on At this time the speed command and acceleration deceleration time conform to the currently selected parameters ORT terminal RUN command Output frequency Depends on the speed command selected Position If the Inverter control circuit Ro To is turned on teaching is enabled The current position counter operates even if the workpiece is moved by an external device Teaching is therefore enabled even while the Inverter is stopped Note Make sure that the power supplies R L1 S L2 T L3 for the Inverter power circuit are shut off or that the Inverter s outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 are disconnected from the motor Not doing so may resu
152. 00 OFF Disabled D i i S b004 interruption l o ON Enabled 00 No _ 5 undervoltage trip 02 Decel OFF Disabled during stop and during stop selection deceleration sto E g Stop p 4 42 Momentary power i b005 interruption retry time 90 16 times 00 No 01 No limit selection Input phase loss 00 OFF Disabled b096 protection selection 01 ON Enabled 99 No E oe z Frequency matching 4 42 g b007 lower limit frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 71 2 setting 4 87 2 00 TRIP Alarm 5 01 0 Hz start 2 02 f match Frequency matching start b008 Trip retry selection 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency 00 No 4 42 matching deceleration stop 5 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart a gt Undervoltage retry 00 16 times g b009 time selection 01 No limit 90 No oO Overvoltage b010 overcurrent retry time 1 to 3 3 No Time 4 42 selection b011 Trip retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 32 uonesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level b312 3rd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated c
153. 000020 ORL Zero return limit signal 0000002000000000 0000000000000040 ORG Zero return startup signal 0000004000000000 0000000000000080 FOT Forward driving stop 0000008000000000 0000000000000100 ROT Reverse driving stop 0000010000000000 0000000000000200 SPD Speed Position switching 0000020000000000 0000000000000400 PCNT Pulse counter 0000040000000000 0000000000000800 PCC Pulse counter clear 0000080000000000 0000000000001000 0000100000000000 0000000000002000 0000200000000000 0000000000004000 0000400000000000 0000000000008000 0000800000000000 0000000000010000 0001000000000000 0000000000020000 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 0004000000000000 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 0000000000100000 0010000000000000 0000000000200000 0020000000000000 0000000000400000 0040000000000000 0000000000800000 0080000000000000 0000000001000000 0100000000000000 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 0000000004000000 0400000000000000 0000000008000000 0800000000000000 0000000010000000 1000000000000000 0000000020000000 2000000000000000 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 suonun4 Example To enable Forward Multi step speed 1 and Multi step speed 2 for the Inverter with station
154. 001 to 65 535 No Q Depends H220 2nd motor on the parameter R1 motor capacity Depends H021 Motor parameter R2 onhe motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 4 115 Depends 2nd motor on the ia parameter R2 motor capacity Depends H022 Motor parameter L onte motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No mH Depends H222 2nd motor on the parameter L motor capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 50 uonesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter F Default mee Function name Monitor or data range s during Unit Page No setting operation Depends H023 Motor parameter IO onthe motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A Depends H223 2nd motor on the parameter IO motor capacity 4 115 Depends H024 Motor parameter J onthe motor capacity 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm Depends H224 2nd motor on the parameter J motor capacity Depends H030 Motor parameter R1 on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q ren 2nd motor ee 2 H230 parameter R1 f motor E auto tuning data j g capacity a Depends z H031 Motor parameter R2 on the 8 auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 2nd motor ai H231 parameter R2 motor auto tuning data capacity 4 111 Depends 4 115 Motor parameter L on the t1032 auto
155. 009 J01 a Poe enes SERN FOOT Enabled when A001 03 Hz 000 LOW R W O Initial status 1 2 Stop 3 RUN 0003h Inverter status A pgi 2 Free run stop 5 Jogging 6 DC injection braking 7 Retry 8 Trip 9 During UV 0 During stop 0004h Inverter status B R 1 During RUN 2 During trip 0 1 Stop 2 Deceleration 3 Constant speed 4 Acceleration 0005h Inverter status C R 5 Forward 6 Reverse 7 Forward to reverse 8 Reverse to forward 9 Forward run start 10 Reverse run start 0 01 0006h PID feedback R W 0 to 10000 9 0007h to Not used 0010h 0011h Fault frequency monitor d080 R 0 to 65535 1 time 0012h Fault monitor 1 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List r page 4 183 0013h Fault monitor 1 Inverter status Sees Invener Trip F ctor List page 4 183 0014h Fault monitor 1 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 0015h Fault monitor 1 frequency LOW Hz 0016h Fault monitor 1 current d081 Fes Output current value at theitime of 0 1 A tripping 0017h Fault monitor 1 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0018h Fault monitor 1 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0019h Fault monitor 1 RUN time LOW 001Ah Fault monitor 1 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 001Bh Fault monitor 1 ON time LOW Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set val
156. 00h Below are the values to be written into the holding register Set value Description 0000 Motor parameter re calculation 0001 Set value storage Other than the above Motor parameter re calculation and set value storage Note The Enter command needs considerable time Monitor the data writing signal coil number 0049h to check whether the data is being written e Since the Inverter s memory element has a limit on the number of rewrites approx 100 000 times the Inverter life may be shortened if enter commands are frequently used EEPROM Write Mode elf the holding register write command 06h etc is used to write 1 into the holding register for EEPROM write mode 0902h the EEPROM write mode will become active elf data is changed using the holding register write command 06h after switching to the EEPROM write mode the new data is written into both the volatile memory for operation RAM and nonvolatile memory for storage EEPROM At the same time the EEPROM write mode is cancelled elf any command other than the holding register write command 06h is received after switching to the EEPROM write mode the EEPROM write mode is cancelled 4 174 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Difference between Enter Command and EEPROM Write Mode Enter command EEPROM write mode Master 3G3MX2 Master EEPROM write mode Parameter change Write into RAM enabled 902h 1 Parameter
157. 011 Multi function input 1 operation selection Input 1 actv State C012 Multi function input 2 operation selection Input 2 actv State C013 Multi function input 3 operation selection Input 3 actv State C014 Multi function input 4 operation selection Input 4 actv State C015 Multi function input 5 operation selection Input 5 actv State C016 Multi function input terminals Multi function input 6 operation selection Input 6 actv State C017 Multi function input 7 operation selection Input 7 actv State C018 Multi function input 8 operation selection Input 8 actv State C019 FW terminal operation selection Input FW actv State 00 NO 01 NC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 No 4 81 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 27 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection Output 11 function C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection Output 12 function C023 Multi function output terminal 13 selection Output 13 function C024 Multi function output terminal Multi f
158. 017 EZSQ Selection 1 PRG start 00 No EZSQ select 2 Always ON Multi step speed ae te A019 selection op Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals 00 No 4 16 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals D Multispeed select 9 Multi step speed A020 reference 0 0 00 to Max Frequency A004 6 00 Yes Hz 8 Multispeed 0 P 2nd multi step oy A220 speed reference 0 0 00 to Max Frequency A204 6 00 Yes Hz 4 8 y Multispeed 0 M2 4 16 Z 3rd multi step speed A320 reference 0 0 00 to Max Frequency A304 6 00 Yes Hz Multispeed 0 M3 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 6 xipueddy Multi step speed Jogging Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A021 Multi step speed reference 1 Multispeed 1 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 Multispeed 2 A023 Multi step speed reference 3 Multispeed 3 A024 Multi step speed reference 4 Multispeed 4 A025 Multi step speed reference 5 Multispeed 5 A026 Multi step speed reference 6 Multispeed 6 A027 Multi step speed reference 7 Multispeed 7 A028 Multi step speed reference 8 Multispeed 8 A029 Multi step speed reference 9 Multispeed 9 A030 Multi
159. 02 4 Read lock Disable 5 R W Storage Mode Quad 6 Backlight Auto Off Off 7 Backlight Flicker Enable After this date and time setting is required Check Mode Check if LED and key etc are normal or not Key amp Led Check LCD Check EEPROM Check RTC Check Serial Loopback Debug Mode Firmware Version Note Please do not execute the EEPROM check Otherwise the data parameters Drive program saved in LCD digital operator will be erased 3 8 uonesado Operation 3 4 Operation 4 Monitor A Display Mode navigation layer The cursor will be displayed in the Monitor A pressing the 4 key 1 Please select monitor mode A by using the K amp L or key at the 2 After that use the A or key to select the function code to be displayed into the Monitor A Use 8 or L key to move the cursor to the function code F001 in this case and use the or key to change the function code 3 Use the key to access to the function code value With the or key the value can be changed The changes will be stored after pressing the key or cancelled pressing the _ key 3 9 3 4 Operation 5 Monitor B Display Mode 1 Please select the Display Mode Monitor B using the a or 24 key at the navigation layer 2 After pressing the
160. 05 Free V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 3 b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 0 No Hz 4 22 b107 Free V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V S b108 Free V f frequency 5 O to Free V f frequency 6 0 No Hz b109 Free V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b110 Free V f frequency 6 O to Free V f frequency 7 0 No Hz b111 Free V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 0 No Hz b113 Free V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V Brake control 00 OFF Disabled ae selection 01 ON Enabled 90 No pigi Pike walbilme tor oan teS 00 0 00 No s release p122 Brake wait time for 1 6 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s acceleration ai bis Beka WAIAME AON oai S100 0 00 No s 9 stopping 2 4 77 O p124 Brake wait time for 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s confirmation bids Bieke release 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated p126 Brake release current 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current Ne p127 B ake input 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 39 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Ae NA 00 OFF Disabled b130 P f i 01 V const DC voltage kept constan
161. 055 A2075 3G3RX A4055 A4075 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M5 Others M5 3G3RX A2110 3G3RX A4110 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M5 2 14 a ubiso 2 2 Wiring Terminal arrangement Applicable model G QE PD 1 P short circuit bar e Ground terminal with short circuit When not using the DC bar shaded area for EMC filter phe i i reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached EMC filter function switching method 3G3RX A2150 to A2185 3G3RX A4150 to A4220 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M6 3G3RX A2220 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M8 EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled os Ro To 3G3RX A2300 CHARGE LED indicator G G Ro To M4 R L1 Ground terminal M6 Others M8 Ground terminal with short circuit _ PD 1 P short circuit bar 3G3RX A4300 bar shaded area for EMC filter When not using the DC reactor function switching keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached Ro To M4 EMC filter function switching method Ground terminal M6 Others M6 ao WS nr EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled 3G3RX A2370 3G3RX A4370 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M8 2 15 2 2 Wiring Terminal arrangement Applicable model short circuit bar Ground terminal with 3G3RX A2450 When not using the DC short circuit
162. 08 1Mbps pigge ompeltenneds 0 to 63 0 No address P192 DeviceNet node 0to63 63 No address 00 32 bytes P195 ML2 frame length 01 17 bytes 00 No P196 ML2 node address 21 to 3E 21 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 57 3 9 Parameter List Parameter A Default Changes N Function name Monitor or data range r during Unit Page O setting operation U001 User 1 selection no d001 to P196 no U002 User 2 selection no d001 to P196 no U003 User 3 selection no d001 to P196 no U004 User 4 selection no d001 to P196 no U005 User 5 selection no d001 to P196 no oO amp U006 User 6 selection no d001 to P196 no a Yes 4 53 2a U007 User 7 selection no d001 to P196 no o 3 U008 User 8 selection no d001 to P196 no U009 User 9 selection no d001 to P196 no U010 User 10 selection no d001 to P196 no U011 User 11 selection no d001 to P196 no U012 User 12 selection no d001 to P196 no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 58 uolneisdo Chapter 4 Functions 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Monito Mode eenean reese reper aaa a ERS 4 1 FUNCTION Mode maae aa aan 4 8 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Communi
163. 09 Free V f voltage 5 b111 Free V f voltage 6 b113 Free V f voltage 7 Related functions A044 A244 A344 4 22 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 4 23 Example Output voltage V p ge V v7 V6 V5 V4 V1 V2 V3 Output frequency Hz 0 fi f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 Even if free V f voltages 1 to 7 are set to 800 V the Inverter cannot output voltage higher than the input voltage or the value of the motor voltage selection Use thorough caution to verify that the output characteristic setting is proper An improper setting causes overcurrent during acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor and or machine Output voltage V V7 J 1 i Select the voltage or motor S voltage available for output V6 0 f6 f7 Output frequency Hz 4 2 Function Mode Output Voltage Gain Changes the Inverter output voltage based on the voltage selected in AVR voltage selection A082 as 100 eYou can avoid motor hunting by reducing the output voltage gain Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Related functions A082 AVR voltage selection A082 A045 Base frequency Max frequency A003 A203 A303 A004 A204 A304 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking is applied to the motor depending on the motor load Two methods are available for DC injection braking One is the external method via the multi function input termi
164. 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code OF 2 Function code OF 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Coil start number MSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 06 4 Coil start number LSB 06 5 Number of coils MSB 00 5 Number of coils MSB 00 6 Number of coils LSB 06 6 Number of coils LSB 06 7 Number of bytes 02 7 CRC 16 MSB 34 8 Change data MSB 2 17 8 CRC 16 LSB 4C 9 Change data LSB 00 10 CRC 16 MSB DB 11 CRC 16 LSB 3E 1 There is no response for broadcasting 25 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 Since the change data comprises of both MSB and LSB as a set make the byte to be an even number by adding 1 even if the byte that actually needs to be changed is an odd number If writing into multiple coils cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 172 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into Multiple Holding Register 10h gt Writes into consecutive multiple holding registers Example Set acceleration time 1 F002 to 3000 sec for the Inverter with slave address 1 The data resolution of the holding register 1103h 1104h of acceleration time 1 F002 is 0 01 sec onds To set to 3000 seconds set data to 300000 493E0h Query Response No Field name aes No Field name see 1 Slave address 01 1 Slave address 01 2 Functio
165. 10 Torque bias monitor P026 Overspeed error detection level d029 Positioning command monitor P027 Speed deviation error detection level d030 Current position monitor P028 Motor gear ratio numerator b120 Brake control enable P029 Motor gear ratio denominator b121 Brake wait time for release P032 Orientation stop position input type b122 Brake wait time for acceleration P033 Torque reference input selection b123 Brake wait time fot stopping P034 Torque reference setting b124 Brake wait time for confirmation P035 Polarity selection at torque reference via O2 b125 Brake release frequency P036 Torque bias mode b126 Brake release current P037 Torque bias value b127 Brake input frequency P038 Torque bias polarity selection H060 Limit at 0 Hz P039 Speed limit value in torque control forward H260 2nd limit at O Hz P040 Speed limit value in torque control reverse H061 ae am untat SEV startup PO60 Multi step position command 0 H261 ee one ALSEN P061 Multi step position command 1 P011 Encoder pulses P062 Multi step position command 2 P012 V2 control mode selection P063 Multi step position command 3 P013 Pulse train mode selection P064 Multi step position command 4 P014 Orientation stop position P065 Multi step position command 5 P015 Orientation speed setting PO66 Multi step position command 6 P016 Orientation direction setting P067 Multi step position command 7 P017 Position ready range setting P068 Zero return mode P018 Position ready del
166. 13 15 DC injection braking carrier frequency DC Injection Braking Power Limit MExternal DC Injection Braking e Allocate 07 DB to any of multi function inputs C001 to C008 DC injection braking can be applied by turning on off the DB terminal regardless of DC injection braking selection A051 Set a braking power level in DC injection braking power A054 lf DC injection braking delay time A053 is set the Inverter output is shut off during the set time period and the motor goes into free run status After the set time elapses DC injection braking starts Set DC injection braking time A055 via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into account motor heat generation e Perform each setting according to your system after setting DC injection braking method selection A056 a Edge operation A056 00 b Level operation A056 01 Example 1 a Example 1 b w FW DB DB Output Output frequency eee frequency bgy A055 _ Example 2 a Example 2 b w Fw DB DB Tl T ___ Output Output frequency A frequency X A055 4 25 4 2 Function Mode a Edge operation A056 00 b Level operation A056 01 Example 3 a Example 3 b w Fw DB DB a a L Output F Output Free running frequency x Var ge frequency n A A053 A055 A053 lt _ lt lt gt Internal DC Injection Braking A051 01 DC injection braking is applied wi
167. 15 90 100 5 5 kW 15 100 100 15 100 100 4 68 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Derating atfc Derating at fc Capaci Max fe Deratingatfc Derating atfc Max fc 12 kHz 8kHz 15 kHz 10 kHz pacity kHz 12 kHz ND 15 kHz HD kHz for 75 to 132 for 75 to 132 kW kW ND HD 7 5 kW 15 100 100 15 100 100 11 kw 12 90 90 15 100 100 15 kW 12 90 95 14 100 95 18 5 kW 10 90 90 10 95 90 22 kW 7 90 70 6 90 75 30 kW 5 80 80 10 80 75 37 kW 10 75 75 8 90 80 45 kw 5 90 70 9 80 75 55 kW 5 90 70 6 75 60 75 kW 6 90 85 90 kW 4 80 75 110 kW 6 80 70 132 kW 3 70 60 Normal duty 200 V class 400 V class 3 7kW 18 5kW _ 4 0kW 11kW 110kW 75kW 37kW ET uer 100 2 Se Ae 5 5 15kW d 95 15kW 45kW 95 18 5kW 90 se 90 22kW S 85 ae 30kW E oe 2 7 l 55kW 5 75 a f So 7kW 2 70l 3 65 2 65 O 60 i O 60 i 6 2 4 6 10 12 052 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency kHz Carrier frequency kHz Heavy duty 200 V class 400 V class 90 kW 75 kW 45 kW Output current derating 0 5 2 4 6 Carrier frequency kHz 10 12 1415 Output current derating 4 6 8 10 30 kW 15 kw 12 1415 Carrier frequency kHz elf the above maximum rated carrier frequency and the derating value at 15 k
168. 2 Free V f frequencies 3 to 6 b104 b106 b108 b110 lt Free V f frequencies 1 2 b100 b102 gt Free V f frequency 3 b104 Free V f frequencies 4 to 6 b106 b108 b110 lt suoieisdo sdueud UIeLy Maintenance Operations 5 2 Warning Function Target code Condition Base code Free V f frequencies 1 to 3 b100 b102 b104 gt Free V f frequency 4 b106 Free V f frequencies 5 6 b108 b110 lt Free V f frequencies 1 to 4 b100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free V f frequency 5 b108 Free V f frequency 6 b110 lt Free V f frequencies 1 to 5 b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 Free ec frequency eb 0 Free electric thermal Free electric thermal frequencies 2 3 b017 b019 lt frequency 1 b015 Free electric thermal frequency 1 b015 Free electric thermal frequency 3 b019 Free electric thermal frequency 2 b017 Free electric thermal frequencies 1 2 b015 b017 Free electric thermal frequency 3 b019 1 In this case the base frequency is rewritten when corresponding parameters Change the data to a correct value is a warning occurs Otherwise the motor may burn out depending on the value 2 Checks even if the frequency reference selection A001 is set other than to the Digital Operator 02 3 The jump frequency is rewritten into the value of the subtraction of the jump width lower limit from the jump frequency e Warning appears when a target code set data meets the condition shown
169. 2 gt Sets multi function input terminal status e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes Onto oe and EE arn nice onan all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 02 Data Transmission data 16 bytes i Exclusive OR from station No to data BCC Block check code 2 bytes Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 150 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Data hexadecimal and description of multi function terminals For details refer to Multi function Input Selection page 4 79 Data hex Description Data hex Description 0000000000000001 FWD Forward 0000000100000000 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 1 0000000000000002 RV Reverse 0000000200000000 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 2 0000000000000004 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 1 0000000400000000 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 3 0000000000000008 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 2 0000000800000000 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 4 0000000000000010 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 3 0000001000000000 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 5 0000000000000020 CF4 Multi step speed setting binary 4 0000002000000000 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit
170. 2007 1 5 kW 3G3RX A2015 2 2 kW 3G3RX A2022 3 7 kW 3G3RX A2037 5 5 kW 3G3RX A2055 7 5 kW 3G3RX A2075 3 phase 200 V AC 11 kW 3G3RX A2110 15 kw 3G3RX A2150 18 5 kW 3G3RX A2185 22 kW 3G3RX A2220 30 kW 3G3RX A2300 37 kW 3G3RX A2370 45 kW 3G3RX A2450 55 kW 3G3RX A2550 tia 0 4 kW 3G3RX A4004 0 75 kw 3G3RX A4007 1 5 kW 3G3RX A4015 2 2 kW 3G3RX A4022 4 0 kW 3G3RX A4040 5 5 kW 3G3RX A4055 7 5 kW 3G3RX A4075 11 kW 3G3RX A4110 15 kW 3G3RX A4150 3 phase 400 V AC 18 5 kW 3G3RX A4185 22 kW 3G3RX A4220 30 kW 3G3RX A4300 37 kW 3G3RX A4370 45 kw 3G3RX A4450 55 kW 3G3RX A4550 75 kW 3G3RX B4750 90 kW 3G3RX B4900 nae 110 kW 3G3RX B411K 132 kW 3G3RX B413K 1 1 1 1 Functions International Standards Models EC Directives and UL cUL Standards The RX Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL cUL standard requirements for worldwide use Classification Applicable standard EC Directives EMC Directive EN61800 3 2004 Low voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2007 UL cUL Standards UL508C Human Environment friendly High performance General purpose Inverters Suitable for Various Advanced Applications HHigh Performance High Starting Torque With the vector control and auto tuning functions the RX Series has achieved high starting torque in excess of 200 at 0 3 Hz Trip Suppression This Inverter features two trip suppression functions Overcurrent trip suppression function to suppress overcurrent trip during acce
171. 204 2nd maximum frequency A203 to 400 50 A304 3rd maximum frequency A303 to 400 50 No Hz A005 Analog input Others O OI selection 00 O 02 Switches between O OI via terminal AT 01 O 02 Switches between O O2 via terminal AT 02 OJ VR Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 03 OI VR Switches between Ol FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 04 02 VR Switches between 02 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 No A006 O2 selection 00 02 only 01 O OI P auxiliary frequency reference not reversible 02 O OI PM auxiliary frequency reference reversible 03 OFF O2 disabled 03 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 24 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default mee Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation A011 O start frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz A012 O end frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz A013 O start ratio 0 to 100 0 No n 2 A014 Oend ratio 0 to 100 100 No ae asa 2 00 External start frequency 2 A015 O start selection A011 set value 01 No 01 0 Hz 3 1 to 30 oO A amp A016 O O2 Ol samp
172. 212h O O2 Ol sampling A016 R W 31 500 ms filter with a hysteresis of 1 0 1 Hz Drive Programmin OO Digable 12131 ESQ EAAS A017 R W 01 PRG start 02 Always ON 1213h Not used 1214h Not used 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 1215h Multi step speed selection A019 R W terminals 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals 1216h acd R W Multi step speed 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 0 A020 Hz 1217h LOW R W 1218h A021 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 1 A021 Hz 1219h LOW R W 121Ah nee R W Multi step speed HIGH i 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 2 A022 Hz 121Bh LOW R W 121Ch A029 RAN Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 3 A023 Hz 121Dh LOW R W 121Eh ee R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 4 A024 Hz 121Fh LOW R W 1220h A025 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 5 A025 Hz 1221h LOW R W 1222h A026 R W Multi step speed HIGH 3 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 6 A026 Hz 1223h LOW R W 1224h moe R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 7 A027 Hz 1225h LOW R W 4 187 4 4 Communication Function
173. 3 9 selection operation selection selection operation selection C001 C011 C003 C013 J 1 2 SW1 OFF Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Emergency randomly randomly 4 randomly randomly Shuton Factory 01 RV Factory 00 NO Factory 12 EXT Factory 00 NO Disabled default default default default factory Sad default SW1 ON Automatic allocation to multi function input terminals 1 and 3 Emergency and the input terminal with 18 RS setting Soi Fixed 18 RS Fixed 00 NO Fixed 64 EMR Fixed 01 NC Enabled f f 5 function function function function Cannot Cannot Cannot Cannot be be be be changed changed changed changed Turning SW1 Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected on and then randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 a Holds 18 RS Holds 00 NO Emergency no Holds 01 NC mergency z shutoff setting setting shutoff no setting Disabled while SW1 while SW1 function allocation while SW1 3 5 is ON is ON Reset is ON 1 With the terminal with input terminal selection 18 RS NO NC selection is fixed to 00 NO 2 When C003 is 64 EMR C013 is fixed to 01 NC 3 If 18 RS has been allocated to a multi function input terminal except for 3 other than terminal 1 before switch SW1 is set to ON the input terminal selection for the relevant terminal will be autom
174. 3 H203 H004 Related functions H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 HO50 H250 H051 H251 HO52 H252 4 119 4 2 Function Mode Stabilization Parameter This function adjusts to reduce motor hunting eIn case of motor hunting check whether motor capacity HO03 H203 and motor pole number selection H0O04 H204 match your motor If they do not match them If the motor s primary resistance is smaller than that of the standard motor increase the HO06 H206 H306 set value gradually To run a motor with a capacity larger than the Inverter s rated capacity reduce the set value Other than this function the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting Lower the carrier frequency b083 Refer to page 4 68 Lower the output voltage gain A045 Refer to page 4 24 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H006 H206 H306 Stabilization parameter 7 HRG occurs adjust the set value 100 A049 Output voltage gain Puana oe reduce the set value 109 a ee Parmer freq eney a cre reduce the set value 5 0 Kz Auto Return Initial Display eTen minutes after last key operation display returns to the initial parameter set by b038 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting b164 00 OFF Disabled Auto return initial display 01 ON Enabled 00 Data Read Write Selection e Restrict the data read write operat
175. 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 09 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data 2 bytes 01 Enabled Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Negative response Refer to page 4 161 lt Command 0A gt Stores a set value in EEPROM e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes OA Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 161 Negative response Refer to page 4 161 4 160 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Command OB gt Re calculates internal parameters Recalculation is required when the base frequency and H parameters are changed via RS485 communication Transmission fr
176. 32200 DE 240 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAO16300038 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO11800053 DE 120 80 120 80 52 5 5 2 35 AX RAO07300080 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO04600110 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 AX RAO03600160 DE 180 85 205 140 55 6 6 5 AX RAO02500220 DE 180 95 205 140 55 6 9 1 AX RAO02000320 DE 180 105 205 140 85 6 11 7 AX RAO01650400 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 AX RAO01300480 DE 240 120 275 200 85 6 18 6 AX RAO01030580 DE 240 120 275 200 85 6 18 6 AX RAO00800750 DE 240 120 275 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAO00680900 DE 240 150 275 200 110 6 27 0 7 24 7 3 Options Dimensions Weight Reference Kg A B2 C2 D E F AX RAO00531100 DE 240 150 275 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAO00401490 DE 300 165 320 200 125 6 44 0 AX RAO00331760 DE 300 165 320 200 125 6 44 0 AX RAO00262170 DE 360 300 145 8 70 0 AX RAO00212600 DE 360 300 145 8 70 0 Specifications Voltage Mar ERN Reference mute value beste hae 0 4 AX RAO11500026 DE 2 6 11 50 0 75 AX RAO07600042 DE 4 2 7 60 1 5 AX RAO04100075 DE 7 5 4 10 2 2 AX RAO03000105 DE 10 5 3 00 3 7 AX RAO01830160 DE 16 0 1 83 5 5 AX RAO01150220 DE 22 0 1 15 7 5 AX RAO00950320 DE 32 0 0 95 200 V class 11 AX RAO00630430 DE 43 0 0 63 15 AX RAO00490640 DE 64 0 0 49 18 5 AX RAO00390800 DE 80 0 0 39 2 22 AX RA000330950 DE 95 0 0 33 T 30 AX RAO00251210 D
177. 40 Torque Regeneration Power running b042 b041 Reverse RV Forward FW Power running Regeneration b043 b044 e The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with 01 terminal switching selected in torque limit selection b040 They can be switched with torque limit switchings 1 and 2 allocated to multi function inputs Example When torque limit switching 1 41 and torque limit switching 2 42 are allocated to multi function input terminals 7 and 8 respectively Multi function input terminals 41 42 OFF OFF gt b041 ON OFF gt b042 OFF ON gt b043 ON ON b044 eTo use the torque limit function in a low speed range also use the overload limit function 4 58 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reverse Rotation Prevention Function control or 05 Sensor vector control is selected in control method A044 A244 e This function is enabled when 03 sensorless vector control 04 O Hz sensorless vector Because of the Inverter s control characteristics the Inverter may output a rotation signal in the direction opposite to that of the RUN command e g in a low speed range If the motor s reverse rotation may cause a problem e g damage to the machine driven by the motor set reverse rotation prevention selection b046 to enabled Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit V f characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector co
178. 400 00 Hz 067 125Ah LOW R W 0 01 125Bh Jump frequency width 3 A068 R W 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 125Ch miei R W Acceleration stop 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 frequency A069 ae Hz 125Dh LOW 125Eh Acceleration stop time A070 R W 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 s 00 OFF Disabled 125Fh PID selection A071 R W 01 ON Enabled 02 ON Reverse output enabled 1260h PID P gain A072 R W 0 2 to 5 0 0 1 1261h PID I gain A073 R W 0 0 to 3600 0 0 1 s 1262h PID D gain A074 R W 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 s 1263h PID scale A075 R W 0 01 to 99 99 0 01 00 Ol 01 0 1264h PID feedback selection A076 R W 02 Modbus RS485 communication 03 Pulse Pulse train frequency 10 Math Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value F Feedback value 1265h Reverse PID function A077 R W 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target value 1266h PID output limit function A078 R W 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 s 00 Disabled 1267h PID feedforward selection A079 R W G 03 O2 1268h Not used 00 Always ON 1269h AVR selection A081 R W 01 Always OFF 02 OFF during deceleration 4 190 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes ols No code tion 200 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 126Ah_ AVR voltage selection A082 R W 400
179. 411K 3G3RX B413K AX FIR3320 RE g a 5 Filter installation The connecting cable between filter and frequency inverter must be as short as possible and laid separate from other cables lines As user you must ensure that the HF impedance between frequency inverter filter and ground is a small as possible Make sure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible areas Remove paint and insulating material between the individual mounting points Use conductive contact grease as anticorrosive Anodized and yellow chromated surfaces e g cable standard section rail screws etc have a large HF impedance although sometimes could be confused with uncoated surfaces Single grounding point Ensure that the ground terminal PE of the filter is grounded to the same point or backplate like the ground terminal PE of the frequency inverter An HF ground connection via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the frequency inverter or solely via cable shield is not permitted as protective conductor connection The filter must be solidly and perma nently connected with the ground potential so as to avoid the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs The metallic backplate of the control cabinet accounts as a single connec tion point given the advice about coatings influence 2 24 Design 2 2 Wiring You can achieve highest filter installation quality by con
180. 43 A343 eIn A042 A242 A342 set a ratio based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection as 100 Output voltage 100 A042 A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 Base frequency Output frequency 100 lf you raise the set value of the manual torque boost be careful about motor overexcitation Otherwise the motor may burn out eIn manual torque boost frequency A043 A243 A343 set a ratio based on the base frequency as 100 Automatic Torque Boost e f the automatic torque boost is selected in the torque boost selection A041 A241 01 it operates to adjust the output frequency and voltage automatically depending on the load level In actual control the automatic torque boost is used along with the manual torque boost eTo select the automatic torque boost set motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 correctly according to your motor eTo avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR selection to Always ON A081 00 elf the automatic torque boost cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust each item as shown in the following table Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item Gradually increase the voltage setting of the manual torque boost A042 A242 Insufficient torque at low Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic A047 A247 speed torque boost Motor does not run atlow Gradually increase the voltage
181. 480v SosoH 3001w_ Standard e IGIRX A4370 S phase AC380 480V SO 60H 370kWw Standard lt A gt JGIRX A4450 3G3RX A4550 3G3RX A2006 3 phase AC200 240V sosh onw 3G3RX 42007 phase AC200 240V swan oraw s lt B gt i 15kW 22kW 5TRW O4kW O 7SAW 1 SkW A A B v A V IGIRX A4004 AC380 4807 50 60Hz IGIRN A4007 i phase AC380 480V 50 60Hz A B lt e gt E lt a gt lt e gt lt s gt sco re e ee Y ase ACISO 480V SW60Hz A Vv 3JG3IRX A4015 3p AC380 480V S5W 60Hz 3JIG3JRX A4022 ip ACI380 480V SO 60H z IGIRN AIOIT e ACI80 480V 5060H A A B lt p gt lt C gt v O 75AW 3 TEW IGIRX A4750 3 phase ACISO 480V SQ 60H IG3RX AI900 3 C3804807 5060H JG3RX A41 IK 3p ACJ80 450V SW60H 3 JGIRX A4IIK x Hz 3G3RX A2I037 phase AC200 240V S0 60H z 60 lt C gt lt C gt 3 JG3RX A2015 3G3RN 4A2022 3 pha i T p ACISO 4ROV S0 60Hz 132kW lt C gt App 50 xipueddy Index Index Numerics 0 Hz sensorless vector control n se 4 117 2 step acceleration deceleration cccccccceeeees 4 37 3 wire input FUNCTION 0 0 eee eee e eee eteeeeteeeteneeeeee 4 88 A acceleration stop acceleration time 2 acceleration deceleration pattern cceeeeee 4 38 acceleration deceleration time 4 8 ADD a siesta A a Been 4 41 AND EEE TEE E ETT 4 93 a E E E EE 4 95 allowabl
182. 5 Option 1 o3 No 4 S input B setting 06 Option 2 F 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency 00 ADD Addition A B z A143 Operator selection 01 SUB Subtraction A B 00 No A 02 MUL Multiplication A x B O Frequency addition 0 00 to 99 99 A145 amount 100 0 to 400 0 Oe Gee te 00 ADD Add A145 value to output 4 41 Frequency addition frequency A146 direction 01 SUB Subtract A145 value from output 99 Ne frequency c EL S curve ratio 1 o s aa during acceleration 9 10 30 19 ne i D F 2 arei Ea ce UO gia 50 10 No D during acceleration EL S tio 1 a is S curve ratio 3 T A152 during deceleration Pleo 19 Ne is 2 3 PF S aiea F acino rato E tiago 10 No lt during deceleration 2nd 8rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 31 3 9 Parameter List Parameter A Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page O setting operation 00 TRIP Alarm 01 0 Hz start Pe 02 f match Frequency matching start S b001 Retry selection 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency 00 No D matching deceleration stop 2 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching 4 42 restart 5 Pat Allowable momentary 2 b002 power interruption 0 3 to 25 0 1 0 No Ss 2 time S g b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 4 87 2 Momentary power
183. 5 95 REM03K5010 IE 10 REM19K0008 IE 8 22 0 2220 5 65 80 30 0 2300 6 80 2035090 TE 4 REM19K0006 IE 37 0 2370 6 60 45 0 2450 3 105 2070130 TE 2 8 2 x REM19K0006 IE 55 0 2550 3 85 0 55 4004 200 200 c REM00K1400 IE 400 REM00K1400 IE 400 1 1 4007 200 200 ke 100 T 1 5 4015 REMO00K1200 IE 200 190 REMO00K2200 IE 200 190 2 2 2 4022 REMO00K2200 IE 200 130 REMO00K5120 IE 120 200 S 4 0 4040 REM00K2120 IE 120 120 REMO0K6100 IE 100 140 70 Q 5 5 4055 Built in 140 REMO00K9070 IE 70 150 REM00K4075 IE 75 7 5 4075 100 REM01K9070 IE 70 110 35 11 0 4110 REMO0K6100 IE 100 50 REM02K1070 IE 70 75 A 15 0 4150 REM00K9070 IE 70 55 REM03K5035 IE 35 110 gt 24 e Q 18 5 4185 90 100 lt 3 REM03K5035 IE 35 REM19K0030 IE 30 m 22 0 4220 20 79 85 30 0 4300 4015045 TE 16 REM19K0020 IE 20 95 37 0 4370 125 4017068 TE 11 REM38K0012 IE 12 45 0 4450 100 55 0 4550 2 x REM19K0020 IE 10 100 4035090 TE 8 5 75 0 4750 3 x REM19K0030 IE 10 75 90 0 4900 4070130 TE 5 5 2 x REM38K0012 IE 6 105 110 0 411K 125 4090240 TE 3 2 3 x REM38K0012 IE 4 132 0 413K 105 1 Inverter specifications choose voltage capacity and model The content noted in the table assumes the case of combining one Inverter and one motor of the same capacity 2 Select the ED Use the ED that is equivalent to or lower than the value shown 7 19 7 3 Options 3 Table above just contain typical recommended values that could work correctly i
184. 5 Multi function output terminal _ 11 to 15 selection 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal gt C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection Related functions b092 d022 4 104 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Starting Contact Signal eWhile the Inverter is receiving the RUN command a starting contact signal is output The output is enabled regardless of the setting of RUN command source selection A002 elf inputs FW and RV are simultaneously turned on the Inverter stops Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal 11 to 15 selection E Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 41 FR starting contact signal 05 C026 Forward command Reverse command Starting contact signal FR Fin Overheat Warning e This function monitors the Inverter s internal fin temperature and outputs a signal when the temperature exceeds the fin overheat warning level C064 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal 11 to 15 selection 42 OHF fin overheat warning C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C064 Fin overheat warning O to 200 Set a temperature to output the 120 C level overheat warning signal 4 105 4 2 Function Mode Light Load Detection Signal This signal is output when ou
185. 517h Hoe R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter R2 Tae 0 001 to 65 535 o 1518h LOW R W 1519h roaz R W HIGH 0 01 Motor parameter L 0 01 to 655 35 151Ah igaz R W p LOW H023 151Bh HIGH R W Motor parameter IO z 0 01 to 655 35 0 01 A 023 151Ch LOW R W 151Dh vey R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 2 151Eh Hoe R W eis LOW 151Fh to Not used 1523h 1524h E R W Motor parameter R1 0 001 0 001 to 65 535 auto tuning data H030 oy Q 1525h LOW 1526h adh R W Motor parameter R2 HIGH 0 001 0 001 to 65 535 auto tuning data H031 ae Q 1527h LOW 1528h Nees R W Motor parameter L HIGH 0 01 0 01 to 655 35 auto tuning data H032 mH 1529h LOW R W 152Ah ace R W Motor parameter 10 0 01 to 655 35 0 01 A auto tuning data H033 BAN 152Bh LOW 152Ch en RW Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 gog auto tuning data H034 Ay kgm 152Dh LOW 152Eh to Not used 153Ch 153Dh PI proportional gain H050 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 153Eh Pl integral gain H051 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 4 210 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes ols No code tion 153Fh P proportional gain H052 R W 0 01 to 10 00 0 01 1540h to Not used 1546h 1547h Limit at 0 Hz H060 R W 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 ed
186. 6 00 Logic output signal 3 operator selection Log out 3 operator C150 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 Logic output signal 4 selection 1 Log out 4 operand A C151 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 No 4 102 Logic output signal 4 selection 2 Log out 4 operand B C152 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 4 operator selection Log out 4 operator C153 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 Logic output signal 5 selection 1 Log out 5 operand A C154 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 5 selection 2 Log out 5 operand B C155 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 5 operator selection Log out 5 operator C156 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 Logic output signal 6 selection 1 Log out 6 operand A C157 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 6 selection 2 Log out 6 operand B C158 Same as options for C021 to C026 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 Logic output signal 6 operator selection Log out 6 operator C159 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 No 4 102 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 35
187. 6 0000000000000040 JG Jogging 0000004000000000 SF7 Multi step speed setting bit 7 0000000000000080 DB External DC injection braking 0000008000000000 OLR Overload limit switching 0000000000000100 SET 2nd control 0000010000000000 TL Torque limit enabled 0000000000000200 2CH_ 2 step acceleration deceleration 0000020000000000 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 0000000000000400 7 0000040000000000 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 0000000000000800 FRS Free run stop 0000080000000000 PPI P PI switching 0000000000001000 EXT External trip 0000100000000000 BOK Brake confirmation 0000000000002000 USP USP function 0000200000000000 ORT Orientation 0000000000004000 CS Commercial switching 0000400000000000 LAC LAD cancel 0000000000008000 SFT Soft lock 0000800000000000 PCLR Position deviation clear 0000000000010000 AT Analog input switching 0001000000000000 STAT Pulse train position command permission 0000000000020000 SETS 3rd control 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 RS Reset 0004000000000000 ADD Frequency addition 0000000000080000 7 0008000000000000 F TM_ Forced terminal block 0000000000100000 STA _ 3 wire start 0010000000000000 ATR Torque command input permission 0000000000200000 STP _ 3 wire stop 0020000000000000 KHC Integrated power clear 0000000000400000 F R _ 3 wire forward reverse 0040000000000000 SON Servo ON 0000000000800000 PID PID enabled disabled 00
188. 6 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 14 YA2 Drive Programming 141Eh Digital current monitor reference value C030 R W 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Current value at the digital current monitor output 1440 Hz 0 1 A 141Fh Multi function output terminal 11 contact selection C031 R W 1420h Multi function output terminal 12 contact selection C032 R W 1421h Multi function output terminal 13 contact selection C033 R W 1422h Multi function output terminal 14 contact selection C034 R W 1423h Multi function output terminal 15 contact selection C035 R W 00 NO 01 NC 4 204 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes oly No code tion Relay output AL2 AL1 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 1424h contact selection cogs 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 E 1425h Not used 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during iaitioad gianakoulsut acceleration deceleration constant 1426h zi de g P C038 R W speed 01 Const Enabled only during constant speed A 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 1427h Light load detection level C039 R W 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated
189. 6 8 10 Pole selection H205 2505h HIGH R W 2nd speed response E 0 001 to 80 000 0 001 2506h LOW R W asap eaten H206 Rw 0 to 255 1 parameter 2508h to Not used 2514h H220 2515h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter R1 5 0 001 to 65 535 0 001 Q 220 2516h LOW R W H221 2517h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter R2 TT 0 001 to 65 535 0 001 Q 2518h LOW R W H222 2519h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter L 5 0 01 to 655 35 0 01 mH 222 251Ah LOW R W H223 251Bh HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter IO 7 0 01 to 655 35 0 01 A 223 251Ch LOW R W 251Dh 122 R W HIGH 0 001 2nd motor parameter J ea 0 001 to 9999 000 kgm 251Eh LOW R W 4 218 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 219 Regiei Function name Funcuou R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 251Fh to Not used 2523h 2524h ice R W ALO Or PArAMEIGE Fir 0 001 to 65 535 0 001 2 auto tuning data H230 ae 2525h LOW 2526h ice R W and motor parameter me 0 001 to 65 535 0 001 Q auto tuning data H231 2527h LOW R W 2528h cn R W 2nd motor patamoter le 0 01 to 655 35 0 01 mH auto tuning data H232 2529h LOW R W 252Ah E rw end motor parameterio 0 01 to 655 35 0 01 A auto tuning data H233 RAN 252Bh LOW 252Ch en RW 2nd motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 00
190. 67 Jump frequency 3 0 00 4 30 vagga UP eduency 0 50 g width 3 Q Ss s A069 ee stop 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz requency Acceleration stop A070 time 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 No s 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 28 EZ uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 OFF Disabled A071 PID selection 01 ON Enabled 00 No 02 ON Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 Yes A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 Yes s A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 Yes s _ A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 No Time E 00 Ol iai l5 01 0 7 AO A076 RID Teedback 02 Modbus R8485 communication 00 No a selection 03 Pulse Pulse train frequency 10 Math Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value 5 Feedback value A077 Reverse PID function 04 ON Deviation Feedback value Target 00 Ne _ value A078 F ID output limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No function 00 Disabled PID feedforward 01 0 8 A079 selection 02 Ol o9 DO e 03 O2 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 No 5 02 OFF during deceleration 4 35 A082 AVR voltage 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 No Vv selec
191. 80000000000000 FOC Preliminary excitation 0000000001000000 PIDC PID integral reset 0100000000000000 MI1 Drive Programming input 1 0000000002000000 7 0200000000000000 MI2 Drive Programming input 2 0000000004000000 CAS Control gain switching 0400000000000000 MI3 Drive Programming input 3 0000000008000000 UP UP DWN function accelerated 0800000000000000 MI4 Drive Programming input 4 0000000010000000 DWN UP DWN function decelerated 1000000000000000 MI5 Drive Programming input 5 0000000020000000 UDC UP DWN function data clear 2000000000000000 MI6 Drive Programming input 6 0000000040000000 7 4000000000000000 MI7 Drive Programming input 7 0000000080000000 OPE Forced operator 8000000000000000 MI8 Drive Programming input 8 4 151 4 4 Communication Function Data hexadecimal and description of multi function terminals corresponding to 12 commands For details refer to Multi function Input Terminal Function Data hex Description Data hex Description 0000000000000001 0000000100000000 0000000000000002 AHD Analog command held 0000000200000000 0000000000000004 CP1 Position command selection 1 0000000400000000 0000000000000008 CP2 Position command selection 2 0000000800000000 0000000000000010 CP3 Position command selection 3 0000001000000000 0000000000
192. 9 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes switching 4 89 Ho72 For P proportional 9 99 to 10 00 1 00 Yes gain switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 100 Yes ms 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 52 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default oe Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation Operation selection 00 Trip Eon at option 1 error 01 RUN Continues operation 90 No aan Operation selection 00 Trip pone at option 2 error 01 RUN Continues operation 9 Ne o 4 124 P011 Encoder pulses 128 to 65535 1024 No Pulse 4 133 4 134 00 ASR speed control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode P012 an mode 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 No ie 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position control mode Pulse train mode pe Mode i P013 sSl cion 01 Mode 2 00 No 4 127 02 Mode 3 po14 Orientation stop 0 to 4095 0 No position P015 Orientation speed Starting frequency to Max frequency upper 5 00 No Hz 4 134 setting limit 120 0 Orientation direction 00 FWD Forward side ROIS setting 01 REV Reverse side 00 Ne E P017 Position ready range 0 to 10000 5 No Pulse 4 127 setting 4 134 op Cc iti S porg Position ready delay 4 49 to 9 99 0 00 No gos eee a time set
193. A except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 2 OSADE 1497h mes a C147 RW 01 OR SRS 02 XOR Logic output signal 3 Same as C021 to C026 _ 1498h selection 1 cis RAN except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 3 Same as C021 to C026 _ 1493h selection 2 C149 RAN except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 3 Po Ano 149Ah o oe areas C150 RW 01 0R p 02 XOR Logic output signal 4 Same as C021 to C026 pe 1498h selection 1 pisi RW except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 4 Same as C021 to C026 _ 149Ch selection 2 Cine RAN except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 4 OND 149Dh o ere sea C153 RW 01 0R p 02 XOR Logic output signal 5 Same as C021 to C026 A MEN selection 1 6154 RAN except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 5 Same as C021 to C026 o Leh selection 2 Glee RW except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 5 a 14A0h o ee sae tt C156 RW 01 0R P 02 XOR 4 208 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funeton R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes oly No code tion Logic output signal 6 Same as C021 to C026 _ an selection 1 oi RW except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 6 Same as C021 to C026 _ 14A2h selection 2 Glee R except LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 6 OO AND 14A3h ame cara C159 RW 01 0R a 02 XOR 14A4h ree ae r SRON A C160 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 14a5h but terminal response C161 R W 0 t
194. A076 eWhen running the Inverter with V f characteristics selection A044 set to 00 VC you can check the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008 If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated or if negative frequency is detected when the reverse command is activated the rotation direction is judged as being normal Related functions A044 A001 A076 A141 A142 4 123 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used V2 Control Mode Selection Select a control method in V2 control mode selection P012 When 00 ASR is selected in P012 speed control mode is enabled Select a frequency reference in frequency reference selection A001 When 01 APR is selected in P012 the Inverter enables position control by generating frequency reference based on the position command pulse input from the pulse train position command input terminal and on the position feedback detected by the encoder Select any of the three pulse train position command input modes in pulse train mode selection P013 To perform pulse train position control allocate 48 STAT to any of the multi function input termi nals While the STAT terminal is tuned on pulse train position command input is accepted Position deviation can be cleared through external input Allocate 47 PCLR to any of the multi function input terminals Tuning on and then off the PCLR terminal can clear position deviation data
195. A097 Acceleration pattern 00 Line 01 No T selection 01 S curve 02 U curve 4 38 selection 04 EL S curve 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 30 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default aus No Function name Monitor or data range eatin during Unit Page 9 operation A101 Ol start frequency REIN 0 00 No Hz D 00 to A102 Ol end frequency 0 00 No Hz T A103 Ol start ratio 0 to Ol end ratio 20 No AAA a A104 Ol end ratio Ol start ratio to 100 100 No oO fe 7 A105 Ol start selection A R FQ Use Ol start frequency A101 00 No E A111 O2 start frequency 0 00 No Hz g 400 00 to 400 00 g A112 O2 end frequency 0 00 No Hz ic oO A113 O2 start ratio 100 to O2 end ratio 100 No a 3 4 15 gt S m o aa A114 O2 end ratio O2 start ratio to 100 100 No L x if g A131 Acceleration curve 02 No TEN D parameter Q 01 small curve to 10 large curve 4 38 a132 Deceleration curve 02 No o z parameter 00 Operator Digital Operator F001 A141 Operation frequency 01 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 02 No an input A setting Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 O Input O 03 OI Input Ol o tion f 04 Modbus RS485 communication g A142 Peren equency 0
196. AL ON iecsizcescevestecstecuccecccceaves E 3 17 Parameter Transition cccccccsstseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 ParamMetenbiStireccccrcereere ete cee treo e arr eee cere re ae 3 21 Operation N DANGER Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated CAUTION Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn A A A A A a gt Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circ
197. Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 6 ueu zuleN pue UOI DedsuU Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Megger test For a megger test of the external circuit be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the Inverter so as not to apply the test voltage to the Inverter Use a high resistance tester for a power distribution test of the control circuit Do not use a megger or buzzer Conduct an Inverter megger test only to the main circuit not to the control circuit Use a 500 V DC megger for a megger test For a megger test of the Inverter main circuit remove the short circuit bar used for switching the Inverter built in filter function and then short circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W TS PD 1 P N RB Ro and To with the wires as shown below After the megger test remove the short circuit wires from terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P PD 1 N RB Ro and To and reconnect the short circuit bar for switching the Inverter built in filter function Note that the RB terminal is provided only for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower capa
198. BRAN 2nd frequency upper limit 2252h LOW 2253h to Not used 226Eh A292 226Fh HIGH R W 2nd acceleration time 2 rR 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 292 2270h LOW R W A293 2271h HIGH R W 2nd deceleration time 2 Fora 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 2272h LOW R W 00 2CH Terminal Switched via 2nd 2 step acceleration IOUS AO IDLE OY 2273h Pi E NT A294 R W 01 Preset FQ Switched by setting es 02 FWD REV Enabled only when switching forward reverse 2274h i ICR R W nee acceleration 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz 295 2275h Low R W 2276h l face R W PE deceleration 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz 2277h LOW R W 4 217 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name een R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2278h to Not used 230Bh 230Ch 2nd electronic thermal b212 R W 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated 0 1 A level current 00 Reduced TRQ Reduced torque 2nd electronic thermal characteristics 230Dh POE A b213 R W 01 Const TRQ Constant torque characteristics selection ae characteristics 02 Free set Free setting 230Eh to Not used 2501h 00 Standard motor parameter 2502h 2nd motor parameter H202 R W oi Auto tuning parameter selection 02 Auto tuning parameter online auto tuning enabled agoan ee ey H203 R W 0 20 to 160 0 0 01 kW selection asgari Wore pole number H204 R W 2 4
199. C voltage input the Input impedance 10 kQ input frequency reaches the maximum at 10 V Allowable input voltage Voltage Set at A014 if the maximum frequency range needs to be achieved at lower than 10 V 0 3 to 12 V DC 2 02 Auxiliary frequency With a O to 10 V DC voltage input the O2 Input impedance 10 kQ S reference input signal is added to the frequency reference Allowable input voltage 8 Voltage signal of the O or Ol terminal By changing range D 2 the setting the frequency reference canbe 0to 12VDC e A wl S input even with the O2 terminal lt gt independently S Ol Frequency reference With a 4 to 20 mA DC current input the Input impedance 100 Q it input maximum frequency is set at 20 mA The OI Allowable max current Current signal is only active when the AT terminalis 24 mA ON Allocate the AT function to the multi function input terminal L Frequency reference Common terminal for the frequency setting common signals O O2 and Ol and the analog output terminals AM and AMI Do not connect this terminal to the ground Continued to the next page 2 6 Design 2 2 Wiring Terminal symbol Terminal name Description Specifications Analog Monitor output AM Multi function analog output Voltage This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque wi
200. CT 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 applicable kW motor 4P atVT 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 185 22 at CT 1 0 1 7 2 5 3 6 5 7 8 3 11 0 15 9 22 1 26 3 200 V Rated output at VT 1 3 2 1 3 2 4 1 6 7 10 4 15 2 20 0 26 3 29 4 capacity kVA atcT 12 20 31 43 68 99 133 19 1 26 6 314 5 240 V at VT 1 5 2 6 3 9 5 0 8 1 12 4 18 2 24 1 31 5 35 3 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 200 to 240 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage atCT 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 5 16 5 24 32 46 64 76 Rated output current A atVT 3 7 6 3 9 4 12 19 6 30 44 58 73 85 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 6 6 14 14 Regenerative braking Built in braking resistor circuit discharge resistor separately mounted Braking Minimum connection i 50 50 35 35 35 16 10 10 7 5 7 5 resistance Q 7 1 7 1 Standard Specification List Class 3 phase 200 V Model name 3G3RX A2220 A2300 A2370 A2450 A2550 Max applicable ae at CT 22 30 37 45 55 motor 4P at VT 30 37 45 55 75 at CT 32 9 41 9 502 63 0 76 2 200 V Aatedicutput at VT 39 1 49 5 592 727 93 5 capacity kVA at CT 39 4 50 2 60 2 75 6 91 4 240 V at VT 46 9 59 4 71 0 87 2 1122 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5
201. Cat No 1560 E2 04 Customised to your machine Model 3G3RX 200 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 55 kW 400 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 132 kW USER S MANUAL DS SEAT SSA ST SAE SRN RAR Sta Se orate Introduction Introduction Thank you for choosing the general purpose Inverter RX Series This User s Manual hereinafter called this manual describes the parameter setting methods required for installation wiring and operation of the RX model as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product After reading this manual keep it handy for future reference This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations between them You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with the product Intended readers This manual is intended for Those with knowledge of the workings of electricity qualified electric engineers or the equivalent and also in charge of e Introducing the control equipment e Designing the control system e Installing and or connecting the control equipment e Field management as Read and Understand this Manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations o
202. Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting 5 1 5 2 Warning PUNON Oaea eee aerea ne Eeee Esere ae Eene aaeeea aat enS 5 10 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Error Code List Name Description Error Code Points to check and remedy ky If the motor is Is there any rapid load fluctuation restrained or rapidly Eliminate load fluctuation accelerated or Constant 01 0 Is there any output short circuit decelerated a large speed Check the output wires currentflows through Is there any ground fault the Inverter which Check the output wires and motor results ina n malfunction The Deceleration E02 0 fe there any rapia deceleration jia Increase the deceleration time 4 37 current exceeding the specified level Is there any rapid acceleration shuts off the output Increase the acceleration time Overcurrent and an error Acceleration E03 0 Has the motor shaft been locked 4 8 trip appears Check the motor and wires 4 37 This protection Is the torque boost too high function detects an Lower the torque boost overcurrent through the AC CT current detector The protection circuit Is the DC injection braking too high is activated at Others 04 0 Lower the injection breaking 4 24 approximately 220 Is there any error on CT of the Inverter rated Replace o
203. Ciegas N Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page o setting operation 00 O Terminal O Torque reference 01 Ol Terminal Ol P033 input selection a 92 Termi rial Q2 00 No TRO cmd source 03 OPE Digital Operator 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 Torque reference 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 4 126 P034 setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Yes TRQ cmd setting Polarity selection at torque reference via 00 Sign Signed Eee 02 01 Direction Depends on the RUN direction 99 No E 02 TRQ polarity 00 OFF None 01 OPE Digital Operator poge Torque bias mode 02 O2 Terminal 02 00 No z TRQ bias mode 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 4 126 Torque bias value 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P 4 127 P037 TRQ bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW O Sa a Torque bias polarity 00 Sign Signed ROSE selection 01 Direction Depends on the RUN direction 90 No gt TRQ bias polarity p Speed limit value in 2 torque control P039 forward 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 6 TRQ SpeedLmt FW 4 126 Speed limit value in torque control P040 reverse 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz TRQ SpeedLmt RV DeviceNet comm poag Watch dog timer 0 00 to 99 99 100 No s i oa DeviceNet comm WDT i 00 Trip Operation setting al 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop P045 Ae error 02 Ignore 00 No 2 oe etwork com 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 0 Basic speed I O 1 E
204. Digital Operator Setting via a amp keys External signal 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 V DC Input impedance 10 KQ 4 to 20 mA Input impedance 100 Q External port Setting through RS485 communication Standard Digital Operator RUN STOP Forward reverse switched via the parameter settings External signal Forward Stop Reverse Stop available at the time of multi functional input terminal allocation 3 wire input available at the time of control circuit terminal block allocation External port Input Forward or reverse operation Stop Frequency settings Setting through RS485 communication 7 4 suolediineds Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List Item Specifications Input Multi function input 8 terminals NO NC switchable sink source logic switchable Terminal function 8 functions can be selected from among 61 Reverse RV Multi step speed setting binary 1 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 2 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 3 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 4 CF4 Jogging JG DC injection braking DB 2nd control SET 2 step acceleration deceleration 2CH Free run stop FRS External trip EXT USP function USP Commercial switching CS Soft lock SFT Analog input switching AT 3rd control SET3 Reset RS 3 wire start STA 3 wire stop STP 3 wire forward reverse F R PID enable
205. Do not change agon TE queney conversion b086 RW 0 1 to 99 9 0 1 coefficient 00 ON Enabled 5 01 OFF Disabled Tepe i STOP Key selection a R W 02 Only RESET Disabled only during stop 00 0 Hz start i F 01 f match Frequency matching start 135Bh Free run stop selection b088 R W 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 00 OFF Disabled 1220h reduction 5089 RAN 01 ON Enabled _ 1350h eee rate of regenerative ii y ggg RW 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 braking function 00 Decel Stop Deceleration gt Stop 135Eh Stop selection b091 R W 01 Free RUN Free run stop 00 Alws ON Always ON 135Fh Cooling fan control b092 R W 01 ON in RUN ON during RUN 1360h Not used 1361h Not used 4 198 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funeton R W Monitor and setting parameters Be oly No code tion 00 OFF Disabled Regenerative braking 01 RUN ON Enabled Disabled during 1362h function operation b095 R W stop selection 02 Alws ON Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 1363h function ON level b096 RAN 660 to 760 1M 1364h Not used 00 Disabled 1365h Thermistor selection b098 R W 01 PTC enabled 02 NTC enabled 1366h Thermistor error level b099
206. E 121 0 0 25 37 AX RAO00191450 DE 145 0 0 19 3 45 AX RAO00161820 DE 182 0 0 16 gt 55 AX RAO00132200 DE 220 0 0 13 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAO16300038 DE 3 8 16 30 2 2 AX RAO11800053 DE 5 3 11 80 4 0 AX RAO07300080 DE 8 0 7 30 5 5 AX RAO04600110 DE 11 0 4 60 7 5 AX RAO03600160 DE 16 0 3 60 11 AX RAO02500220 DE 22 0 2 50 15 0 AX RAO02000320 DE 32 0 2 00 18 5 AX RAO01650400 DE 40 0 1 65 400 V clas 22 AX RAO01300480 DE 48 0 1 30 30 AX RAO01030580 DE 58 0 1 03 37 AX RAO00800750 DE 75 0 0 80 45 AX RAO00680900 DE 90 0 0 68 55 AX RAO00531 100 DE 110 0 0 53 75 AX RAO00401490 DE 149 0 0 40 90 AX RAO00331760 DE 176 0 0 33 110 AX RAO00262170 DE 217 0 0 26 132 AX RAO00212600 DE 260 0 0 21 7 25 7 3 Options Input AC Reactor AX RAINOOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing Dimensions Weight Voltage Reference Kg A B1 B2 C1 C2 D E F AX RAI02800100 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAI00880200 DE AX RAI00350335 DE 190 5 5 200V AX RAI00180670 DE 85 55 180 140 AX RAI00091000 DE 205 6 6 5 AX RAI00071550 DE 105 205 85 11 7 AX RAI00042300 DE 240 130 210 7 200 75 16 0 AX RAI07700050 DE 70 52 1 78 AX RAI03500100 DE 120 120 80 5 5 2 35 80 62 AX RAI01300170 DE 2 5 AX RAI00740335 DE 190 5 5 E 85 55 400V AX RAI00360500 DE 180 140 6 5 205 AX RAI00290780 DE 105 85 11 7 6 AX RAI00191150 DE 16 0 110 275 75 AX RAI00111850 DE 240 200 16 0
207. Example To send a forward command to station 01 BCC CR ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 30 31 33 30 0D 1 STX 01 00 1 e Response frame Normal response Refer to page 4 161 Error response Refer to page 4 161 lt Command 01 gt Sets frequency reference To use this command set A001 to 03 RS485 Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 f 01 to 32 and FF Communication Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 01 Data Transmission data Decimal ASCII 6 bytes k code Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D To set 5 Hz for station 01 STX 01 01 000500 BCC CR ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D 4 4 Communication Function Note 1 Data is a value obtained by mulplying the set value by 100 Example 5 Hz gt 500 000500 ASCII conversion 30 30 30 35 30 30 Note 2 To use the data as PID control feedback data set 1 in the MSB of the data Example 5 500 100500 ASCII conversion 31 30 30 35 30 30 gt e Response frame Normal response Refer to page 4 161 Error response Refer to page 4 161 lt Command 0
208. HAPR is do29 Position command selected _ o monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is d030 Current position selected _ 7 monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected 45 ORT orientation 54 SON servo ON 66 CP1 position command selection 1 67 CP2 position command selection 2 Multi function inputs 68 CP3 position command selection 3 Coote Cage 1 to 8 selection 69 ORL zero return limit signal 70 ORG zero return startup signal 71 FOT forward driving stop 72 ROT reverse driving stop 73 SPD speed position switching C102 Reset selection 03 Trip RESET Trip reset only 00 4 137 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used Absolute Position Control Operation RUN command on Output frequency Hz Speed PAE arcane serene command When the position command level is low the motor decelerates and its position is determined before the output frequency reaches the speed Position ready range setting P017 command level Position POK signal Position ready delay time setting P018 In the absolute position control mode the Inverter moves to the target position according to the fol lowing parameter settings and is then set in the position servo lock status e Position command e Speed command frequency reference e Acceleration Deceleration time The servo lock status is retained until the R
209. Hz are exceeded the Inverter may be damaged and or the service life may be shortened 4 69 4 2 Function Mode Parameter Initialization eYou can initialize the rewritten set values and reset to the factory default eYou can clear trip data eYou cannot clear the P100 to P131 set values RUN time or power ON time Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 no Clears the trip monitor 01 Trip data Initializes data 02 Parameters Clears the trip monitor and initializes data b084 Initialization selection 03 Trip Param Clears the trip monitor 00 and parameters 04 Trp Prm EzSQ Clears the trip monitor parameters and Drive program b085 Initialization parameter OF 01 selection Do not change pian 00 No action b180 Initialize trigger 01 Initialize 00 STOP Key Selection eWhen control circuit terminal block is selected for the RUN command you can set whether the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator is used to activate the STOP command and trip reset operation This setting is enabled when any item other than 02 Digital Operator is selected in RUN command selection A002 Refer to RUN Command Selection page 4 11 If 02 Digital Operator is selected in A002 the STOP command and trip reset operation are enabled regardless of this setting Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 ON Enabled f 01 OFF Disabled pos S
210. I code Rotation direction 8 bytes 0 Stop 1 Forward 2 Reverse PID feedback monitor x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Multi function input o o 8 bytes See t monitor ae output G _ 8 bytes See 2 MSB Frequency SAR RRN x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code monitor LSB Output torque x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code T Output voltage monitor V x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Power monitor kW x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 00000000 is stored 8 bytes Preliminary data storage area RUN time monitor h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code ON time monitor h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 1 Multi function input terminal monitor Item Data 1 terminal 00000001 2 terminal 00000002 3 terminal 00000004 4 terminal 00000008 5 terminal 00000010 6 terminal 00000020 7 terminal 00000040 8 terminal 00000080 FW terminal 00000100 2 Multi function output terminal monitor Item 11 terminal 00000001 12 terminal 00000002 13 terminal 00000004 14 terminal 00000008 15 terminal 00000010 Relay terminal 00000020 4 154 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 04 gt Reads the Inverter status Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 b
211. In the following cases the internal converter module may be damaged Use caution to avoid them Imbalance of power supply voltage is 3 or more Power supply capacity is ten times or more than the Inverter capacity and also 500 kVA or more Rapid change in power supply voltage Example When several Inverters are connected with a short bus Ea When the phase advance capacitor is turned on off e Do not turn power on off more than once every 3 minutes Doing so may damage the Inverter Mlnverter Output Terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 For connection of the output terminal use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter Otherwise the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop Particularly during low frequency output a voltage drop occurs with the cable resulting in motor torque reduction Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber These devices cause the Inverter to trip or may cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber If the cable length exceeds 20 m particularly with 400 V class a surge voltage may be generated at the motor terminal due to stray capacitance or inductance of the cable causing the motor to burn out To connect several motors provide a thermal relay for each The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1 1 times of the motor rated current The relay may trip easily depending on the cable length In this case connect an AC reactor to the Inverter output u s q
212. LL oo A A 5 EngEd Fial on ade lt y w Nv ATI a5 Me win w iZ owe pale A G Endid Fonol on och lt Y 195 a me Out A on oar ode yvy aig ws ws A C Unal on adf amp y m IIi 3 20 3 9 Parameter List 3 9 Parameter List Monitor Mode d e The default setting displays d001 at power on To select the optional display change the setting in b038 ES Changes acnee Function name Monitor or data range Poem during Unit Page No setting operation 5 door Output frequency 9 Q9 to 400 00 Yes Hz 44 monitor doo2 OVtput current 0 0 to 9999 0 A 4 1 cob monitor 6 FWD F d ae Forwar doog Rotation direction STOP stop 4 REV Reverse doo4 PID feedback value 0 00 to 999000 00 4 1 monitor Enabled when the PID function is selected MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL Example k r FW Multi function input terminals 7 2 1 ON d005 esc input ia ee i Multi function input terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF 4 2 monitor HLHI LLLHH i FETT 2 d006 Output Multi function output terminals 12 11 ON doo Multi function pescess Relay output terminal AL2 Multi function 4 2 output monitor LLLLH H output terminals 15 14 13 OFF I AL215141312 TI l C001 000E o J Output frequency 9 99 to 39960 00 d007 monitor Yes 4 2 Output frequency x Conversion factor of b086 after
213. Make sure that the N D setting is within the range of 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Motor gear ratio numerator D Motor gear ratio denominator lt Example gt Encoder Gear Load 1024 pulses eWhen the motor to encoder rpm ratio is 1 10 set the following data Number of encoder pulses P01 1 1024 Motor gear ratio numerator P028 10 Motor gear ratio denominator P029 100 In this case the orientation stop position is defined as 4096 divisions of the encoder s one rotation Note that the concept of the stop position is inverted from the description in Orientation stop position conceptual drawing page 4 135 Position Bias Function Set this function to apply position command bias in the pulse train position control mode The set number of pulses is added to a change value at 2 ms internals This is used for adjusting the phase of synchronization points during synchronous operation Set an addition value in position bias amount P024 A positive value adds the value in the forward direction Related functions P024 4 133 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Speed Bias Function This function applies speed command bias in the pulse train position control mode Set a bias value in frequency addition amount A145 and select a sign in frequency addition direc tion A146 Allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function inputs While the ADD terminal is turned on the bias value is added
214. Mode The communication test mode allows you to check the RS485 communication line hardware 4 147 Communication Test Mode Procedure 1 Before conducting a loop back test disconnect the cable from TM2 on the control terminal block board 2 Set the following parameter via the Digital Operator Set C071 communication speed selection to 02 loop back test 3 Turn off the Inverter and turn it on again The check will start 4 After the check is complete the Digital Operator displays the following code OK LoopBack OK NG LoopBack NG 5 Press the RESET button on the Digital Operator or on the copy unit to show the basic setting screen Reset the parameter that you changed in step 2 to a desired setting 4 4 Communication Function ASCII Method Communication Procedure The following shows the communication procedure between the Inverter and external controller External controller Inverter Wait time Set via the Digital Operator 1 Indicates a frame sent from the external controller to the Inverter 2 Indicates a frame sent back from the Inverter to the external controller Frame 2 is response output from the Inverter after reception of frame 1 It is not an active output Below is each frame format command Command List Command Description Communication with all stations Note 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB Inputs forwa
215. N Acceleration Deceleration does not occur if the UP and DWN terminals turn on simultaneously frequency 4 90 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Forced Operator Function e This function forcibly enables operation via the Digital Operator by turning on off the multi function terminal if the frequency reference RUN command sources are not set to the Digital Operator Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Prioritizes the command from the Digital Operator A020 31 OPE Forced operator A220 set values over the A001 and A002 settings OFF Operates according to the A001 and A002 settings Available input terminals C001 to C008 Related codes A001 A002 4 91 elf the Forced Operator function is selected in the multi function input selection the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the Digital Operator elf you switch on off this function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation turn off the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again 4 2 Function Mode P PI Switching Function e This function allows you to switch the control compensation method f
216. N command is turned on during DC injection braking returns to normal operation ignoring the set time in A055 Example 5 b Example 6 b a Edge operation b Level operation i During startup example 4 a ii During startup example 4 b FW a w o oo o Output frequency Output frequency A057 A057 A058 A058 sr n gt 4 26 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode a Edge operation b Level operation ii During stop example 5 a L Tm FW Free running Te A053 A055 gt lt Output frequency A052 ii During stop example 5 b FW Free running Output frequency l A053 a0s2 2 e A055 iii During stop example 6 a FW M Output frequency A055 A052 lt 2 iii During stop example 6 b FW Output frequency A055 A052 lt gt 4 27 4 2 Function Mode Winternal DC Injection Braking Operates Only at the Set Frequency A051 02 DC injection braking can be applied when the output frequency becomes lower than the DC injection braking frequency A052 e Neither 2 external nor 3 internal DC injection braking is available while this function is selected Operates only when the RUN command is turned on DC injection braking starts when both the reference and current frequencies become lower than A052 Example 7 a When the reference frequency exceeds the A052 set value by 2 Hz or more DC injection
217. NS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Windications and Meanings of Safety Information In this user s manual the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the safe use of the RX Inverter The information provided here is vital to safety Strictly observe the precautions provided M Meanings of Signal Words Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided DA N G E R is likely to result in serious injury or may result in death Additionally there may be severe property damage Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided l AU TI O N may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage E Alert Symbols in this Document N DANGER Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an el
218. OWN function 4 90 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear 31 OPE Forced operator Forced operator function 4 91 32 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 1 33 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 2 34 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 3 35 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 4 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 pe 36 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 5 37 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit 6 38 SF7 Multi step speed setting bit 7 39 OLR Overload limit switching Overload limit 4 49 40 TL Torque limit enabled 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 Torque limit function 4 57 42 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 43 PPI P PI switching P PI switching function 4 92 44 BOK Brake confirmation Brake control function 4 76 45 ORT Orientation Orientation function 4 134 46 LAC LAD cancel LAD cancel function 4 9 47 PCLR Position deviation clear 48 STAT Pulse train position command input V2 control mode selection 4 124 permission 50 ADD Frequency addition Set frequency addition function 4 41 51 F TM Forced terminal block Forced terminal function 4 93 52 ATR Torque command input permission Torque control 4 126 53 KHC Integrated power clear Integrated power 4 4 54 SON Servo ON Servo ON function 4 143 4 80 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode ae ae Data Function name Reference item Page 55 FOC Preliminary
219. P2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG drive program start NO no allocation an 01 12 18 02 03 06 08 no 1 When the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON C001 and C003 are forced to change to 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively You cannot intentionally set 64 If SW1 is turned on and then off C003 is set to no no allocation 4 82 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode The functions switchable via the SET SETS3 terminal are F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 A003 A203 A303 A004 A204 A304 A020 A220 A320 A041 A241 A042 A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 A044 A244 A344 A046 A246 A047 A247 A061 A261 A062 A262 A092 A292 A392 A093 A293 A393 A094 A294 A095 A295 A096 A296 b012 b212 b312 b013 b213 b313 H002 H202 H003 H203 H004 H204 H005 H205 H006 H206 H306 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H030 H230 H031 H231 H032 H232 H033 H233 H034 H234 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 HO60 H260 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1s
220. PERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Read and Understand this Manual Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIO
221. R and XOR Output signal 1 l l Output signal 2 l l LOGx AND l LOGx OR l l l LOGx XOR l l l l e The setting parameters vary depending on the logic operation output selected Refer to the following table to set the necessary parameters Selected signal De Mee 33 Logic operation output 1 LOG1 C142 C143 C144 34 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 C145 C146 C147 35 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 C148 C149 C150 36 Logic operation output 4 LOG4 C151 C152 C153 37 Logic operation output 5 LOG5 C154 C155 C156 38 Logic operation output 6 LOG6 C157 C158 C159 Example To output a logic output 1 LOG1 signal through AND operation of RUN signal 00 RUN and over set frequency arrival signal 02 FA2 to multi function output 2 e Multi function input 2 selection C002 33 LOG1 eLogic output signal 1 selection 1 C142 00 RUN eLogic output signal 1 selection 2 C143 02 FA2 eLogic output signal 1 operator selection C144 00 AND Capacitor Life Warning Signal e This function determines estimated service life of the capacitor on the PCB based on the Inverter s internal temperature and ON time eLife assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal elf this function is activated it is recommended that the main circuit board and logic board be replaced Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function
222. R W 0 to 9999 1 Q 1367h Free V f frequency 1 b100 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1368h Free V f voltage 1 b101 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 1369h Free V f frequency 2 b102 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 3 1 Hz 136Ah_ Free V f voltage 2 b103 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 136Bh_ Free V f frequency 3 b104 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 4 1 Hz 136Ch_ Free V f voltage 3 b105 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 136Dh Free V f frequency 4 b106 R W Oto Free V f frequency 5 1 Hz 136Eh Free V f voltage 4 b107 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 136Fh Free V f frequency 5 b108 R W Oto Free V f frequency 6 1 Hz 1370h Free V f voltage 5 b109 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 1371h Free V f frequency 6 b110 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 7 1 Hz 1372h Free V f voltage 6 b111 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 1373h Free V f frequency 7 b112 R W 0 to 400 1 Hz 1374h Free V f voltage 7 b113 R W 0 0 to 800 0 0 1 V 1375h to Not used 137Ah 00 OFF Disabled 137Bh_ Brake control selection b120 R W 01 ON Enabled 137Ch Brake wait time for release b121 R W 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s 137phi Brake wait time for b122 R w 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s acceleration 137Eh_ Brake wait time for b123 RW 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s stopping ZEB Brake wait time for b124 R w 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s confirmation 1380h Brake release frequency b125 R W 0 00 to 400 00 i 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 1381h Brake release current b126 R W 0 0 to 1 80 x Ra
223. RB No conduction 6 8 soueUD UIe Y pue UOI DedsuU Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Measurement Methods of I O Voltage Current and Electric Power Below is a general measurement device for input output voltages current and electric power Power supply ra D 2 Z D gt asec Measurement point Measurement device Note Measurement value reference Power Peer supply Between R S S T and T Moving iron voltmeter All 200 V class 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz voltage R m effective 400 V class 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz BA 9 Er Es Er F Rectifier voltmeter values Power All When the input current is not supply Current R S T S gt Moving iron ammeter effective balanced current Ir Is It IIN values lin IR Is It 3 ae Between RS eclvend Electrodynamic al ower T R an effective Three wattmeter method P Wit Wiz Wi values Win Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage Input Ein power supply current lin and input electric power Win power factor Pfin L WIN o PAIN Ey n 100 Effective eatin Between U V V W W U seethe a nae value of OUT ectifier voltmeter E Eu Ev Ew Rectifi Output All current C rrentU V W gt Moving iron ammeter effective Iu Iv Iw lout values Output Between U V V W Electrodynamic aj Two wattmeter method power effective Wo1 Wo2 wattmeter
224. RUNGUONS tiecsse te ostoecr anand axes EEE cece e E ETE 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts cccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteseeeeneeeaeaeeeees 1 4 Chapter 2 Design 2 1 Stat OMe eee des eel Seeds ede A AT ee cower ch gee E un roacnacnacbenbint EE 2 1 PAA i AALO E Beemer eee ee Orr ee or er ner ert rte herent pore c er tert torre fer ete erence rere 2 5 Chapter 3 Operation 341 Operation WMemMod vizcicutect ch cctneraoue ee cee aeolian at 3 3 3 2 LOD DIiSplay nri teeta tte tins chee ch agen ciate Ot SE Ua et a a A ele ee 3 4 3 3 Test Run PROCCCUI Gy sc ike he ree oe eran a neaeteteatecose 3 5 3 4 OOD ETA OM ee i e a ia eee alee ike Miags Bien A Meigs 3 6 3 5 Read Write function and operation c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 3 13 3 6 Test Run Operation 4 sect ott ea ade cet te te ratte eth ag 3 14 3 7 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator 3 17 3 8 Parameter TranStlomvice estou hea besser deeds eacdeeiv ate del esc aot Bast hs Castans 3 19 0 Poabameter E E ss 5s 2 oeon 2 aie st eave vaear discal de E ind eteds ease 3 21 Chapter 4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mod esas scivee is iiecente a eh esis les ase et 4 1 4 27 FUNCTION Moden asina doi i ie ah e AL aN 4 8 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 123 4 4 Communication Function 2 2 5cc 26 Sec odececiccdes edaledhccdeddecaniedden te sdeacdstecdisdancen s 4 145 Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Fu
225. RX CRT CompoNet unit is used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P045 Operation setting at communications error 00 Trip 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop 02 Ignore 03 Free run 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 00 P046 Instance Number Basic speed I O Extended speed I O Extended speed and Torque control Special I O Extended control I O Extended control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 8 20 Not used akRWNM O P048 Operation setting at idle mode detection 00 Trip 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop 02 Ignore 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 00 P190 CompoNet node address 0 to 63 4 121 4 2 Function Mode DeviceNet Communications Use these parameters to configure DeviceNet network when 3G3AX RX DRT unit is used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P044 DeviceNet comm Watch 00 to 99 99 1 00 dog timer 00 Trip 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop pas l a erana Sor 02 Ignore o0 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop 0 Basic speed I O 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O 4 Extended control I O Fete instance Number 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended sp
226. Read mode or Write mode via E key or E key and moves to Option mode after pressing _ amp S and at the same time It returns to display modes via key g ita Ma Each mode has its own layers where contents and parameters settings cannot be changed at Navigation level When pressing EJ key at Navigation level a cursor will appear on below layer LCD Navigation levels To move among the different Navigation levels press keys LA or K The outline of each mode is shown below Monitor Mode A The d group inverter parameters and F U group inverter parameter are displayed on the same screen in this mode The content of d group parameter is displayed with big font characters The function code such as F001 and contents of F U parameters are displayed without the function name Monitor Mode B Monitor x 4 In this mode four d group inverter parameters can be displayed at the same screen The function codes of these parameters are not displayed Function Mode setting In this mode F U group parameters can be displayed and set Function code function name parameter content and parameter range are shown Note d group inverter parameter cannot be set and displayed in this mode Trip Mode Trip information and warning information are displayed in this mode With inverter trip or a warning happens th
227. SS o E Ol zero adjustment Factory lt 2 2 g 0122 fol 0 calibration 0 t0 65595 default S lt O2 zero adjustment Factory C123 O2 0 calibration 0 t 65535 defaut YSS 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 33 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C130 Output 11 ON delay Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C131 Output 11 OFF delay Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C132 Output 12 ON delay Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C133 Output 12 OFF delay Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C134 Output 13 ON delay Output 13 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C135 Output 13 OFF delay Output 13 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C136 Output 14 ON delay Output 14 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C137 Output 14 OFF delay Output 14 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C138 Output terminal operation function Output 15 ON delay Output 15 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C139 Output 15 OFF delay Output 15 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C140 Relay output ON delay Alarm RLY ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C141 Relay output OFF
228. Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz 4 98 4 2 Function Mode Constant Speed Arrival Output 01 FA1 A signal is output when the output frequency has reached the level set in the frequency setting F001 A020 A220 and A320 or multi step speed A021 to A035 foff 2 of the max frequency fon 1 of the max frequency Set frequency fon foff Output frequency i i Example Max frequency fmax 120 Hz Set frequency fset 60 Hz fon 120 x 0 01 1 2 Hz foff 120 x 0 02 2 4 Hz FA1 During acceleration ON at 60 1 2 58 8 Hz During deceleration OFF at 60 2 4 57 6 Hz Set frequency exceeded Output 02 FA2 24 FA4 A signal is output when the output frequency has exceeded the arrival frequencies during acceleration deceleration set in C042 C043 FA2 and C045 C046 FA4 fon 1 of the max frequency C042 C045 C043 C046 fais 4 foit foff 2 of the max frequency Output frequency i FA2 FA4 ESet frequency only Output 06 FA3 25 FA5 A signal is output when the output frequency equals the arrival frequencies during acceleration deceleration set in C042 C043 FA3 and C045 C046 FA5 N fon N Output frequency ion V A C042 C045 fon FA3 FA5 Functions i i fon 1 of the max frequency off foff 2 of the max frequency 4 99 4 2 Functi
229. T 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 32 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ae Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation UP DWN selection 00 Not save Do not store the frequency C101 UP DWN memory data 00 No 4 90 mode 01 Save Store the frequency data 00 ON RESET Trip reset at power on 01 OFF RESET Trip reset when the power o Reset selection is OFF 4 87 i Q102 Reset mode select 02 Onin Trip Enabled only during trip Reset 09 ES a 4 137 when the power is ON 03 Trip RESET Trip reset only Reset frequency Oe pelea C103 matching selection on Fmateh Frequency matching start 00 No 4 87 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching Restart after reset restart c105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 110 FM gain adjust pe AM gain setting A 5 C106 AM gain adjust 50 to 200 100 Yes o A ei AMI gain setting s E C107 AMI gain adjust 50 to 200 100 Yes o 7 aie 4 111 5 ias setting F 2 C109 AM bias adjust O to 100 0 Yes o AMI bias setting o C110 AMI bias adjust O to 100 20 Yes Yo amp C111 ect ae wamng 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A 4 49 E 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current Overload warn Ivl 2 O zero adjustment Factory C121 IO 0 calibration 0 1 65535 defaut Y
230. T 1 9 3 1 4 8 6 7 11 1 16 22 29 37 43 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 6 6 14 14 Regenerative braking Built in braking resistor circuit discharge resistor Braking ini f Minimum connection 10o 100 100 100 70 70 35 35 24 24 resistance Q Class 3 phase 400 V Model name 3G3RX A4220 AREE gone sesso each ence Ben B411K B413K 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max applicable i at CT 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 motor ae at VT 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 at CT 33 2 40 1 51 9 63 0 77 6 103 2 121 9 150 3 180 1 400 V Rated output at VT 39 4 48 4 58 8 72 7 93 5 110 8 135 159 3 200 9 capacity kVA at CT 39 9 48 2 62 3 75 6 93 1 128 3 146 3 180 4 216 1 480 V at VT 47 3 58 1 70 6 87 2 112 2 133 162 1 191 2 241 1 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 380 to 480 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage at CT 48 58 75 91 112 149 176 217 260 Rated output current A at VT 57 70 85 105 135 160 195 230 290 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 14 22 30 30 30 60 60 80 80 Regenerative Built in braking Regenerative braking unit separately mounted braking resistor circuit Braking Minimum connection resistance Q 20 7 3 7 1 Standard Specification List Common Specifications Item Specifications Enclosure rating IP20 up to 55KW IPOO from 75 to 132KW
231. TOP key selection 02 Only RESET Disabled only during stop 00 Data STOP command via the STOP RESET Trip reset operation via the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator key on the Digital Operator 00 Enabled Enabled 01 Disabled Disabled 02 Disabled Enabled Stop Selection eYou can set whether the Inverter decelerates to a stop for the set deceleration time or goes into free run status when the STOP command is input from the Digital Operator or the control circuit terminal block 4 70 suoiloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode elf the RUN command is input again during free running the Inverter restarts according to free run stop selection b088 Refer to Free run Stop Selection page 4 71 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Decel Stop Deceleration gt b091 Stop selection Stop 00 01 Free RUN Free run stop 00 0 Hz start 01 f match Frequency matching b088 Free run stop selection start 00 02 Actv f match Active Frequen cy Matching restart b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 s Frequency matching lower poor limit frequency setting 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 Hz Related functions F003 F203 F303 Free run Stop Selection e Activating the free run stop FRS function shuts off the Inverter output letting the motor go into free run status Parameter No Function name Data De
232. The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates Power supply EP FW Frequency matching Free running Motor rpm Note The counters used for the Inverter s internal protection are cleared during reset To shut off the Inverter s output via a multi function input terminal use the free run stop terminal FRS Example 4 Active Frequency Matching restart e After the retry wait time b003 elapses the FW es Inverter starts output from the b030 set value The Inverter then decelerates according to RS the b029 setting while keeping the output b028 current at the b028 set value e When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again and the frequency Decelerates mP according to b029 S restored to the original level e If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 setting Output current Inverter output frequency 7 i Frequency selected Trip occurs in b030 Motor rpm oo A o b Note If a reset signal is input during the retry wait time the value of frequency at interruption stored in the Inverter is cleared resulting in a 0 Hz start 3 wire Input Function e This function helps start and stop the Inverter using an auto recovery contact e g pushbutton switch Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Starts with auto recovery contacts 20 STA 3 wire start OFF Irrelevant to the motor
233. UN command is turned off The frequency reference and acceleration deceleration command for absolute position control con form to the items selected when the RUN command is turned on If the position command is set to a low value the Inverter may stop deceleration and perform posi tioning before the speed command value is reached In the absolute position control mode the direction of RUN command FW or RV does not refer to the rotating direction The FW or RV signal starts or stops the Inverter The Inverter runs forward when Target position Current position is a positive value or runs in reverse when it is a negative value If you do not perform zero return operation to be described later the position at power on is re garded as the origin position 0 When position command is set to 0 positioning is performed when the RUN command is turned on In reset selection C102 select 03 trip reset only If reset selection C102 is not set to 03 turning on the Inverter s reset terminal or RESET key clears the current position counter To operate the Inverter by using the current position count value after resetting a trip by turning on the reset terminal or RESET key be sure to set reset selection C102 to 03 If PCLR is allocated turning on the PCLR terminal clears the current position counter The internal position deviation counter is simultaneously cleared The absolute position control mode disables the ATR t
234. V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480 126Bh Not used 126Ch Not used 00 Normal operation 126Dh RUN mode selection A085 R W 01 Energy saving operation 02 Automatic operation 126Eh Energy saving response Aoge Rw 0 0to 100 0 0 1 accuracy adjustment 126Fh to Not used 1273h A092 1274h HIGH R W Acceleration time 2 T 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 1275h LOW R W A093 1276h HIGH R W Deceleration time 2 7 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 093 1277h LOW R W 00 2CH Terminal Switched via pisten acceleration multifunction input 09 1278h naan a OR A094 R W 01 Preset FQ Switched by setting 02 FWD REV Enabled only when switching forward reverse 1279h ea R W a i zo 0 00 to 400 00 a 127Ah LOW R W 1278 A038 raw Pa a a 0 00 to 400 00 n 096 127Ch LOW R W 00 Line Acceleration pattern 01 Srcu 127Dh p A097 R W 02 U curve selection i 03 inv U curve 04 EL S curve 00 Line Deceleration pattern Qie Soue 127Eh i p A098 RW 02 U curve selection ee 03 inv U curve 04 EL S curve 4 191 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Pune lon R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 127Fh_ Not used 1280h Not used 1281h ATOI R W HIGH 0 01 Ol start frequency rer 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 1282h Low R W 1283h
235. aat oe poard been securely eon mounted OR ORTOM DOE E79 0 Check that the mounting is correct Has the incoming power supply voltage Shows the waiting status after the dropped Power recovery Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or incoming Inverter voltage decreases Undervoltage and shuts off Mg z standby j UV Wait Replace MCCB Mg This error also appears during Is the voltage between P and N momentary power interruption normal Check the voltage between P and N Has the remote cable plug been inserted properly __ Appears if an error occurs between Check the remote cable inserted Communications aye COM aor the Digital Operator and the ERROR correctly Inverter Has the Digital Operator been inserted properly Check the Digital Operator contact Restart Appears in the restart standby Wait In case of zero start Retry status when the momentary power standby interruption trip retry functions are enabled F adj Wait In case of frequency matching ROWE Appears when the power is shut off POWER eae shutoff pp p OFF Appears if the limited RUN RUN 3 i command is received while the command otation direction is limited to one RUN CMD o E is limited Disable direction with b035 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset
236. al thermistor input TH terminal and digital monitor FM terminal When the sink logic is selected this terminal functions as the contact input common terminal Do not connect this terminal to the ground 2 7 Continued to the next page 2 2 Wiring Terminal Peel Terminal name Description Specifications symbol g FW Forward rotation When the FW signal is ON the motor runs Contact input ON g command terminal forward When it is OFF the motor decelerates condition E and stops Voltage between 8 each input terminal Z and the PLC terminal T 18 V DC or more 1 Multi function input Select 8 functions from among the 61 functions 2 and allocate them to terminals 1 to 8 Input impedance 3 between each input 4 Note Only terminals 1 and 3 can be used for the terminal and the PLC 5 emergency shutoff function For details terminal 4 7 kQ 6 refer to Emergency Shutoff Function 7 page 2 9 Allowable max i 8 voltage 2 Voltage between amp each input terminal liS and the PLC terminal 5 3 27V DC O o S lt Load current at 27 V o 5 DC power supply 8 E voltage g P Approx 5 6 mA a PLC Multi function input The sink and source logic for contact input can common be switched by connecting a short circuit bar on the control terminal block Short circuiting P24 and PLC Sink logic Short circuiting PLC and CM1 Source logic To activate contact input via an external power supply remove the s
237. al 11 selection 1416h 1417h Sa apie Multi function output Teh terminal 14 selection 1419h aon none eee 141Ah 4 203 4 4 Communication Function Register No Function name Function code Monitor and setting parameters Resolu tion 141Bh FM selection C027 R W 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 03 Pulse FQ Digital output frequency 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 08 Pulse Digital current monitor 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 12 YAO Drive Programming 19 OP1 Option board 1 20 OP2 Option board 2 141Ch AM selection C028 R W 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 08 Pulse Digital current monitor 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 11 Out TRQ sign Output torque signed 13 YA1 Drive Programming 19 OP1 Option board 1 20 OP2 Option board 2 141Dh AMI selection C029 R W 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 0
238. al Is there any output short circuit noise Check the IGBT The Inverter has a failure Repair Replace Shuts off the Inverter ouput to Is there any output short circuit Check protect the main element when a 3 tary overcurrent the output wires eea error in the main 15 th re any ground fault P H Check the output wires and motor IGBT error element or drop of the main E30 0 Has the main element been damaged element driving power supply Check the IGBT i E Is there any clogging in the fin Retry operation cannot be Clean the fin performed for this trip Is the motor temperature too high Shuts off the Inverter output when Check the motor temperature detecting the thermistor resistance Is there any damage to the thermister Thermistor value inside the motor has changed E35 0 inside the motor 2 9 error which is connected to the TH Check the thermistor 4 75 terminal resulting motor Is there any electrical noise being temperature rise introduced in the thermister signal Separate the wiring When 01 is selected in b120 brake Is the brake ON OFF function working control selection this error appears Brake check if the brake ON OFF cannot be Is the set time for b124 too short Brake error confirmed within the b124 set time E36 0 Increase b124 4 76 brake confirmation wait time after Has the brake confirmation signal been the Inverter outputs the brake input release signal Wiring check Emergen Sh
239. al warning R 0 OFF 0021h Not used 0022h Not used 0023h Not used 0024h Not used 0025h Not used 1 ON 0026h BRK brake release R 0 OFF 1 ON 0027h BER brake error R 0 OFF i 1 ON 0028h ZS 0 Hz signal R 0 OFF 0029h DSE excessive speed deviation R TON p 0 OFF RA 1 ON 002Ah POK position ready R 0 OFF 002Bh FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 R ON Henan 0 OFF 002Ch FA5 set frequency only 2 R oN 0 OFF 002Dh OL2 overload warning 2 R ON 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 177 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description ODc analog O disconnection 1 ON oosEN detection R 0 OFF OlDc analog Ol disconnection 1 ON one detection R 0 OFF O2Dc analog O2 disconnection 1 ON poe detection R 0 OFF 0031h Not used 0032h FBV PID FB status output R ON 0 OFF 1 ON 0033h NDc network error R 0 OFF 0034h LOG1 logic operation output 1 R TON 0 OFF 0035h LOG2 logic operation
240. alue The larger the data value is the slower the response time A setting range of 0 to 200 is available which corresponds to approx 2 to 400 ms Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C160 to C167 Input terminal response time 1 to 8 C168 FW terminal response time 0 to 200 x 2 ms Can be set in increments of 1 ms 4 108 4 2 Function Mode Digital FM Terminal eYou can monitor the output frequency and current using the FM terminal on the control circuit terminal block The FM terminal provides pulse output HFM Selection Select a signal to output from the following table For 03 digital output frequency use the digital frequency counter For other output signals use the analog meter Parameter No Data Description Full scale value 4 00 Output frequency example 1 0 to Max frequency Hz 2 01 Output current example 1 0 to 200 02 Output torque example 1 0 to 200 2 03 Digital output frequency example 2 0 to Max frequency Hz 04 Output voltage example 1 0 to 100 05 Power example 1 0 to 200 T babe 06 Thermal load rate example 1 0 to 100 07 LAD frequency example 1 0 to Max frequency Hz 08 Digital current monitor 09 Motor temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 10 Fin temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 12 Drive programming out
241. alue is O values on the panel must be ammeter normal meters ig satisfied 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 5 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check that there are no abnormal O Acoustic feeling and No faults vibrations or or visual inspection sounds General PA Check that there Check that there is no abnormal odor are no abnormal O No faults caused by damage or odors i overheating Motor Disconnect Inverter main circuit terminals U T1 V T2 and Megger check W T3 and short f Between the circuit the 3 phase iene on collective motor O motor wires Then 5 MQ min 500 V DC resistance megger terminals and ground terminal use a megger to measure the resistance between the motor wire and ground terminal 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to
242. ame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 0B Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 161 Negative response Refer to page 4 161 HPositive Negative Responses lt Positive Response gt e Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 161 lt Negative Response gt e Response frame Frame format 4 4 Communication Function STX Station No NAK Error code BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Control code NAK Negative AcKnowledge Lye AS OTS Error code Communication error statu
243. ammable gases eLocations subject to exposure to combustibles eLocations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts eLocations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals eLocations subject to shock or vibration MTransporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the product Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Precautions for Use Hinstallation Install the Inverter vertically on the wall Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material like metal Position for installing a screw Main Circuit Power Supply Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter ma
244. any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 eWhen the CS terminal is turned on and then off with the RUN command turned on the Inverter starts acceleration in synchronization with the motor rpm during free running after the retry wait time b003 elapses frequency matching start Note that the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if e The motor rpm is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base rpm e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates e f frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 is set the Inverter starts at 0 Hz when the motor rpm lowers to the frequency set in b007 Refer to page 4 38 e Ensure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked elf the earth leakage breaker ELB has tripped because of ground fault the commercial power supply circuit does not work either If you need backup supply power from a commercial power supply circuit ELBC For FWY RVY and CSY use low current relays Refer to the following sequence for timing elf an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching extend the retry wait time b003 For commercial switching operation refer to the following examples of connections and timing of commercial switching operation e At power on the Inverter can automatically perform retry operation This does not require the following CS terminal For details refer to Reset page 4 87 Examples of connections and timing of commercial switching operation
245. arator FE WCFE Alarm codes 0 to 3 ACO to AC3 Multi function monitor output terminal Analog voltage output Analog current output Pulse train output A F D F multiplied by n pulse output only A T V P etc Display monitor Output frequency Output current Output torque Frequency conversion value Trip record I O terminal status Electric power etc Other functions V f free setting 7 Upper lower frequency limit Frequency jump Curve acceleration deceleration Manual torque boost level break Energy saving operation Analog meter adjustment Starting frequency Carrier frequency adjustment Electronic thermal function free setting available External start end frequency rate Analog input selection Trip retry Restart during momentary power interruption Various signal outputs Reduced voltage startup Overload limit Initialization value setting Automatic deceleration at power off AVR function Automatic acceleration deceleration Auto tuning Online Offline High torque multi motor operation control Sensor less vector control of two monitors with one Inverter 7 5 7 1 Standard Specification List Item Specifications Carrier frequency modification range 0 5 to 15 kHz for CT 0 5 to 12 kHz for VT Protective functions Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Electronic thermal protection Temperature error protection Momentary po
246. ary As a general rule the shield has to be applied on both sides on PE unless differently stated in the device manufacturers documentation As a basic principle the shielding of these lines should not be interrupted Using this shielding can reduce the interference coupled into and out of the cable The effectiveness of the shielding heavily depends on the construction and the material of the shielding The screening effectiveness can be characterized by the so called transfer impedance This effectiveness or performance can be improved by keeping the transfer impedance as low as possible The transfer impedance is mainly affected by the following variables e The cable covering which is the cable area actually covered by the shielding It is normally indicated as a percentage value and should be at least 85 The shielding s design Possible design alternatives are braided cables or shieldings made of metal conduit These two types should be preferred when shielding is to be implemented The contact or transition resistance between the individual stranded conductors of the shielding The performance of the shielding improves if the resistance is kept as low as possible The following diagram shows the transfer impedance for various cable types By comparing the cables individual design the shielding effectiveness can be estimated and a suitable cable be chosen 2 26 2 2 Wiring Transfer impedance mim 10 i 1 10 a2
247. ated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 Drive programming input 1 Ml2 Drive programming input 2 MI3 Drive programming input 3 MI4 Drive programming input 4 MI5 Drive programming input 5 MI6 Drive programming input 6 MI7 Drive programming input 7 MI8 Drive programming input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG Drive program start NO no allocation 01 12 18 02 03 06 08 no No 4 79 1 C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively when the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON 64 cannot be set optionally When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF C003 has no allocations no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 41 3 9 Parameter List Parameter A Default Eke Function name Monitor or data range 4 during Unit Page No setting operation C011 Multi function input 1 00 operation sel
248. atically changed to no no allocation by setting SW1 to ON This is done in order to prevent duplicated allocation of this function Then even if SW1 is reset to OFF the initial allocation cannot be restored The User should Re allocate the terminal function Example When the multi function input terminal 2 C002 is 18 RS setting SW1 to ON changes the C002 setting to no no allocation 18 RS will be allocated to the multi function input terminal 1 C001 Then even if SW1 is reset to OFF the multi function input terminal 2 C002 setting is no no allocation and the multi function input terminal 1 C001 setting is 18 RS 4 Input terminal selection 64 EMR cannot be selected with the Digital Operator When slide switch SW1 is set to ON this function will be automatically allocated 2 10 g D u 5 Design 2 2 Wiring 5 Once slide switch SW1 is set to ON allocation of multi function input terminals 1 and 3 will not be restored even if SW1 is reset to OFF afterward Re allocate the terminal function a Slide switch SW1 OW Ijo a Slide lever factory default OFF OFF CID ON Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals Main Power Supply Input Terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 2 11 Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and the main power supply terminal
249. ault monitor 5 Inverter status mee vere Tip Factorii page 4 183 003Ch Fault monitor 5 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 003Dh Fault monitor 5 frequency LOW Hz 003Eh Fault monitor 5 current d085 R Output current value at the time of 0 1 A tripping 003Fh Fault monitor 5 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 0040h Fault monitor 5 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0041h Fault monitor 5 RUN time LOW 0042h Fault monitor 5 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0043h Fault monitor 5 ON time LOW 0044h Fault monitor 6 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List page 4 183 0045h Fault monitor 6 Inverter status mee inverter Tie Factonkist page 4 183 0046h Fault monitor 6 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 0047h Fault monitor 6 frequency LOW Hz 0048h Fault monitor 6 current d086 R output current value at dieing oF 0 1 A tripping 0049h Fault monitor 6 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 004Ah Fault monitor 6 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 004Bh Fault monitor 6 RUN time LOW 004Ch Fault monitor 6 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 004Dh Fault monitor 6 ON time LOW Warning code 004Eh Warning monitor d090 R 0 to 385 004Fh to Not used O8FFh 0000 Motor parameter recalculation 0001 Set value storage in EEPROM 0900h EEPROM write W Other
250. ay time setting P069 Zero return direction selection P019 a e gear setting position P070 Low speed return frequency P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator P071 High speed zero return frequency P021 Electronic gear ratio denominator P072 Position range specification forward P022 Position control feedforward gain P073 Position range specification reverse P023 Position loop gain P074 Teaching selection 4 60 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode eln the Normal Duty VT there is an item limited in the parameter of the operator by the setting range Function code Function name A044 A244 1st 2nd V f characteristics selection A054 DC injection braking power A057 Startup DC injection braking power A059 DC injection braking carrier frequency A085 RUN mode selection b022 Overload limit level b025 Overload limit level 2 b028 Active Frequency Matching restart level b041 Torque limit 1 Four quadrant mode forward power running b042 Torque limit 2 Four quadrant mode reverse regeneration b043 Torque limit 3 Four quadrant mode reverse power running b044 Torque limit 4 Four quadrant mode forward regeneration b083 Carrier frequency C030 Digital current monitor reference value C039 Light load detection level C041 Overload warning level C055 Overtorque level Forward power running C056 Overtorque level Reverse regeneration C057 Overtorque level Reverse powe
251. ayed Trip information is composed in two pages For change from page 1 P1 to page 2 P2 press the _ or A key ea O pe D fo O Pressing 6 times the key it will be displayed the Warning Mode Note When a trip happens ALARM LED will be light on Press the key to reset the inverter 3 12 Operation 3 5 Read Write function and operation 3 5 Read Write function and operation LCD digital operator can read and save inverter parameter settings and copy them to another inverter Specifically LCD digital operator can save four inverters parameter sets or one inverter s parameter set and its Drive Programming It can be selected via the R W Storage Mode in the LCD configuration Option Mode Note If Read operation cannot be executed please check the Read Lock option in the LCD configuration Option Mode R W Storage Mode Single READ WRITE function When the R W Storage Mode is selected to 01 Single this is done in the LCD configuration Option Mode the function Read or Write is executed immediately after pressing J or E key After pressing the key in any display mode except Write mode and Option mode the inverter s parameter configuration are read and saved into LCD digital operator Drive Programming program will be transferred to the LCD digital operator automatically after parameter reading is finished If the inverter supports Drive Pro
252. bar shaded area 3G3RX A4450 Tol reactor keep the PD 1 P for EMC filter function switching 3G3RX A4550 5 short circuit bar attached EMC filter function switching method Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M8 EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled CHARGE LED indicator as O V R L1 S L2 TL3 PD 1 P N UTi v2 i W T3 G PD 1 P G short circuit bar Ground terminal with short circuit bar When not using the DC shaded area for EMC 3G3RX A2550 reactor keep the PD 1 P filter function switching short circuit bar attached f f nee Ro To M4 EMC filter function switching method Ground terminal M8 Others M10 EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled 2 16 Design 2 2 Wiring m Recommended Cable Size Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal For Inverter wiring crimp terminal and terminal screw tightening torque refer to the table below Power External Applicable cable brakin Circuit gece Motor mm Ground lt NJ Terminal gt Tightening Applicable resistor Crimp break Earth ouput Inverter model FeS T eae between SASW terminal torque eror kW U V W mm size Nem leakage PD 1 and fuse breaker PD 1 2 eake P N RIB mf ELB 0 4 3G3RX A2004 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 Ve 30A max 1 8 0 75 83G3RX A2007 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 l e 30A ma
253. be sure to use shield braided cables Keep the cables as short as possible Low voltage Directive The RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN61800 5 1 by performing the machine in stallation and wiring as shown below eThe RX models are an open type device Be sure to install it inside the control panel The power supply and voltage SELV with reinforced or double insulation should be used for wiring to the control circuit terminals eTo satisfy requirements of the LVD low voltage directive the Inverter must be protected with a molded case circuit breaker MCCB in case a short circuiting accident occurs Be sure to install a molded case circuit breaker MCCB on the power supply side of the Inverter Use one molded case circuit breaker MCCB per Inverter Use the crimp type terminal with an insulation sleeve to connect to the main circuit terminals 2 22 Design 2 2 Wiring EMC Filters Warnings and Instructions e The 3G3RX frequency inverters meet the limits of EN61800 3 C1 C2 C3 for radiated interference if the specified line filter is used and installation is performed according to our instructions and internal line filter is disabled e The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents The quick voltage changes of the OMRON inverter series cause capacitive currents through the motor cable stray capacitances The cable length inc
254. bled when 3G3AX OP01 is used O Input O OI Input Ol Modbus RS485 communication Option 1 Option 2 Pulse Pulse train frequency 02 03 A143 Operator selection ADD Addition A B SUB Subtraction A B MUL Multiplication A x B 00 Related functions A001 10 A076 10 Note 1 When this function is enabled the Up Down function cannot be used In addition frequency cannot be changed through key operations from output frequency monitor d001 frequency conversion monitor d007 or output frequency setting F001 Note 2 The same setting is available in A141 and A142 eTo use this function as a frequency reference set frequency reference selection A001 to 10 eTo use this function as a PID feedback set PID feedback selection A076 to 10 Frequency Addition Function The value set in frequency addition amount A145 can be added to or subtracted from the selected frequency reference value eTo use this function allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function inputs The A145 value is added or subtracted with the ADD terminal turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A145 Frequency addition 4 o ta 400 00 0 00 Hz amount 00 ADD Add A145 value to output A146 Frequency addition frequency 00 direction 01 SUB Subtract A145 value from output frequency Related functions C001 to C008 ADD input
255. brake use the frequency arrival signal 4 100 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 0 Hz Detection Signal This function outputs a detection signal when the Inverter s output frequency falls below the 0 Hz detection value set in 0 Hz detection level C063 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal 11 to 15 selection 21 ZS 0 Hz signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection 0 00 to 100 00 Hz ou O Hz detectioi level Set a frequency to be detected as 0 Hz mae Related functions A044 A244 A344 e Enabled when 21 ZS is allocated to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 When VC special VP free V F sensorless vector control or O Hz sensorless vector control is selected as the control method this function works for the Inverter s output frequency When the control method is sensor vector control this function works for the motor rotation frequency Alarm Code Output ACO to AC3 This function outputs a 3 bit or 4 bit code signal to indicate the cause of an Inverter trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit 00 02 4 bit elf 01 3 bit or 02 4 bit is selected in alarm code selection C062 multi function output te
256. braking is released and the output returns to normal Example 7 a elf the reference frequency is O when the operation starts with analog input the initial operation is DC injection braking because both the reference and current frequencies are 0 Example 7 b elf the RUN command is turned on with the frequency reference established or a value larger than the A052 setting is input the initial operation is set to normal output Example 7 a Example 7 b ON command ON eny fd an iI L command reference reference Output frequency A052 A052 Frequency Frequency Output frequency e The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of DC injection braking power A054 a Edge operation b Level operation ON ON RUN l RUN command command A052 A052 Frequency Frequency reference Output frequency reference Output frequency A053 Frequency Limit eYou can set both the upper lower limits to the output frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A061 Frequency upper limit E e N it A062 to 0 00 A261 2nd frequency upper limit E e AA A a 0 00 z A062 Frequency lower limit a e to Frequency 0 00 A262 2nd frequency lower limit 0 0 Starting frequency to 2nd 0 00 frequency upper limit A261 Related functions C001 to C008
257. braking delay A053 R W 0 0to 5 0 0 1 s DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW s lesen power A054 RW oto 80 75 to 132 kW 1 1249h DC injection braking time A055 R W 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 s 124Ah DC injection braking A056 R W 00 Edge operation o method selection 01 Level operation Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 1248h braking power ASK RW 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 1 4 jodoh A aup DE nection Ao58 Rw 0 0to 60 0 0 1 s braking time DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 124Dh carrier frequency A059 R W 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 0 1 kHz 124Eh Not used 124Fh A061 R W a HIGH 0 00 Frequency lower limit to 0 01 Frequency upper limit Max frequency Hz 1250h nos R W LOW 1251h A067 R W nen HIGH 0 00 Starting frequency to 0 01 Frequency lower limit ae A062 Frequency upper limit Hz 1252h LOW R W 4 189 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 1253h 1969 R W HIGH 0 01 Jump frequency 1 0 00 to 400 00 H 1254h nose R W m LOW 0 01 1255h Jump frequency width 1 A064 R W 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 1256h A063 R W HIGH 0 01 Jump frequency 2 F 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 065 1257h LOW R W P 0 01 1258h Jump frequency width 2 A066 R W 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 1259h poe R W HIGH 0 01 Jump frequency 3 ri 0 00 to
258. cated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 56 uonesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas No Function name Monitor or data range eatin during Unit Page 9 operation Position range ee 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 P073 specification 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 268435455 Yes reverse 00 X00 Multi step position command 0 PO60 01 X01 Multi step position command 1 S P061 2 02 X02 Multi step position command 2 P062 8 03 X03 Multi step position command 3 4 137 2 P074 Teaching selection P063 00 Yes 04 X04 Multi step position command 4 2 P064 lt 05 X05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 X06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 X07 Multi step position command 7 P067 P100 Drive Program to parameter U 00 to 0 to 65535 0 Yes P131 U 31 P160 to Option I F cmd W P169 register 1 to 10 0000 to FFFF 0000 Yes P170to Option I F cmd R P179 register 1 to 10 0000 to FFFF 0000 Yes paag o Bue noda 0 to 125 0 No address P181 Profibus clear mode 90 ooa 00 No 01 Last value f 00 PPO P182 R 01 Conventional 00 No 02 Flexible mode piga SANOpen Node 0 to 127 0 No address 00 Auto 01 10Kbps 02 20Kbps CANOpen 03 50Kbps P186 communication 04 125Kbps 06 No speed 05 250Kbps 06 500Kbps 07 800Kbps
259. cation Function c scssseceeceeee 4 145 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 Monitor Mode Output Frequency Monitor d001 Displays the set point of output frequency of the Inverter afected by acceleration and deceleration ramps but without compensations During stop 0 00 is displayed Display 0 00 to 400 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz Note When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator the output frequency can be changed with the Increment Decrement key during operation only The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001 Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference Note This will correspond with the theoretical motor speed but not with the real output frequency of the inverter Output Current Monitor d002 Displays the output current value of the Inverter During stop 0 00 is displayed Display 0 0 to 9999 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 A Rotation Direction Monitor d003 Displays the RUN direction of the Inverter The RUN LED indicator lights up during forward reverse rotation Display FWD Forward STOP Stop REV Reverse PID Feedback Value Monitor d004 4 1 When Enabled 01 or Reverse output enabled 02 is selected in PID selection A071 the PID feedback value can be monitored Gain conversion is enabled with PID scale A075 d004 display PID feedback value x
260. change Write into RAM Parameter change Parameter change Write into RAM 3G3MX2 Write into RAM and EEPROM changed data only Enter command e Parameter change 900h 1 Write all data 3 Write into RAM into EEPROM The EEPROM write mode remains effective only for one parameter change 4 175 4 4 Communication Function Register Number List R W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and or writing R Read only R W Read and write enabled lt Coil Number List gt Coil No Item R W Description 0000h Not used 0001h RUN command R W RuN 0 Stop Enabled when A002 03 er 1 Reverse 0002h Rotation direction command R W 0 Forward Enabled when A002 03 0003h External trip EXT R W 1 Trip 0004h Trip reset RS R W 1 Reset 0005h Not used 0006h Not used 0007h Multi function input terminal 1 R W LOD j 0 OFF 0008h Multi function input terminal 2 R W TON p 0 OFF 0009h Multi function input terminal 3 R W 1 ON p 0 OFF O000Ah Multi function input terminal 4 R W IFON P 0 OFF OOOBh Multi function input terminal 5 R W ON i 0 OFF 000Ch Multi function input terminal 6 R W ION 0 OFF 1 000Dh Multi function input terminal 7 R W ON p 0 OFF OOOEh Multi function input terminal 8 R W mON p 0 OFF f 1 Run oer Operation status R 0 Stop interlocked with d003 7 eee 1
261. city D 1 P N oo RiP Power C supply S L2 Motor oo of TELS po Suna terminal Ground terminal o Do not connect the power wire Do not connect to the To motor Be sure to remove the short circuit bar for switching the built in filter function Withstand Voltage Test Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter Doing the test is dangerous and may cause damage or deterioration to the parts inside the Inverter Checking the Inverter and Converter e The quality of the Inverter and converter can be checked using a tester Preparation Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires R L1 S L2 T L3 the motor connection wires U T1 V T2 W T3 and the regenerative braking resistance P RB Prepare a tester Usable range is 1 Q measurement resistance Checking method The quality can be judged by measuring the conduction state of Inverter main circuit terminal blocks R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 RB P and N while alternating the tester polarity Note 1 Before checking measure the voltage between P and N at DC voltage range in advance and confirm that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged 6 7 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Note 2 A nearly infinite value is shown in a no conduction state However the value may not be infinite if the momentary conduction occurs through the influence of the smoothi
262. class 330 to 390 o b131 level qunng 400 V class 660 to 780 380 760 V deceleration Overvoltage protection 0 10 10 90 00 b132 Set the acceleration rate applied when this 1 00 s parameter a function is enabled Overvoltage protection 90019 29 b133 roportionalaainsettin Proportional gain for DC voltage constant 0 50 prop 9 9 control b130 01 only Overvoltage protection 0 00910 69 535 b134 intearal time settini Integral time for DC voltage constant control 0 060 s 9 9 b130 01 only Example 1 When b130 01 Example 2 When b130 02 Main circuit DC voltage V Main circuit DC voltage V Overvoltage Overvoltage protection level b131 protection level b131 Output frequency Hz Time s Output frequency Hz Time s i _ DC voltage kept constant lt gt Accelerates according to b132 Time s Time s Note 1 With this function enabled the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value Particularly with b130 02 if b131 is set too low the Inverter may not decelerate Note 2 Even if this function is enabled an overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate and load condition Note 3 When using this function the Inverter may reduce frequency depending on the moment of inertia of motor load and takes a long time to stop 4 78 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 1 If the b131 set value is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent the motor may
263. compensation gain of the automatic A046 A246 speed torque boost Reduce the set value of the carrier frequency b083 Rotation speed lowers Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic A047 A247 when load is applied torque boost Rotation speed increases Gradually reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque A047 A247 when load is applied boost Gradually reduce the voltage compensation gain of the automatic A046 A246 torque boost Overcurrent trip occurs when load is applied cna reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque A047 A247 Gradually reduce the voltage setting of the manual torque boost A042 A242 4 20 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Control Method V f Characteristics You can set V f characteristics output voltage output frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit V f characteristics A044 selection 2nd V f characteristics A244 selection 3rd V f characteristics A344 selection Heavy duty 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque characteristics 02 Free V f characteristics Only A044 A244 can be set 03 SLV Sensorless vector control Only A044 A244 can be set 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control Only A044 A244 can be set 05 V2 Sensor vector control Only A044 A244 can be set Normal duty 00 VC Constant torque c
264. control feedforward gain Feed FW gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 Yes 4 128 4 129 P023 Position loop gain Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 50 Yes rad s 4 124 4 128 4 129 4 134 4 136 P024 Options Position bias amount Position bias 2048 to 2048 Yes rad s 4 128 P025 Secondary resistance compensation enable disable selection Temp comp Therm 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Enabled 00 No 4 114 P026 Overspeed error detection level OverSpeed err level 0 0 to 150 0 135 0 No P027 Speed deviation error detection level SpeedDev Err level 0 00 to 120 00 7 50 No Hz 4 124 P028 Motor gear ratio numerator M gear ratio num 1 to 9999 No P029 Motor gear ratio denominator M gear ratio den 1 to 9999 No 4 133 P031 Acceleration deceleration time input type Acc Dec time source 00 OPE Digital Operator 01 Option 1 02 Option 2 03 EZSQ Drive Programming 00 No 4 8 P032 Orientation stop position input type Positioning cmd src 00 OPE Digital Operator 01 Option 1 02 Option 2 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 42 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default
265. cover E Open the terminal block cover and you can connect cables to the main circuit terminal block as well as the control circuit terminal block Also open the front cover and you can mount the optional board Position for installing optional board 1 Position for installing optional board 2 Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block Backing plate M IAJ9AQ Chapter 2 Design 2 el nstallatiGnses cron cree eee ere ee 2 1 ed VV INUING estes secre cececcrecexetevarincutecatecaceccusste deeds tacetec ic 2 5 2 1 Installation 2 1 Installation DANGER Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock c 2 D Q m A A A D A A Q Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding N CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals PD 1 P
266. cuit DC voltage drop occurs during operation the Inverter decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage at the value set in momentary power interruption non stop target voltage OV LADSTOP level b052 This function is started when the following conditions are all satisfied e b050 02 or 03 e The Inverter is running This function is disabled during trip undervoltage stop The control power supply is momentarily interrupted or the main circuit DC voltage falls below the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 This function is enabled when the above starting conditions are satisfied even if the J51 connector cable is disconnected from terminals Ro and To and is connected from main terminal P to Ro and from N and To or even if the control power supply is separated from the main circuit power supply elf the time of momentary power interruption is short the Inverter can continue to run without shutting off the output However if undervoltage occurs because of momentary power interruption the Inverter immediately shuts off the output and stops operating this function The subsequent power recovery depends on the setting of retry selection b001 eWith b050 03 the Inverter can be restored to normal operation if a momentary power interruption occurs and incoming voltage recovers before the output is shut off Note that the Inverter may decelerate to a stop depending on the b051 setting Below are the
267. currence d083 ERR3 Output frequency Hz Output current A 4 7 gt Internal DC voltage V d084 Fault monitor 4 RUN time h 4 7 ERR4 gt ON time h Fault monitor 5 d085 ERR5 4 7 Fault monitor 6 d086 ERR6 4 7 Warning monitor Warning code f Bee WARN 0 to 385 gre DC voltage monitor d102 DC Voltage 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 7 Regenerative diog raking load rate 9 9 to 100 0 a z 4 7 monitor BRD load Electronic thermal d104 monitor 0 0 to 100 0 4 7 E Thermal App 3 Appendix 1 Parameter List Basic Function Mode F Parameter Default outs Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation Output frequency 0 0 Starting frequency to 1st 2nd 3rd max F001 eee frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 8 CM 9 00 to 400 00 Foo2 Acceleration time 1 4 44 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 Accel time1 2nd acceleration F202 time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 Accel time1 M2 3rd acceleration F302 time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 Accel time1 M3 Foo3 Deceleration time 1 4 44 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 Decel time1 2nd deceleration F203 time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 Decel time1 M2 3rd deceleration F303 time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 Yes s 4 8 Decel time1 M3 Operator rotation F004 direction selection Run key direction 2nd 3rd control
268. current 75 to 132 kW 0 1 A 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during Overload wanina sional acceleration deceleration constant 1428h s tp t mod 9 Sig C040 R W speed P 01 Const Enabled only during constant speed 0 0 Does not operate 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated 1429h Overload warning level C041 R W current 0 4 to 55 kW 0 1 A 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW 142Ah ee R W Arrival frequency during 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 acceleration C042 Hz 142Bh LOW R W 142ch man R W Arrival frequency during 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 deceleration C043 Hz 142Dh LOW R W 142Eh z OR EER S C044 R W 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 142Fh f Can R W Arrival frequency during 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 acceleration 2 C045 Hz 1430h LOW R W 1431h Cote R W Arrival frequency during HIGH 0 01 f 0 00 to 400 00 deceleration 2 C046 Hz 1432h LOW R W 1433h to Not used 1437h 1438h PID FB upper limit C052 R W 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 1439h PID FB lower limit C053 R W 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 143Ah Not used Overtorque level O to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P tae Forward power running C099 TUAN 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 4 Overtorque level O to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Teen Reverse regeneration Q036 RAN 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 143Dh Overtorque level C057 R W 0 to 200 ea to 55 kW 11 Reverse power running 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 4 205 4 4 Communication Function
269. cy Matching restart at free run stop selection b088 Examples 1 2 3 e f you set frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz when the Inverter detects a frequency equal to or lower than this setting during frequency matching start 4 71 4 2 Function Mode e The setting of this function is applied to the FRS terminal and also to the status when the Inverter is reset from free running Example 1 0 Hz start Example 2 Frequency matching start FW FW FRS FRS es eee Free running Free running 0 Hz start ge Motor typ ee a Motor WII i a rpm 0 0 b003 lt gt Frequency matching start e When the FRS terminal is turned off and the retry wait time elapses the motor frequency is matched and a Active Frequency Matching starts without stopping the motor If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching start extend the retry wait time e Even if frequency matching start is selected the Inverter may start at 0 Hz when e The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates e The Inverter detects a frequency equal to or lower than the frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 e The Inverter starts running at 0 Hz regardless of the motor rpm The retry wait time is ignored at 0 Hz start e If the Inverter starts running at 0 Hz with the motor rpm high a
270. cy reference O L terminal 0 to 10 V voltage input OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA current input O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V voltage input Also set an output frequency for the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator E Adjusting the O2 L and OI L Terminals Parameter No Function name Data Poel Unit setting pee O OI start frequency 0 00 to 400 0 0 00 Hz A012 Biaiteacaieaucce Set a start end frequency A102 li ia A013 0 O OI start ratio 0 to 100 A103 Set a start end ratio relative to an external 20 o A014 frequency reference of 0 to 10 V and 4 to 20 A104 O Ol end ratio mA 100 01 A015 O Ol start selection 00 External start frequency A011 set value A105 01 0 Hz 00 Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 eTo input voltage ranging from 0 to 5 V on the OI L terminal set A014 to 50 Example 1 A015 A105 00 Max Max frequency frequency A012 A102 A012 A102 A011 A101 A011 A101 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 100 Analog input 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 100 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA 0 Ol 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA Example 2 A015 A105 01 Analog input 0 01 4 14 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode E Adjusting the O2 L Terminal Parameter No Function name Data ae Unit A111 O2 start frequency a Aee 0 00 Hz A112 O2 end frequency 7400 00 tea 0 00 Set an end frequency 100 to O2 end ratio A113 O2 start ratio Set a start ratio relat
271. cy with a resolution of 0 1 Hz via BCD input and setting the acceleration deceleration time with a resolution of 0 1 sec via BCD in put in the dividing input mode DIV TYPE CODE 1 2 ON BCD ON DIV For the communication option boards refer to the specific user manual of each option 5 8 suoieisdo sdueUDd UIeLy 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Trip Monitor Display p SSS 1 l l I y 1 Trip factor Explanation of display l i lee eS se ic i i TRIP M1 STOP ALL jE 4 ee l i E12 1 Yi L AI y nnnnnnnnnnmnj I l l I y Indicates the cause of the trip Indicates the Inverter status at the time of tripping I l em l E X t T r 1p i i WIA u During initialization at power on or with try 1 2 Output frequency Hz at the time of tripping the reset terminal set to ON 111006 T105 Stop J i 4 During stop e a ae ae ae ww ww we oae o i t x i i 2 During deceleration 1 l v 1 1 Z Duri 1 z During constant speed 4 00 1 3 Output current A at the time of tripping uy During acceleration l Ext Trip i 5 The RUN command is turned on at frequency 0 a a m o om om oe om ow l l A Ww eee eee ew eee ewe 1 1 f111006 11 05 Stop 1 r 5 During startup a a a ew eww ew am am ao a 1 eee ee ee 71 OI
272. d disabled PID PID integral reset PIDC Control gain switching CAS UP DWN function accelerated UP UP DWN function decelerated DWN UP DWN function data clear UDC Forced operator OPE Multi step speed setting bit 1 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 2 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 3 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 4 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 5 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 6 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit 7 SF7 Overload limit switching OLR Torque limit enabled TL Torque limit switching 1 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 2 TRQ2 P PI switching PPI Brake confirmation BOK Orientation ORT LAD cancel LAC Position deviation clear PCLR Pulse train position command input permission STAT Frequency addition function ADD Forced terminal block F TM Torque reference input permission ATR Integrated power clear KHC Servo ON SON Preliminary excitation FOC Analog command on hold AHD Position command selection 1 CP1 Position command selection 2 CP2 Position command selection 3 CP3 Zero return limit signal ORL Zero return startup signal ORG Forward driving stop FOT Reverse driving stop ROT Speed Position switching SPD Pulse counter PCNT Pulse counter clear PCC No allocation no Thermistor input terminal 1 terminal Positive Negative temperature coefficient of resistance element switchable Output Multi function output 5 open collect
273. ddress P185 R W Oto 127 00 Auto 01 10Kbps 02 20Kbps ere 03 50Kbps 16BCh eae commurmication ipige R W 04 125Kbps p 05 250Kbps 06 500Kbps 07 800Kbps 08 1Mbps 16COh CompoNet node address P190 R W Oto 63 16C2h DeviceNet node address P192 R W 0 to 63 00 32 bytes 16C5h ML2 frame length P195 R W 01 17 bytes 16C6h ML2 node address P196 R W 21 to 3E 4 215 4 4 Communication Function Data on H003 Motor capacity selection is the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Motor capacity kW 90 110 132 150 160 lt Holding Register Number List 2nd Setting gt Replier Function name Becton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution a No code F202 2103h HIGH R W 2nd acceleration time 1 STA 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s TI 2104h LOW R W 3 F203 2105h HIGH R W ie 2nd deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s rr 203 2106h LOW R W 2107h to Not used 2202h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode 2nd Setting gt peosier Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2203h 2nd set base frequenc
274. de DC voltage V x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Power ON time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code lt Command 06 gt Reads a setting item e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 06 Parameter Parameter No for data 4 bytes Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D All parameters except F001 and U001 to U012 are retrieved 4 157 4 4 Communication Function e Response frame Positive response Frame format STX Station No ACK Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data Decimal ASCII code 8 bytes ig Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D If the data is a selected item the corresponding code data is received transmitted Data on H003 and H203 motor capacity selection are the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03
275. de R W USUAL Sy caia ane seting Data resolution parameters 0006h PID feedback R W O to 10000 0 01 Note You can read and write data However you can read data only when ModBus RTU is selected for the PID feedback Data cannot be read under other settings elf 03 pulse train input is set for PID feedback A076 the Inverter obtains a percent conversion result 100 at max frequency as a feedback value relative to the input pulse train frequency value Hz Feedforward Selection Select a terminal used for feedforward signals in PID feedforward selection A079 e The A079 setting is enabled even if the terminal selected in A079 is duplicated with the terminal selected for target value or feedback value input elf A079 is set to disabled feedforward control is disabled Reverse PID Function Depending on the sensor characteristics the polarity of deviation between the target and feedback values may not match the Inverter s command In this case you can invert the deviation polarity by 4 33 setting A077 to 01 Example To control a refrigerator compressor If the specified temperature range of a temperature sensor is 20 C to 100 C at 0 to 10 V the target value is 0 C and the current temperature is 10 C the Inverter reduces the frequency under normal PID control since the feedback value is higher than the target value Set A077 to 01 so that the Inverter increases the frequenc
276. ded control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 8 20 Not used 00 Trip 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration 1632h Operation setting at idle P048 R W stop mode detection 02 Ignore 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop Polarity setting for rotation 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 o IGAN speed he Si 30 32 34 36 38 1634h to Not used 1638h 1639h Pulse train frequency Po55 R W y9 to 50 0 l 0 1 kHz scale Input frequency at maximum frequency esAn FASS train frequency iter I gss Rw Nooit 2 00 0 01 s time constant 463Bh Fuse train frequency bias pon R W 100 to 100 1 amount 163Ch_ Pulse train frequency limit P058 R W 0 to 100 1 163Dh Not used 163Eh P060 Rw Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward A command 0 P060 side 163Fh LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 4 213 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Luncion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 1640h P061 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step position HIGH to Position range specification forward A command 1 P061 side 1641h LOW R W 268435455 to 268435455 1642h P062 R w Position range specification reverse side Multi step
277. ds can be set in increments of 0 1 If the set usage rate is exceeded a braking resistor overload trip E06 occurs Usage rate of a b090 regenerative cu kB lt B gt 0 0 5 braking function O ON ON ON Rrra 9 rakin ance activated 100s N Usage rate ACEA x 100 100s Regenerative 00 OFF Disabled b095 braking function 01 RUN ON Enabled Disabled during stop 00 operation selection 02 Alws ON Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative 200 V class 330 to 380 y b096 braking function 400 V class 660 to 760 V 400 V class ON level Inverter DC voltage 720 V The regenerative braking function ON level conforms to the voltage setting for the Inverter s internal converter DC unit Cooling Fan Control eYou can set whether to operate the Inverter s cooling fan constantly or only during Inverter operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b092 Cooling fan control 00 Alws ON Always ON 01 ON in RUN ON during RUN Regardless of the settings the cooling fan operates for 5 minutes after power on and for 5 minutes after the Inverter stops 01 Note If a momentary power interruption occurs or the power is shut off while the cooling fan is in operation the cooling fan stops temporarily and restarts automatically after power recovery 4 74 Functions 4 2 Function Mode External Thermistor TH This func
278. dsuU Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check the balance Measure the voltage Phase to phase voltage balance of output voltage between Inverter HURON 200 V class levels between O main circuit terminals alae 4 V max phases in single U T1 V T2 and tetru W T3 400 V class T Control VSI 8 V max Digital circuit Operation multimeter Protection check Check that there Rectifier circuit PIG ROSTOS IN Short circuit or open Voltmeter protection and P Bake the Inverter protection Error is found in display circuits O ee circuit output under the sequence through sequence a simulated conditions protection operation Check that there Rotates are no abnormal O Rotate manually smoothly vibration or when the power is off No faults Cooling fan Sounds Reference of E Check that the the replacement y connection parts O Visual inspection period 10 years are secure aS Fin Check thatthere 3 O Visual inspection No clogging no clogging Check that the Check that the LED indicatorsare O Visual inspection LED indicators Display lit properly are lit properly Clean with a soft Display Cleaning 2 cloth Check that the Check the indicated The specified or ae ge control values Voltmeter Meter indicated v
279. e 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 14 YA2 Drive programming 00 No 4 110 4 118 C030 Digital current monitor reference value Digital Ref 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Current value at the digital current monitor output 1440 Hz Rated current Yes 4 109 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 29 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter A 3 Default Eke No Function name Monitor or data range setting during Unit Page operation Multi function output terminal 11 contact C031 selection Output 11 actv state Multi function output terminal 12 contact C032 selection Output 12 actv state E Multi function output E terminal 13 contact 00 NO C033 selection 0 4 NC 00 5 Output 13 actv i state No 4 96 5 Multi function output zi terminal 14 contact 5 C034 selection 2 Output 14 actv z state Multi function output terminal 15 contact C035 selection Output 15 actv state Relay output AL2 C036 Srl 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 01 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 Alarm RLY active state Light load signal 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during output mode acceleration deceleration constant C038 LOC out mode speed 01 No select 01 Const Enabled only during constant 2 sp
280. e 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 No 5 DC injection braking A055 time 0 0 to 60 0 0 5 No s 2 DB decel time Q DC injection braking Q A056_ method selection 90 Edge operation 01 No 4 24 01 Level operation DB input select Startup DC injection A057 _ braking power A f A 0 No DB force start Startup DC injection A058 _ braking time 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 No s DB time start DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz A059 carrier frequency DB carrier FQ 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 No kHz Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to Max A061 en 0 00 e FQ upper limit Frequency gt 2nd frequency Dad No Hz S A261 upper limit eae as lower limit to 2nd Max 0 00 E FQ upper limit M2 quency T 4 28 g A062 Frequency lower limit 0 00 Starting frequency to Frequency upper 0 00 FQ lower limit limit f 2nd frequency lower P No Hz a S A262 limit ere frequency to 2nd frequency 0 00 FQ lower limit M2 UPP 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 10 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default mee Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation Jump frequency 1 cs Jump FQ1 Center oog Jump frequency A064 width 1 0 50 Jump FQ1 W
281. e gt FW FREQ adjuster ETo enter the RUN command frequency reference in a combination of Sources from the Digital Operator and the control circuit terminal block 3 3 The RUN command frequency reference sources can be selected individually from the Digital Operator as well as the control circuit terminal block 3 2 LCD Display 3 2 LCD Display Backlight There are two backlight colors in the LCD display white and orange They reflect the state of the inverter as follows White Normal not related to inverter driving stop Orange Warning Parameter mismatch White lt gt Orange Alternate blinking for one second The heeameds ALARM LED Details of LCD Display The first line of LCD monitor always displays the Display Mode the Motor Selected the Inverter RUN Status and the Display Selection Inverter RUN Status Display Selection Display Mode Motor Selected Foot 2 00Hz a MONITOR A Monitor A mode MONITOR B Monitor B mode FUNCTION Function mode Display Mode TRIP Trip error mode WARNING Warning mode Alarm OPTION LCD Configuration Mode M1 Motor 1 SET multifunction OFF ween M2 Motor 2 SET multifunction ON STOP Stopped Inverter RUN Status FWD Forward running REV Reverse running ALL Display all UTL Function individual display Display Selection b037 USR User setting display CMP Data compare display BAS Basic disp
282. e to S l 0 Yes Windw comp O min Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limit levels b062 O hysteresis width Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes Windw comp O hys Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Window comparator Set an upper limit level Ol upper limit level Setting range 0 to 100 pues Windw comp Ol Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 109 ves Te max width x 2 Window comparator Set a lower limit level Ol lower limit level Setting range 0 to 100 5 ae Windw comp Ol Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis YES min width x 2 Window comparator Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Ol hysteresis width limit levels b065 Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes Windw comp Ol EEA ae Si Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit 2 hys D level x 2 5S O Window comparator Set an upper limit level O2 upper limit level Setting range 100 to 100 5 pee Windw comp 02 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 199 Yes A max width x 2 Window comparator Set a lower limit level O2 lower limit level Setting range 100 to 100 b Do6 Windw comp 02 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 199 Yes a min width x 2 Window comparator Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower O2 hysteresis width limit levels b068 Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes Windw comp 02 Sete Lo es Upper li
283. e LADSTOP 00 OFF Disabled 132Fh selection b045 RW 01 ON Enabled E Reverse rotation 00 OFF Disabled tech prevention selection b046 RW 01 ON Enabled E 1331h to Not used 1332h 00 CT Constant torque o 1333h Dual rate selection b049 R W 01 VT Variable torque 00 OFF Disabled Selection of non stop 01 V Cnst STOP Enabled 1334h function at momentary b050 R W Deceleration stop power interruption 02 NS1 Enabled without recovery 03 NS2 Enabled with recovery Starting voltage of egaa toe ee unten b051 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 V momentary power interruption Starting deceleration level 1336h 9f non stop function at bos2 Rw 0 0to 1000 0 0 1 V momentary power interruption 1337h Deceleration time of n R W non stop function at 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s momentary power b053 1338h interruption LOW R W 4 196 suonoun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Registe Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes olu No code tion Deceleration starting width of non stop function at 0 01 1339h b054 R W 0 00 to 10 00 momentary power Hz interruption Proportional gain setting of 133ah non stop function at b055 R W 0 00 to 2 55 0 01 momentary power interruption Integral time setting of 133Bh non stop function at b056 R W_ 0 000 to 65 535 0 001 s momentary power interruption 133Ch to Not u
284. e error code is displayed on the data display In this case refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations and make the necessary changes to remedy Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters e Set parameter No b084 to 2 and set parameter No b180 to 1 Parameter Settings Set the parameters required for a test run y e Set the motor capacity selection H003 and the motor pole number selection H004 No load Operation Start the no load motor via the Digital Operator y e Display parameter No F001 set the output frequency using the key key and the key and press the key to confirm the change Then press the key to rotate the motor Actual Load Operation Connect the mechanical system and operate via the Digital Operator y e If there are no difficulties with the no load operation connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate via the Digital Operator Operation Refer to Chapter 4 Functions and set the necessary parameters 3 4 Operation 3 4 Operation 1 Changing the Display Modes LCD digital operator has four display modes which can be changed from one to another by pressing the or 2 key at Navigation level Moreover there are 3 other models called Read mode Write mode and Option mode In any display mode it moves to
285. e frequency set in starting frequency selection b030 and searches for a point where frequency and voltage are balanced to restart the Inverter while holding current at the Active Frequency Matching restart level b028 If the Inverter trips with this method reduce the b028 set value T FRS Output current m x Decelerates according to b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected in b030 Motor rotation F speed 003 4 45 4 2 Function Mode Input Power Supply Phase Loss Protection Function Selection This function outputs an alarm when the Inverter s input power supply has phase loss Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Input phase loss protection 00 OFF Disabled selection 01 ON Enabled 90 _ b006 Phase loss may cause the Inverter to fail as follows e The main capacitor ripple current increases resulting in remarkable reduction in the capacitor s service life When load is applied the Inverter s internal converter or thyristor may be damaged Electronic Thermal Function Causes a trip to protect the motor from overheating Set this according to the motor rated current Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics taking into account the decline of the motor cooling capability at a low speed Outputs an alarm signal before an electronic thermal trip e Rated values will be affected by the HD ND selection
286. e momentary power interruption time 4 42 E A EEA 2 7 4 110 AMI EE A T E 2 7 4 110 analog command hold function 00 eee 4 93 automatic energy saving operation function 4 36 automatic optimum acceleration deceleration 4 36 automatic torque DOOST ee eeeeeeenteeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeee 4 20 B ae base frequency eseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeereeeeeneeenereaes 4 11 Dasic display n a tiie nti aea eee eee 4 56 aia EEA ATE ET E 4 76 binary Operation sannin 4 17 Dit Operation sea eea e a a aa 4 18 BOK EPERE E E ETE 4 76 D a data comparison display 4 53 4 55 DC injection braking eee eee eee eeeeeetees 4 24 DC voltage Monitor eee eee eee eee eee teaeeeeeteeeeee 4 7 deceleration time 2 00 eceeeesceeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 4 37 GOTAUING PEE E ensapanchices sna cpaacsarves 4 68 digital operator 2 22 3 3 display selection 3 18 4 53 DWN e A te een TT 4 90 E poo electronic geais sessionen ai aie a a RS 4 129 electronic thermal monitor s es 4 7 EMG iii cts pavcs ides a RaR Jaraa emergency shutoff end FrEQUONCY eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteneeseeeseneeneeeeeeeaes ONO ratlOr 3 E dacks Meh alackl ei EXCESS SPCOC eecceeeescceceeeeseceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesensenees EXT oS E E E eee eeecinoes extended function mode external analog input cece eee eee
287. e programming output 5 49 MO6 Drive programming output 6 50 IRDY Operation ready signal Operation ready signal 4 106 51 FWR Forward run signal Forward run signal 4 107 52 RVR Reverse run signal Reverse run signal 4 107 53 MJA Fatal fault signal Fatal fault signal 4 107 54 WCO Window comparator O 55 WCOI Window comparator Ol Window comparator function 4 66 56 WCO2 Window comparator O2 63 OPO Option board output Output controlled from option board Related functions C021 to C025 C026 Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection eYou can set NO or NC contact output individually for multi function output terminals 11 to 15 as well as the relay output terminal e Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 provide open collector output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output 00 NO C031 to C035 terminal 11 to 15 contact 00 01 NC selection 00 NO contact between AL2 NC C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 contact at AL1 01 contact selection 01 NC contact between AL2 NO contact at AL1 4 96 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Specifications of Multi function Output Terminals 11 to 15 Below are the specifications of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 Inside or EA FR C031 to C035 set values Power Oe Electrical characteristics supply status ON Between each terminal and CM2 00 ON OFF Vol
288. e selection 02 On in Trip Enabled only during trip Reset 99 Vee E 4 137 fo when the power is ON 03 Trip RESET Trip reset only 00 0 Hz start Reset frequency 01 f match Frequency matching start i Gis matching selection 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching 99 No ror restart z C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 110 oO C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes n C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 111 C109 AM bias setting 0 to 100 0 Yes C110 AMI bias setting 0 to 100 20 Yes Eoi C111 Overload warning 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A 4 49 level 2 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current C121 O zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Faciory Yes z default c Factor z C122 Ol zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Y Yes _ gt default 3 C123 O2 zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory Yes default 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 47 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Cietes No Function name Monitor or data range n during Unit Page i 9 operation C130 Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C131 Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C132 Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C133 Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C134
289. e time 7 c167 opel terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 8 c168 FW terminal response 9 200 x 2 ms 1 time o Multi step speed 4 16 2 C169 position 0 to 200 x 2 ms 0 No ms 4 437 fe determination time 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 49 3 9 Parameter List Parameter x Default Cinge N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page O setting operation 00 OFF Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 ON STOP 00 No 4 111 02 ON Rotation Hoo2 Motor parameter 00 Standard motor parameter 00 selection 4 111 01 Auto tuning parameter No o 4 113 2nd motor 02 Auto tuning parameter 4 115 H202 parameter selection online auto tuning enabled 00 H003 Motor capacity Factory selection default 0 20 to 160 0 No kW H203 2nd motor capacity Factory 4 19 selection default s 4 111 Motor pole number 4 115 H004 Selection 4 4 118 i 2 4 6 8 10 No Pole H204 2nd motor pole 4 number selection H005 Speed response 1 590 4 89 0 001 to 80 000 Yes H205 2nd speed response 1 590 4 92 H006 Stabilization 400 parameter 5 H206 eae A 0 to 255 100 Yes 4 120 oO S F a H306 3rd stabilization 100 2 parameter Depends H020 Motor parameter R1 one motor capacity 0
290. e trip screen will be displayed from any display modes In Option Mode Read Mode and Write Mode the LED or WARNING LED will light up 3 6 uonesado Operation 3 4 Operation 2 Option Mode 1 Please press A and J key at the same time to enter into the OPTION MODE The cursor will appear in the first row of Cee ee the Option Mode menu Use A or key to move between the option Mode menu To return to the navigator layer press the m key 2 Select the Language option and press the key The cursor will appear in the Language option value Use the or key to select the value to set Press the key to store the new value Press the _ key to cancel the new value And then 3 The cursor will appear in the second row 2 Date and Time 4 Pressing the key it enters to the Date and Time layer Use the EA or L key for moving between the Day Month Year Hour etc data When the cursor is over the selected data pressing or key to change the value The change will be stored after pressing the 4 key The settings available in this mode are Language aera 1 2 3 Read Lock 4 INV Type Select 5 R W Storage Mode 6 7 8 9 Backlight Auto off Backlight Flicker Operator Reset Check Mode Use A or
291. eacceaectaass soft lock Stabilization parameter eseese Start freqUenCy eesseesersersersrrsrrsrnrrrerrernrrnresrnrrreensee Start ratl naa anh whitch a ees Start Tool AEE T aebaranvenceaan starting contact signal starting frequency eee ee eee eee tee eeeeteeetneeeaes Stop key SeleCtION o oo eee etcetera eee eee stop SCICCTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeees Index 3 T EeEEeEEEEEEEE gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt E gt gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt EEEEeE a LOSE TUM os re aranan aaia E a A E e a REEE des 3 4 tNERMISION a a ele 4 75 IM E E E T TEE 4 48 aA E E T ac 4 58 torque bias MOnItOT eeeeeeeereeeeerrieerrrreerrreerreenes 4 3 torque DOOSt e E A E ee E ETE 4 19 torque LADSTOP function ee ee eee reece 4 59 torque limitei iina aae ea r a 4 57 torque reference MON tOT eee ee eee eects 4 3 total RUN tH eare anaana aaa E aeaa er 4 4 USEF PATAMEIEN isciani eiea eal anae an enanat 4 57 USEF selection serieren aaraa ara araa raTa ETa REEI A 4 53 USP TN E E E AE A A V Vaen ee er a a arn Glee dat 4 124 W Aa ESE E E ET wiring control circuit terminals wiring the main circuit terminals ee 2 11 Z pauu ZO N 4 101 OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 0 23 568 13 00 Fax 31 0 23 568 13 88 industrial omron eu Au e Bel o Cz o 5
292. ection C012 Multi function input 2 00 operation selection a C013 Multi function input 3 00 w operation selection E C014 Multi function input 4 00 2 operation selection 2 Multi function input5 00 NO S A aos operation selection 01 NC 00 No 4 81 g C016 Multi function input 6 00 2 operation selection coi7 Multi function input 7 00 operation selection C018 Multi function input 8 00 operation selection C019 FW terminal 00 operation selection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 42 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection C023 Multi function output terminal 13 selection C024 Multi function output terminal Multi function output terminal 14 selection C025 Multi function output terminal 15 selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FA3 set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal durin
293. ectric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated SP POPS gt Safety Precautions CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals PD 1 P N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a s
294. ed RUN commands EW RV IO ORT terminal on Output frequency 2 1 Orientation speed setting P015 3 Position ready range setting P017 A Z pulse i i POK signal _ on 4 Position ready delay time setting P018 1 When the RUN command is turned on with the ORT terminal turned on the Inverter accelerates to the orientation speed P015 and then performs constant speed operation If the RUN command is turned on during operation the operation speed changes to the orientation speed when the ORT terminal is turned on 2 After the orientation speed is reached the Inverter shifts to the position control mode when the first Z pulse is detected 3 During forward run position control is performed with a target value of Orientation stop position P014 one rotation During reverse run with a target value of Orientation stop position P014 two rotations In this step the higher the position loop gain P023 the shorter the deceleration time regardless of the deceleration time setting 4 After the remaining number of pulses reaches the position ready range setting P017 the Inverter outputs the POK signal after the position ready delay time setting P018 elapses The POK output remains until the ORT signal is turned off After positioning is completed the servo lock status remains until the RUN command is turned off Speed control Position control a Note 1 Do not set a high freq
295. educed torque characteristics within a range from 10 to 100 of the base frequency The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1 7th power of the frequency Period c Provides constant voltage characteristics within a range from the base frequency to the maximum frequency suoloun4 Free V f Setting e You can set desired V f characteristics by setting 7 points of voltage and frequency b100 to b113 e The free V f frequencies should always be 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt 5 lt 6 lt 7 All the default settings are 0 Hz You must set Free V f setting 7 first Operation is disabled by factory default elf the free V f setting is enabled the functions of torque boost A041 A241 base frequency A003 A203 A303 and maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 are disabled Free V f frequency 7 is regarded as the maximum frequency Parameter No Function name Data Description Default setting Unit b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 b102 Free V f frequency 2 O to Free V f frequency 3 b104 Free V f frequency 3 O to Free V f frequency 4 b106 Free V f frequency 4 O to Free V f frequency 5 Sarde rte 0 Hz b108 Free V f frequency 5 O to Free V f frequency 6 b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 b101 Free V f voltage 1 b103 Free V f voltage 2 b105 Free V f voltage 3 b107 Free Vif voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 R 0 0 v b1
296. eed 4 106 C039 ae load detection 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A amp 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current E LOC out level Overload warning 00 ACC DECICST Enabled during 2 Sianal outhutmode acceleration deceleration constant 3 c040 a a speed 01 No 2 Overload Warm 01 Const Enabled only during constant 5 mode speed D 4 49 2 0 0 Does not operate Overload warning 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated C041 level 0 4 to 55 kW c irenit No A Overload warn level 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 30 xipueddy Level and output terminal status Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C042 Arrival frequency during acceleration FQ arrive accel 1 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz C043 Arrival frequency during deceleration FQ arrive decel 1 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 98 C044 PID deviation excessive level PID deviation 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 No 4 31 C045 Arrival frequency during acceleration 2 FQ arrive accel 2 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz C046 Arrival frequency during deceleration 2
297. eed and Acceleration control 8 20 Not used 00 Trip Operation setting at idle ON Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop P048 moded tection 02 Ignore 00 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for rotation 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 0 speed 30 32 34 36 38 P192 DeviceNet node address 0 to 63 63 MECHATROLINK II Communications e Use these parameters to configure the MECHATROLINK II network when 3G3AX RX MRT unit is used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting 00 32 bytes P195 ML2 frame length 01 17 bytes 00 P196 ML2 node address 21 to 3E 21 4 122 suonun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Functions That Need 3G3AX PG01 Generally the Feedback Option Board 83G3AX PG01 is required for the following two cases e 05 V2 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 e Pulse train frequency input is selected in any of the following parameters 06 pulse train frequency is selected in frequency reference selection A001 eWith 10 operation function result selected in frequency reference selection A001 07 pulse train frequency is selected in operation frequency input A setting A141 or operation frequency input B setting A142 03 pulse train frequency is selected in PID feedback selection
298. eed limit value in 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Hz torque control reverse 00 OFF None 01 OPE Digital Operator P036 Torque bias mode 02 O2 Terminal 02 00 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Enabled when P036 01 00 Sign Signed P038 Torque bias polarity 94 Direction Depends on the RUN 00 selection direction C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 52 ATR torque command input permission Related functions d009 d010 d012 Control Block Diagram Speed limit value ATR terminal P control Speed detection value Speed control Speed monitor Torque limit Torque reference Pulse Train Position Control Mode Reference value for current control The speed control P control operates when a speed detection value exceeds the limit value To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selec tion P012 to 01 pulse train position control Sensor vector control can be selected for 1st control only Select a pulse train position command input mode in pulse train mode selection P013 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P012 V2 control mode selection 01 APR pulse train position control mode 00 Mode 1 pulse train with 90 phase difference P013
299. eis O Visual inspection No faults block no damage Disconnect the wiring of the Inverter main AA Refer to circuit terminal block z Checking the Inverter unit and measure the i Inverter and Main Check the resistance levels i y Converter circuit Converter resistance O between terminals Irive t r unit Analog unit between the R L1 S L2 T L3 and tester n P replacement including terminals P N and between reference the resistor U T1 V T2 W T3 and i Start Stop P N in the range 6 3 Cycle 10 of tester x 19 Check that there is O Capacity no liquid leakage No faults meter Smoothing Check that the f f Reference of capacitor safety valve has Visual inspection the replacement not come outand O period 10years that there are no a bulges Check that there is a apnouma O Acoustic inspection No faults sound during Relay operation Check that there is no rough surface O Visual inspection No faults on the contact 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections life which is not guaranteed 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design 6 4 ueu zuleN pue UOI De
300. eld EN61800 3 2004 1EC61000 4 3 2002 Conducted RF common mode EN61800 3 2004 1EC61000 4 6 2004 Fast Transient EN61800 3 2004 1EC61000 4 4 2004 Surge Power ports EN61800 3 2004 1EC61000 4 5 2001 Voltage Dips and short Interruptions EN61800 3 2004 1EC61000 2 1 1990 The examination was performed by Category C3 LVD Low Voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2003 The year in which the CE marking was affixed 2007 Manufacturer Name OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Control Device Division H Q Address 2 2 1 Nishikusatsu Kusatsu city Shiga pref 525 0035 Japan Date Mev 27 of _ Signed E lkeno j General Manaber Representative in EU Name OMRON Europe B V Address Zilverenberg 2 5234 GM s Hertogenbosch THE NETHERLANDS Date rz Signed 4 IL Sininicota s European Manufacturing Manager App 49 Appendix 4 EC Declaration of Conformity OoOmRON Moser tre Capaciy Remarts Rem lt i 75kW__ Standard A gt ap 150w Standard lt a gt 3G3RX AZI8S 18 SAW Standard lt A gt IGIRX A2220 220kW Standard lt A gt IGIRX A2300 300kw Standard lt A gt pere 3G3RN A2450 Standard IGIRX AIS50 550kW Standard IGIRX AIOSS 3 phase AC3I80 480V 50 60Hz Standard Standard 3GIRX ASTIO Standard 3G3IRX A4150 15 0kW Standard IG3RN AAISS ip 13 skw Standard lt a gt 3G3RX A4220 34 IG3RX A4300 phase ac330
301. en Poast amount at SEN Host Rw oto50 1 startup 0 Hz 1549h to Not used 1550h 1551h FOr PI proportional gain H070 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 switching 1552h EO PI integral gain H071 R W 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 switching 1553h O P proportional gain H072 R W 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 switching 1554h Gain switching time H073 R W 0 to 9999 1 ms 1555h to Not used 1600h Operation selection at 00 Trip Taon option 1 error POO RAN 01 RUN Continues operation E Operation selection at 00 Trip o TOORN option 2 error pone RAN 01 RUN Continues operation 1603h to Not used 160Ah 160Bh Encoder pulses P011 R W 128 to 65535 1 00 ASR speed control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode 160Ch V2 control mode selection P012 R W 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position control mode 00 Mode 1 160Dh Pulse train mode selection P013 R W 01 Mode 2 02 Mode 3 160Eh Orientation stop position P014 R W 0 to 4095 1 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 160Fh Orientation speed setting P015 R W upper limit 120 0 Hz Orientation direction 00 FWD Forward side 16191 setting POIG RW 01 REV Reverse side _ 4611h POSItion ready range P017 R W 0to 10000 1 setting 1612h Position ready delay time poig Rw 0 0010 9 99 0 01 s setting Electronic gear setting 00 FB Position feedback side o 1613h positio
302. en the unshielded section should be kept as small as possible It is better to install the reactor contactor terminal or safety switch in a metal housing with as much HF damping as possible The shield connection to the metal housing should again be made with the smallest possible HF impedance as already described Should no shielded motor cable be available lay the unshielded cable in a metal tube having the best possible shielding effect for example The metal tube should have good HF contact with the frequency inverter and the motor housing e g by means of appropriate clamping Safety grounding always takes precedence over HF grounding If for example a braking chopper rheostat is to be connected to the DC intermediate circuit then this connecting line too must be shielded The shield is to be connected on both sides with a large area e g to the protective ground terminal of the rheostat Follows EMC compliant installation for motor 2 2 Wiring Shielding and grounding layout in control cabinets Observe the requeriments of European standard EN60204 1 Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machinery You get optimum EMC only if you properly arrange and mount the OMRON 3G3RX frequency inverter the appropriate line filter and the other equipment which might be necessary on a metal mounting plate in accordance with the following mounting instructions The following figure shows a 3G3RX 400V 1 5kW inverter installed with a footprin
303. ency shutoff terminals Function of multi function input terminal 1 Reset signal RS NO contact Fixed This signal is used to reset the Inverter and to reset the emergency shutoff trip E37 Function of multi function input terminal 3 Emergency shutoff signal EMR NC contact Fixed This signal is used to turn off the Inverter output without using the built in CPU With this signal input the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip E37 If multi function input terminal 3 has not been connected or disconnected or if the signal logic is not matched the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip E37 After checking the cable connection and the signal logic input the reset signal RS Emergency shutoff trip E37 can be reset only by the reset signal RS via multi function input terminal 1 It cannot be reset with the Digital Operator eTo enable this function set the slide switch SW1 lever in the Inverter to ON With the factory default setting slide switch SW1 is OFF This function is disabled 2 2 Wiring Before operating slide switch SW1 make sure that the input power supply is OFF Slide switch SW1 setting and status of multi function input terminals 1 and 3 Slide switch Multi function input terminal 1 Multi function input terminal 3 site Multi function input 1 Multi function input 1 Multi function input 3 Multi function input
304. ent torque at low During frequency during torque Set a overload limit level lower than that of the torque peed torque limit limit b041 to b044 Low frequency Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 operation A001 A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 HO02 H202 H003 H203 Related functions H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 HO50 H250 H051 H251 HO52 H252 Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is lower than 2 1 kHz the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 To use lower rank motor size than the Inverter set a torque limit value 0041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out a Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 4 116 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 0 Hz Sensorless Vector Control This function enables high torque operation in the 0 Hz range 0 to 3 Hz frequency reference This control method is particularly suitable for applications such as an elevating s
305. ep speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 Drive Programming input 1 MI2 Drive Programming input 2 MI3 Drive Programming input 3 MI4 Drive Programming input 4 MI5 Drive Programming input 5 MI6 Drive Programming input 6 MI7 Drive Programming input 7 MI8 Drive Programming input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG Drive program start NO no allocation annn 1409h Not used 140Ah Not used 4 201 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name nuncion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 140Bh Multi function input 1 C011 R W operation selection 140Ch Multi function input
306. equence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load COPS SPE Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an injury Precautions for Safe Use Precautions for Safe Use installation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places eLocations subject to direct sunlight eLocations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications eLocations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications eLocations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations eLocations subject to corrosive or flammable gases eLocations subject to exposure to combustibles eLocations
307. equirements for each operation method are also given below E To enter the RUN command frequency reference via the Digital Operator This action operates the Inverter via a key sequence of the standard or optional Digital Operator When operating the Inverter only via the Digital Operator the Inverter does not need to be connected to the control circuit terminal block ETo enter the RUN command frequency reference from the control circuit terminal block This action operates the Inverter by connecting the external signals from the frequency setting device starting switch etc to the control circuit terminal block The operation starts by turning ON the RUN command FW RV while the input power supply is turned ON Note that the frequency can be set using a voltage signal or a current signal from the control circuit terminal block which can be selected according to the system For details refer to Control Circuit Terminal page 2 6 Requirements for operation e RUN command Switch Relay etc e Frequency reference External signal e g 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 V DC 4 to 20 mA a Digital Operator Control circuit terminal block H lo IL P24 lt RUN command and switch Frequency referenc
308. er body place an order for the optional cable 3G3AX CAJOP300 EE 3 m e The optional cable should be 3 m or less Using a cable longer than 3 m may cause malfunction Conforming to EC Directives Conforming Standards EMC directive EN 61800 3 2004 e Low voltage directive EN 61800 5 1 2007 g D u 5 Concept of Conformity EMC Directive OMRON products are the electrical devices incorporated and used in various machines or manufacturing equipment For this reason we make efforts to conform our products to their related EMC standards so that the machines or equipment which have incorporated our products should easily conform to the EMC standards The RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN 61800 3 by following the installation and wiring method as shown below Your machines or equipment however vary in type and in addition EMC performance depends on the configuration wiring or location of the devices or control panels which incorporate the EC directive conforming products This in turn does not allow us to confirm the condition and the conformity in which our products are used Therefore we appreciate confirmation of the final EMC conformity for the whole machine or equipment on your own Wiring the Power Supply Keep the ground cable as short as possible Keep the cable between the Inverter and the noise filter as short as possible Connecting a Motor to the Inverter eWhen connecting a motor to the Inverter
309. er monitor TT 0 to 2147483647 1 1035h LOW R d029 1073741823 to 1073741823 when 1036h R Position command monitor HOM HARE isepleciod 1 d029 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 1037h LOW R is selected d030 1073741823 to 1073741823 when 1038h R Current position monitor may HAPE IS SEIECIGO 1 P d030 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 1039h LOW R is selected 103Ah to Not used 1102h 1057h Inverter mode d060 R W 00 to 01 lt Holding Register Number List gt Register Function 5 Function name R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F002 1103h ae HIGH Acceleration time 1 R W 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 1104h F002 LOW F003 1105h OO HIGH Deceleration time 1 R W 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 1106h F003 LOW 4 185 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code Operator rotation direction 00 FWD Forward 1107h selection FO0t oo 01 REV Reverse o 1108h to Not used 1200h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode gt Register Function name Poe oe R W Monitor and setting parameters nes ou No code tion 00 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 Fr guenc reterence 03 RS485 ModBus communication 1201h Aiae y A001 R W 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency
310. ergy saving Operation Function This function automatically minimizes the Inverter output power during constant speed operation and is suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics e g fan pump Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 02 Automatic operation A086 Energy saving response 9 ong 100 0 50 0 accuracy adjustment eTo operate with this function set RUN mode selection A085 to 01 You can adjust the response and accuracy with energy saving response accuracy adjustment A086 Controls the output power at a comparatively slow rate Should rapid load fluctuation like impact load occur the motor may stall resulting in an overcurrent trip Parameter No Function name Data Response Accuracy 0 0 Slow High A086 Energy saving response accuracy adjustment 100 0 Fast Low Automatic Optimum Acceleration Deceleration e The automatic acceleration deceleration function eliminates the need for acceleration deceleration settings during Inverter operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Normal operation 01 Energy saving operation 00 02 Automatic operation A044 A244 A344 b021 b024 b022 b025 A085 RUN mode selection Related functions Conventionally the user had to set an Inverter acceleration deceleration time de
311. erheat warning LOC light load detection signal MO1 Drive programming output 1 45 MO2 Drive programming output 2 46 MO3 Drive programming output 3 i a ye go MO4 Drive programming output 4 48 MO5 Drive programming output 5 49 MO6 Drive programming output 6 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 63 OPO Option board output no Not used When C062 is used to select the alarm code output the multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forcibly changed to ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 Acn Alarm code output respectively 00 21 03 07 01 05 No 4 95 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 28 xipueddy Analog monitor Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C027 FM selection FM Function When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ
312. erminal Torque control is disabled The absolute position control mode disables the STAT terminal Pulse train position control is dis abled The absolute position control mode disables the orientation function However the ORT terminal is used for teaching as described later 4 138 suoloun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Multi step Position Switching Function CP1 CP2 CP3 4 139 By allocating 66 to 68 CP1 to CP3 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select multi step positions 0 to 7 Set position commands in multi step position commands 0 to 7 P060 to P067 If no position command is allocated to the terminals multi step position command 0 P060 is de fined as the position command Position command CP3 CP2 CP1 Multi step position 0 0 0 0 Multi step position 1 0 0 1 Multi step position 2 0 1 0 Multi step position 3 0 1 1 Multi step position 4 1 0 0 Multi step position 5 1 0 1 Multi step position 6 1 1 0 Multi step position 7 1 1 1 When you input a multi step position command you can set the wait time until the terminal input is determined This prevents the transition status from being applied before it is determined You can adjust the determination time in multi step speed position determination time C169 If no input is made during the time set in C169 the data is determined after the set time elap
313. ers again 3 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy i Shuts off the output if the incoming supply voltage drops below the Has the power supply voltage specified level This is because the decreased control circuit stops working Check the incoming power supply Undervolt properly when the incoming supply E09 0 Is the power supply capacity sufficient 4 28 age trip voltage to the Inverter drops Check the power supply Trips when the DC voltage between Has the drives internel charge circuit P and N drops to approximately thyristor been damaged 175 V DC for 200 V class and 345 Check the thyristor V DC for 400 V class Shuts off the output if an error occurs in the CT current detector CT error built into the Inverter Trips if the CT E10 0 The Inverter has a fault Repair Replace output is approximately 0 6 V or more when the power is turned on Shuts off the output and displays an enor theimernal GPU hasworked Is there any large electrical noise source CPU error erroneously or abnormally arona 4 Note If an abnormal value is read E11 0 from EEPROM it may become a CPU error depending on the case Countermeasures against noise The Inverter has a fault Repair Replace 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2
314. erter Inverter j o output j m output i F Free running l ee Free running Motor frequency Frequency rpm Yb matching start PALES k gt i PAS sie t2 gt 0 Hz start Motor frequency rpm E Alarm Output for Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage During Stop e Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm output in case of momentary power interruption or undervoltage e An alarm output continues while Inverter control power supply remains Alarm output for momentary power interruption undervoltage during stop Standard examples 5 to 7 Operation where DC P N is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro To examples 8 to10 suoloun4 Example 5 b004 00 Inverter is stopped Inverter is running Power supply ON TUL T Power supply OFF RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Signal during momentary power interruption IP Example 6 b004 01 Inverter is stopped Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 7 b004 02 Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Na L Signal during momentary 5 power interruption IP power interr
315. ervice life may be shortened 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Pulse Counter PCNT PCC The Inverter can input pulse trains via a multi function input eWith pulse counter monitor d028 you can monitor the total count of input pulses Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function inputs 74 PCNT pulse counter cabo 00s 1 to 8 selection 75 PCC pulse counter clear A Related functions d028 e The total pulse count value cannot be stored After the power is turned on or after reset the counter is reset to zero e Turning on PCC pulse counter clear clears the total count value e The input pulse frequency resolution can be obtained with the following formula This applies to pulse input with a 50 duty ratio The Inverter cannot input frequency higher than the specified frequency resolution It is recommended that you use input frequencies up to 100 Hz For details on input terminal response refer to Input Terminal Response Time page 4 108 Frequency resolution Hz 250 Input terminal response time set values C160 to C168 1 Example When the input terminal response time 1 the frequency resolution 125 Hz Input terminal response time Input pulse ON PONT SFF Counter value 4 94 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Output Terminal Selection eYou can allocate the following functions to any of multi function output terminal
316. es for speed fluctuations resulting from motor temperature changes when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method To use this function set thermistor selection b098 to 02 NTC With other thermistors and settings the motor temperature cannot be detected correctly Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P025 Secondary resistance compensation enable disable selection 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Enabled 00 4 114 suoiloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Motor Parameter Selection Set this parameter according to your motor eTo use several motors with a single Inverter in the VC special VP or free V F setting control mode calculate the total capacity of the motors and select the closest value in the motor capacity selection When automatic torque boost is used improper setting of this parameter may result in torque reduction or motor hunting The motor parameters for sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control can be selected from the following three types Motor parameter of a standard motor Motor parameter measured by offline auto tuning e Arbitrarily set motor parameter For 3rd control motor parameters specified for 1st control are used Parameter No Function name Data Default
317. etting Unit Active Frequency 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW b028 Matching restart 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW Rated current A level Current limit level at Active Frequency Matching restart Active Frequency 0 10 to 30 00 b029 Matching restart Frequency reduction time at Active Frequency 0 50 s parameter Matching restart Starting frequency at Active 00 Off FQ Frequency at interruption b030 01 Max FQ Max Frequency 00 o Frequency Matching restart 02 Set FQ Set Frequency Related functions C021 to C025 C026 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 If an overvoltage overcurrent trip occurs during deceleration momentary power interruption error E16 appears and the motor goes into free run status In this case increase the deceleration time When direct current P N is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro To the Inverter may detect undervoltage at power interruption and then trip If there is any problem with your system set 00 or 02 The Inverter may start at 0 Hz if The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates Even if retry selection b001 is set to Retry 01 to 03 and selection of momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop b004 is set to Disabled 00 or 02 the Inverter trips when the actual momentary power interruption time exceed
318. etting of free run stop se lection b088 This function cannot be simultaneously used with the preliminary excitation function 55 FOC If FOC and SON are both allocated to multi function input terminals priority is given to FOC and SON is disabled SON ON ON FW RV ON ON Does not operate because the SON Output _ terminal is OFF frequency Speed servo lock status Free running Restarts according to b088 Related functions A044 C001 to C008 4 143 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Pulse Train Frequency Input This function allows you to use a pulse train input to the SAP SAN terminals as frequency reference or PID feedback value in each control mode This function can be used in all control modes Set the input frequency at the maximum frequency in pulse train frequency scale P055 The analog input start end function cannot be used To limit the input frequency use pulse train fre quency bias amount P057 and pulse train frequency limit P058 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P055 Pulse train frequency scale no 19 30 0 set the input fregueney atthe 25 0 kHz maximum frequency Po56 Pulse train frequency filter 0 01 to 2 00 Set a filter time constant for 0 10 z time constant pulse train input P057 Pulse train frequency bias 100 to 100 0 amount P058 Pulse train frequency limit O to 100 100 A001 F
319. ettings for this function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 O 02 Switches between O OI terminal AT 01 O 02 Switches between O O2 terminal AT 02 O VR Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used A005 O Ol selection 03 OI VR Switches between OI FREQ adjuster 00 via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 04 02 VR Switches between O02 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 02 only 01 O OI P Auxiliary frequency reference A006 O2 selection not reversible 03 02 O OI PM Auxiliary frequency reference reversible 03 OFF O2 disabled Related functions A005 A006 C001 to C008 4 12 Functions 4 2 Function Mode The frequency reference and reversibility depend on whether 16 AT is allocated to a multi function input and depend on the combination of A005 and A006 as shown below If the frequency reference is reversible the motor runs in the reverse direction when main frequency reference auxiliary frequency reference is less than zero even if the FW Forward terminal is ON Also note that the motor may run in the reverse direction resulting in prolonged acceleration time or other phenomena if the voltage fluctuates around 0 V even with the O2 terminal not connected
320. f Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR N Read and Understand this Manual Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes
321. f match Frequency matching start 6103 e a example 3 00 _ g 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart eTo reset an Inverter trip press the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator or switch the RS terminal from ON to OFF eTo reset via the control circuit terminal block allocate 18 RS to the desired multi function input eWith reset frequency matching selection C103 you can select how to restart the Inverter after reset a frequency matching or 0 Hz start If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching start increase the retry wait time b003 eYou can select an alarm reset timing in reset selection C102 In addition you can enable the reset signal only for alarm resetting during error For the RS terminal only NO contact is available Note Do not use the reset terminal to shut off the Inverter output Reset operation clears the internal data e g electronic thermal BRD counter causing damage to the Inverter Example 1 Example 2 4 87 ee Alarm RS ___ Alarm 4 2 Function Mode Example 3 If 01 frequency matching start is selected in reset frequency matching selection C103 frequency matching start is also enabled when the power is turned on again When C103 00 0 Hz start the retry wait time b003 is ignored Even if frequency matching start is selected however the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if e The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency e
322. fault setting Unit 00 0 Hz start 4 01 f match Frequency matching start _ posg Freer n stop selectioi 02 Actv f match Active Frequency Match 99 ing restart b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 Time before restart 1 0 s b007 Frequency matching lower 0 00 to 400 00 l 0 00 Hz limit frequency setting Set a frequency matching level 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated Active Frequency current 0 4 to 55 kW Bee Matching restart level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated Rated current A current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 s parameter Starting frequency at 00 Off FQ Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max FQ Max frequency 00 Matching restart 02 Set FQ Set frequency Helps stop the motor using a mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic one Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during Inverter output e Allocate 11 FRS to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 e Performs a free run stop FRS while the FRS terminal is turned on When the FRS terminal is turned off the motor restarts after the retry wait time b003 elapses However if RUN command selection A002 is set to 02 Digital Operator the Inverter does not restart To restart the Inverter input the RUN command eYou can select as the Inverter output mode for restart a 0 Hz start frequency matching start or Active Frequen
323. for reverse rotation a When the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator A002 02 F004 Rotation when O2 0 V 00 A062 for forward rotation 01 A062 for reverse rotation 4 29 4 2 Function Mode Frequency Jump Function The frequency jump function helps avoid resonant points of loaded machines Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A063 Jump frequency 1 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 A067 Jump frequency 3 H z A064 Jump frequency width 1 A066 Jump frequency width 2 0 00 to 10 00 0 50 A068 Jump frequency width 3 Related functions C001 to C008 eYou cannot set output frequencies within a jump frequency setting range where the frequency jump function avoids steady operation e The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the acceleration deceleration time during both actions You can set up to three points for the jump frequency re A068 p Ft n068 T A066 A066 Output frequency A067 J A065 p Acceleration Stop Function A063 E A064 Frequency reference pou eWhen the moment of inertia of a machine load is large this function delays acceleration until the motor starting slip is reduced Use this function if an overcurrent trip occurs during startup Does not depend on acceleration pattern selection A097 and works with all acceleration patterns
324. function output C023 R W 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection terminal 13 selection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOGS logic operation output 3 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 C024 R W 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 a 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 MO1 Drive Programming output 1 45 MO2 Drive Programming output 2 3 46 MO3 Drive Programming output 3 Multi function output C025 R W 47 MO4 Drive Programming output 4 terminal 15 selection 48 MOS Drive Programming output 5 49 MO6 Drive Programming output 6 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 Relay output AL2 AL1 C026 R W 63 OPO option board output function selection no Not used When alarm code output is selected in C062 ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forced to be allocated to multi func tion output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 Multi function output ion termin
325. functions even if the FW signal is turned on first However if the JG signal is turned off before the FW signal the motor coasts to a free running stop Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the primary resistance of the motor or by wiring to suppress torque reduction at a low speed range eTo select the automatic torque boost for A041 A241 set motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole number selection HO04 H204 according to your motor Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A041 Torque boost selection 00 Manual torque boost ae A241 2nd torque boost selection 1 Automatic torque boost A042 Manual torque boost voltage 2nd manual torque boost 0 0 ete A242 volta Ratio to the value of AVR voltage 1 0 g selection A082 A342 3rd manual torque boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost frequency A243 2nd ae ag boost 0 0 to 50 0 i 5 q y Ratio to base frequency i a A343 3rd manual torque boost frequency H003 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 0 Factory ai H203 2nd motor capacity selection Ratio to base frequency default H004 Motor pole number selection 2 4 6 8 10 4 Pole H204 2nd motor pole number selection To switch to the 2nd 8rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 19 4 2 Function Mode Manual Torque Boost Outputs the voltage set in A042 A242 A342 or A043 A2
326. g resistor to this terminal 2 12 2 2 Wiring Ground Terminal GS e To prevent electric shock be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor e According to the Electric Apparatus Engineering Regulations the 200 V class Inverter should be connected to the grounding electrodes under type D grounding conditions conventional type 3 grounding ground resistance 100 Q or less the 400 V class Inverter should be connected to the grounding electrodes under type C grounding conditions conventional special type 3 grounding ground resistance 10 Q or less e For the ground cable use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter Make the cable length as short as possible e When several Inverters are connected the ground cable must not be connected across several Inverters and must not be looped Otherwise the Inverters may malfunction Design Your ground bolt installing Screws in the Main Circuit Terminal Block e For the main circuit terminal blocks of 3G3RX A2055 A2075 A4055 A4075 be sure to install the terminal block screw washers with their grooved sides aligned vertically as shown below Not doing so may result in a contact failure or fire Intended terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 PD 1 P N U T1 V T2 W T3 RB 4 ENS CH
327. g momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power ON time over 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FA5 set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG logic operation output 3 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 MO1 Drive programming output 1 45 MO2 Drive programming output 2 46 MO3 Drive programming output 3 47 MO4 Drive programming output 4 48 MO5 Drive programming output 5 49 MO6 Drive programming output 6 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 63
328. gear setting position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 1024 x 2 2048 Position control feedforward gain REF ASR Electronic gear setting position 00 FB selected 4 131 REF 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Position control feedforward gain Position loop gain FB Electronic gear setting position 01 REF selected 4 132 suonun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Motor Gear Ratio Setting Function This function is useful for a system with an optional encoder installed on the machine side Set the number of actual encoder pulses in encoder pulses P011 Set a motor to encoder rpm ratio in motor gear ratio numerator denominator P028 P029 With the above settings the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data is set in the Inverter This function performs speed position detection based on the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data and calculates the orientation stop position based on the number of encoder pulses P011 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P028 Motor gear ratio numerator 1 to 9999 A o Motor gear ratio Set a motor to encoder rpm ratio P029 i denominator P011 Encoder pulses Hes 10 G3909 1024 Pulse Set the number of actual encoder pulses Note
329. gnal ON timing The stop wait time b123 starts at the brake release signal OFF timing eTo use the brake control function allocate the following functions to multi function I O terminals as required eTo input a brake release signal from an external brake to the Inverter allocate the brake confirmation signal 44 BOK to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 76 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode eAllocate the brake release signal 19 BRK to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 Also to use a brake error output signal allocate the brake error signal 20 BER eTo use the brake control function you are recommended to select sensorless vector control A044 03 O Hz sensorless vector control A044 04 or sensor vector control A044 05 so that the Inverter outputs high torque during startup Refer to page 4 21 Parameters Required for Brake Control Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled b120 Brake control selection 01 ON Enabled 00 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a time required for the output current to b121 0 00 Ss release reach the rate of the release current after reaching the release frequency 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a mechanical delay time from when the b122 0 00 s acceleration release signal is output until the brake is released
330. gral gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 H070 POEP an gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H071 For PI integral gain switching 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H072 or aus gain 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 H073 Gain switching time aie gain switching 100 ms lf control gain switching is selected in the multi function input selection turning off the signal selects the gain setting of H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 or H252 Turning on the signal selects the gain setting of HO70 H071 or H072 elf control gain switching is not selected in multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 the gain setting conforms to the status in which the signal is turned off 4 89 4 2 Function Mode UP DOWN Function e This function allows you to change the Inverter output frequency using the UP and DWN terminals of the multi function inputs Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Increases the current speed during the signal 27 UP UP DWN function input period accelerated OFF Keeps the current speed ON Decreases the current speed during the signal 28 DWN UP DWN function input period decelerated OFF Keeps the current speed P b UP DWN function ON Clears the stored UP DWN speed 2 data clear OFF Keeps the stored UP DWN speed Available input terminals C001 to C008 Note Do not turn on off the UP DWN terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise the Inver
331. gramming function it returns to the previous display after read function is completed After pressing the 4 key in any display mode except Read mode and Option mode the parameter settings stored in LCD digital operator are transferred to the inverter If the inverter supports Drive Programming it will be transferred to the inverter automatically after the parameter copy is finished It will return to the previous display after write function is completed R W Storage Mode Quad READ function When the R W storage mode is selected to 02 Quad option it will be possible to handle four sets of inverter pa rameters or read write an Drive Programming program independently In this case LCD digital operator can save four sets of inverter parameters or one set of inverter parameters and one Drive Programming program Please note that one Drive Programming program takes up three sets of inverter parameters which are No 2 No 3 and No 4 Note Refer to LCD Line Digital Operator User s Manual for more information 3 6 Test Run Operation 3 6 Test Run Operation Power On Checkpoints Before Turning On the Power e Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 are wired correctly 3G3RX A20 3 phase 200 to 240 V AC 3G3RX A40 3 phase 380 to 480 V AC e Make sure that the motor output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor correc
332. h the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Torque Bias Function This function applies bias to the torque reference generated by speed control and is useful for ele vating applications e g elevator Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled 01 OPE Digital Operator P036 Torque bias mode 02 O2 Terminal O2 00 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Enabled when P036 01 gt 00 Sign Signed P038 Torque pias polarity 01 Direction Depends on the RUN 00 selection RP direction Related functions d010 1 When torque bias is set to the O2 terminal 10 to 10 V is recognized as 200 to 200 2 When 00 As per sign is selected When the polarity of a torque bias signal is the torque increases for forward rotation and when it is the torque increases for reverse rotation regardless of the RUN direction e When 01 Depends on the RUN direction is selected The torque bias signal polarity and torque bias direction vary depending on the RUN command direction Forward command Applies torque in the same direction as the torque bias Reverse commana Applies torque in the opposite direct
333. hanged when terminal SFT is ON g 02 Lock Data other than b031 cannot be Q b031 Soft lock selection changed 01 No 4 51 03 Only FQ Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 RUN chg mode Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed 2nd 8rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 34 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation bosa RUN time Power ON 9 to 65535 0 No h 4 52 time setting 00 FREE Forward and Reverse are Rotation direction enabled DOSS limit selection 01 FWD Only Forward is enabled a ne E oA 02 REV Only Reverse is enabled Reduced voltage 0 Reduced voltage startup time small to 3 bee startup selection 255 Reduced voltage startup time large c Ne 93 n E 00 All Complete display ro 01 Utilized Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User User setting 00 No 4 53 03 Compare Data comparison display 04 Basic Basic display pog Mal sereen 000 to 202 001 No 4 56 selection User parameter j 00 OFF Disabled b039 automatic setting 01 ON Enabled 00 No 4 57 function selection 00 4 quadrant Four quadrant separate sett
334. haracteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque characteristics 02 Free V f characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 00 Related functions A046 A246 A047 A247 A082 H003 H203 H004 H204 To switch to the 2nd 8rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 1 Refer to Sensorless Vector Control page 4 116 2 Refer to O Hz Sensorless Vector Control page 4 117 Constant Torque Characteristics VC Output voltage is proportional to output frequency While proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency the output voltage is constant from base to maximum frequencies Output voltage 100 4 21 i Output 0 Base frequency Max frequency frequency Hz 4 2 Function Mode Special Reduced Torque Characteristics Special VP Suitable for a fan or pump that requires torque in a low speed range These have VC characteristics only for low deceleration in reduced torque characteristics Output voltage J 100 j VP f yG Output frequency Hz 0 H i i gt 10 of base Base Max frequency frequency frequency 1 J y J J Period a Provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 Hz to 10 of the base E frequency Example If the base frequency is 50 Hz the Inverter provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 to 5 Hz Period b Provides r
335. he parameters in LCD If the same error appears again INV Check Sum digital operator and the App f several times the inverter Error parameters written into the inverter are unmatched is defective Note Note It will happen sometimes when you try to write data into an inverter with different voltage class and capacity Please refer to each inverter instruction manual 5 6 suoieisdo sdueuDd UIeLy Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Opt E6 E7 ion Board Protection Function List OP1 appears when the option board is mounted on option port 1 Digital Operator connecter side and OP2 appears when it is mounted on option port 2 control circuit terminal block side Protection function list when the PG board 83G3AX PG01 is mounted Name Description Error Code Encoder disconnection Shuts off the output and displays an error when the encoder wiring disconnection or connection failure is detected the encoder is E60 0 E70 0 damaged or an encoder except for line driver output is used Shuts off the output and displays an error when the motor rotation Excess speed exceeds the maximum frequency A004 x the overspeed error E61 0 E71 0 detection level P026 Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position Positioning error deviation against the position reference value exceeds 1 000 000 E62 0
336. he power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product 6 1 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection e Basically check the following during operation The motor operates according to the settings There are no errors in the installation environment There are no errors in the cooling system There are no abnormal vibrations or sounds There are no abnormal overheat or discoloration eThere are no abnormal odors eCheck the input voltage of the Inverter during operation using a tester or other equipment There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation e The voltage level between the wires is balanced Cleaning e Always keep the Inverter clean for operation eLightly remove any dirt with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent Note Do not use such solutions as acetone benzene toluene or alcohol for cleaning Doing so may cause the Inverter surface to dissolve or its coating to come off Do not use any detergent or alcohol to clean the Digital Operator display Periodic Inspection eCheck the parts that cannot be checked without stopping operation as well as those that require periodic inspection eContact OMRON Corporation for periodic inspections eCheck that there are no errors i
337. hort circuit bar and connect PLC terminal to the external interface circuit 11 Multi function output Select 5 functions from among 45 and allocate Between each 5 12 them to terminals 11 through 15 terminal and CM2 2 5 13 If an alarm code is selected in C062 terminals Voltage drop 4 V O S 14 11 to 13 or terminals 11 to 14 always output an max at power on g ni 15 alarm factor code e g Inverter trip The signal 215 between each terminal and CM2 always Max allowable 8 Z corresponds to the sink or source logic voltage 27 V DC cg amp s CM2 Multi function output Common terminals for multi function output Max allowable common terminals 11 to 15 current 50 mA AL2 Relay output Select the desired functions from among 45 Contact max AL1 functions and allocate them SPDT contact capacity output AL2 ALO _ 5 By factory default the relay output AL2 AL1 250 V AC 2 A 8 o contact selection C036 is set at NC contact Resistance E between AL2 ALO and NO contact between 0 2 A Induction 8 S ALO Relay output AL1 ALO AL1 ALO B S common 250 VAC 1A Dlr Resistance A n 0 2 A Induction Contact min capacity 100 V AC 10 mA 5 V DC 100 mA Continued to the next page 2 8 g u is Design 2 2 Wiring Lemina Terminal name Description Specifications symbol TH External thermistor Connect an external thermistor to this terminal Allowable input inpu
338. ias Monitor d010 When sensor vector control is selected this monitor displays the torque bias amount currently set in display code d010 Display 200 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Output Torque Monitor d012 Displays an estimated value of the Inverter s output torque Display 200 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Note This monitor is enabled only when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control mode Output Voltage Monitor d013 4 3 Displays the output voltage of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 600 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 V 4 1 Monitor Mode Input Power Monitor d014 Displays the input power instantaneous value of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 W Power ON Time Monitor d015 e Displays the integrated power integrated value of input power of the Inverter The gain conversion of displayed data is performed with integrated power display gain b079 d015 display Input power calculation value kWh Integrated power display gain b079 b079 1 to 1000 Can be set in increments of 1 When integrated power clear b078 is set to 01 pressing the Enter key clears the integrated power value The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input if 53 KHC Integrated power clear is allocated to any of the multi function input terminals Whe
339. ide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Crete Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item status Speed change ratio is a_ Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to set H021 H221 H031 Power negative value parameter x 1 2 runnin iSi g Speed change ratio isa Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually down to set H021 H221 H031 positive value parameter x 0 8 Increase motor parameter R1 gradually up to set H020 H220 H030 Insufficient torque at low Parameter x 1 2 Regeneratign frequency several Hz Increase motor parameter lo gradually up to set H023 H223 H033 parameter x 1 2 During Shockce rs during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 startup startup During Reduce the speed response H005 H205 Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 Reduce motor parameter lo gradually down to set Immediately Overcurrent or parameter x 0 8 H023 H223 H033 after overvoltage protection is deceleration activated Set AVR selection A081 to 00 always ON or 01 A081 always OFF Low frequency Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 operation Related functions A001 A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 H002 H202 H003 H203 H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023
340. idth Jump frequency 2 pees Jump FQ2 Center 9 90 Q Jump frequency 0 0 to 400 0 No Hz Z Jump frequency Jump frequency width 0 0 to 10 0 a A066 width 2 0 50 Jump FQ2 Width D Jump frequency 3 4 30 6 A067 Jump FQ3 Center 9 00 D Jump frequency S A068 width 3 0 50 Jump FQ3 Width Acceleration stop A069_ frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz Accel hold FQ Acceleration stop A070 time 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 No s Accel hold time 00 OFF Disabled A071 E erabIe 01 ON Enabled o No 02 ON Reverse output enabled PID P gain A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 Yes PID I gain A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 Yes s PID D gain A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 Yes S Are eee 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 No Time PID scale convert 4 31 re 00 Ol 5 PID feedback 01 0 x A076 selection 02 Modbus RS485 communication 00 No aL PV source select 03 Pulse Pulse train frequency 10 Math Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value Reverse PID function Feedback value AOE Reverse PID action 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target 90 No gt value PID output limit A078 function 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No PID limit PID feedforward oo A079 selection 2 00 No 4 31 PID F Fwd select veo 03 O2 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 11 Appendix 1 Parameter Lis
341. il start number MSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 2 00 4 Coil start number LSB 00 5 Change data MSB FF 5 Change data MSB FF 6 Change data LSB 00 6 Change data LSB 00 7 CRC 16 MSB 8D 7 CRC 16 MSB 8D 8 CRC 16 LSB 41 8 CRC 16 LSB 41 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 If writing into the coil cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 170 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into the Holding Register O6h gt Writes data into the specified holding register Example Write 50 Hz into the Inverter with slave address 5 as the base frequency A003 The data resolution of the holding register 1203h of the base frequency A003 is 1 Hz To set 50 Hz set the change data to 50 0032h Query Response No Field name Example No Field name rampe HEX HEX 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 2 Function code 06 3 Register start number MSB 2 12 3 Register start number MSB 12 4 Register start number LSB 2 02 4 Register start number LSB 02 5 Change data MSB 00 5 Change data MSB 00 6 Change data LSB 32 6 Change data LSB 32 7 CRC 16 MSB AD 7 CRC 16 MSB AD 8 CRC 16 LSB 23 8 CRC 16 LSB 23 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 If writing i
342. ime 1 time 1 time 2 time2 ftime1 lt gt lt gt lt lt YI _ gt lt gt lt gt F002 F202 A092 A093 A293 F003 F203 FO02 F202 A092 A0937 F003 F203 F302 A292 A393 F303 Aboo K203 A392 Example 3 When A094 A294 is set to 02 FW 2CH 3 Acceleration Deceleration time 2 1 time 1 lt ie A092 A292 F003 F203 1 A392 t F303 i Output i i q frequency H Acceleration Deceleration time 1 i itime 2 gt i j F002 F202 A093 A293 F302 A393 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern e Acceleration deceleration pattern can be set for each system Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A097 Acceleration pattern selection 00 Line 01 S curve 02 U curve 01 A098 Deceleration pattern selection 03 inv U curve 04 EL S curve A131 Acceleration curve parameter 01 small curve to i T A132 Deceleration curve parameter 10 large curve 4 38 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A150 EL S curve ratio 1 during acceleration 0 to 50 10 A151 EL S curve ratio 2 during acceleration A152 EL S curve ratio 1 during deceleration 0 to 50 10 A153 EL S curve ratio 2 during deceleration eTo select an acceleration or deceleration pattern use A097 or A098 respectively eYou can set acceleration and deceleration patterns individually elf any
343. in setting Over V supp P gain 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 Yes b134 Overvoltage protection integral time setting Over V supp l gain 0 000 to 65 535 0 060 Yes 4 78 b164 Auto return initial display Auto return init disp 00 OFF 01 ON 00 No b166 Data Read Write selection Data R W select 00 R W OK Read Write Ok 01 R W Protected Read Write Protected 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 25 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b180 Others Initialize trigger Initialize trigger 00 No action 01 Initialize 00 No C001 Multi function input 1 selection Input 1 Function C002 Multi function input 2 selection Input 2 Function C003 Multi function input 3 selection Input 3 Function C004 Multi function input 4 selection Input 4 Function C005 Multi function input terminals Multi function input 5 selection Input 5 Function C006 Multi function input 6 selection Input 6 Function C007 Multi function input 7 selection Input 7 Function C008 Multi function input 8 selection Input 8 Function MI7 MI8 Drive
344. inal with reset RS setting function only can be set as NO contact Related functions C001 to C008 4 81 2nd 3rd Control Function 4 2 Function Mode eYou can switch between three motors to control the Inverter by allocating 08 SET 17 SET3 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 and then turning on off the SET SET3 terminal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C001 Multi function input 1 selection C002 Multi function input 2 selection C003 Multi function input 3 selection C004 Multi function input 4 selection C005 Multi function input 5 selection C006 Multi function input 6 selection C007 Multi function input 7 selection C008 Multi function input 8 selection 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 82 no RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external t
345. ing iaa 01 TRQ input Terminal switch e 4 57 b040 Torque limit selection 02 O input Analog input 00 No 4 59 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 ane te mode 0 10 200 0 4 1935 KV 4 57 b041 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward power PSO 4 59 no Torque limit disabled 5 running Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW S b042 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No g reverse regeneration no Torque limit disabled a us ee mode 0 t0 200 0 4 t0 55 kW 4 57 b043 a ower 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No 4 59 99 P no Torque limit disabled running Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b044 Four quadrant mode O to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torque LADSTOP 00 OFF Disabled lt ot selection 01 ON Enabled 9 Ne ai Reverse rotation 00 OFF Disabled 7 g one prevention selection 01 ON Enabled 99 Ne gt 459 E 5 00 CT Constant torque a Ta b049 Dual rate selection 01 VT Variable torque 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 35 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b050 Selection of non stop function at momentary power interruption 00 OFF Disabled 01 V Cnst STOP Enabled deceleration stop 02 NS1 Enabled w
346. ing on jogging stop Enabled in operation Torque boost A041 selection 00 TRQ boost sel 00 Manual torque boost No o 2nd torque boost 01 Automatic torque boost A241 selection 00 TRQ boost sel M2 Manual torque boost A042 voltage 1 0 TRQ boost V A 2nd manual torque 2 A242 boost voltage 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 Yes TRQ boost V M2 S 3rd manual torque 4 19 amp A342 boost voltage 1 0 2 TRQ boost V M3 gt Manual torque boost A043 _ frequency 5 0 TRQ boost FQ 2nd manual torque A243 boost frequency 5 0 TRQ boost FQ M2J 2 t0 0 0 ver 26 3rd manual torque boost frequency RoaS TRQ boost FQ S9 M3 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 8 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque V f characteristics characteristics A044 selection 02 Free V f characteristics 00 V F select 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 V2 Sensor vector control 00 VC Constant torque characteristics ond V f 01 VP Special reduced torque No _ 4 21 characteristics characteristics A244 selection 02 Free V f characteristics 00 V F
347. injection braking 01 ON Enabled 01 _ selection 02 ON FQ Frequency control A052 set value 200 215 220 230 240 Selectable for 200 V class A082 AVR voltage selection 380 400 415 440 460 480 200 400 Selectable for 400 V class eNote the following before use Set base frequency A003 and AVR voltage selection A082 according to the specifications of the motor to be measured The motor parameters can be determined for motors with the maximum applicable capacity or one rank lower motor size For motors with other capacities correct constant data may not be obtained In some cases auto tuning may not be completed In this case pressing the STOP RESET key displays an error message elf DC injection braking selection A051 is set to 01 enabled the data cannot be measured correctly Be sure to set to 00 disabled The default setting is 00 disabled elf 02 auto tuning with motor rotation is selected in auto tuning selection H001 note the following eMake sure there is no problem even if the motor accelerates up to approx 80 of the base frequency eThe motor is not driven by external equipment eThe brake is released eDuring auto tuning the output torque is insufficient which may cause an elevator system to slip and fall To prevent this remove the motor from the load machine and perform the auto tuning for the motor separately In this case moment of inertia J is determined for
348. input 6 C006 R W 1407h Multi function selection input 7 C007 R W 1408h Multi function selection input 8 C008 R W 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 OLR overload limit switching 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 82 no RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SETS 8rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi st
349. io c O S A104 Ol end Ol start ratio to 100 100 No o lox D A105 Ol start selection 00 Start FQ Use Ol start frequency A101 00 No ec g Ol start FQ select 01 0 Hz D E O2 start frequency x lt ay A111 02 start FQ 0 00 No Hz adi 400 00 to 400 00 end frequency A112 02 end FQ 0 00 No Hz 5 O2 start ratio P 2 9 4 15 A113 02 start 100 to O2 end ratio 100 No Yo 5 o O2 end ratio r o 2 A114 02 end O2 start ratio to 100 100 No Yo x w Acceleration curve w A131 parameter 02 No O D Accel curve const Q 01 small curve to 10 large curve 4 38 2 Deceleration curve amp A132 parameter 02 No Decel curve const Operation frequency 00 Operator Digital Operator F001 A141 input A setting 01 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 02 No S A input calc FQ Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 O Input O 03 Ol Input Ol Operation frequency 04 Modbus RS485 communication gt A142 input B setting 05 Option 1 03 No na 4 41 2 B input calc FQ 06 Option 2 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency Operator selection 00 ADD Addition A B 5 A143 R Pi symbol 01 SUB Subtraction A B 00 No E y 02 MUL Multiplication A x B oO jon ane fe Frequency addition 0 00 to 99 99 A145 amount 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz Add frequency i i 4 41 Frequency addition 00 eer value to output Aue direction 2 01 SUB Subtract A145 value from output 99 Ne E
350. ion is not available By using the teaching function you can set the position command while running the machine By allocating 73 SPD to a multi function input you can switch between the speed and position controls For data with many digits e g position command only the higher 4 digits are displayed Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Worsontelmeds 02 APR2 absolute position control mode P012 03 HAPR high resolution absolute position 00 selection control mode P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 50 rad s 3 P Position range setting reverse side P060 A ER i to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 d at Position range setting reverse side P061 ME E aie a to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 x Position range setting reverse side P062 aiaa pi to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 m Position range setting reverse side P063 ee oP to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 S os Position range setting reverse side P064 ie a to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 5 Pa Position range setting reverse side P065 ie E PR to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 x ae Position range setting reverse side PO66 bakin a 9p to Position range setting f
351. ion by AX OP0O5 E Parameter No Function name Data Default setting b166 Data read write selection 00 R W OK Read Write OK 01 R W Protected Read Write protected 00 Option I F cmd W Register 1 to 10 When communication option board is used these parameters are used to define a user exchange area with the master unit Refer to especific option board manual for details Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P160 to P169 1to 10 Option I F cmd W register 0000 to FFFF 0000 4 120 suoloun4 4 2 Function Mode Option I F cmd R Register 1 to 10 eWhen communication option board is used these parameters are used to define a user exchange area with the master unit Refer to especific option board manual for details Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P170 to P179 Option I F cmd R register 1 to 10 0000 to FFFF 0000 4 Profibus Communications Functions Use these parameters to define the node address and communication type when 3G3AX RX PRT Profibus unit is used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P180 Profibus node address 0 to 125 P181 Profibus clear mode 00 Clear 00 01 Last value 00 PPO P182 Profibus map selection 01 Conventional 00 02 Flexible mode CompoNet Communications Use these parameters to configure CompoNet network when 3G3AX
352. ion input when 44 is set in any of C001 to C008 the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal to be turned off for the period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without decelerating after the brake release signal is turned off If the brake confirmation signal is not turned off within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 7 after the brake release signal is turned off 7 After the brake confirmation signal is turned off or after the brake release signal is turned off if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts deceleration down to 0 Hz after the period set in stop wait time b123 elapses b0125 Brake release b127 Brake input frequency frequency Output frequency pat i 5 pa gt lt Hs b123 Brake wait time RUN command Jal b121 Brake wait i for stopping i a time for release z Brake release signal 4 b122 Acceleration wait time L Brake confirmation signal 3 _ 6124 Brake confirmation _ 6 _ b124 Brake confirmation Wait time i wait time Note The above operation chart applies to a case where the brake confirmation signal 44 BOK is selected for any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 If BOK is not selected the acceleration wait time b122 starts at the brake release si
353. ion of the torque bias Torque Control suoloun4 Under this function the Inverter can be used in torque control as well as in the speed and pulse train position controls Torque control can be applied to winders and more To run the Inverter in torque control mode allocate 52 ATR to any of the multi function inputs While the ATR terminal is turned on the torque reference input is enabled In torque reference input selection P033 you can select one of the three analog inputs or the input via the Digital Operator The torque control speed depends on the balance between torque and load To prevent the Inverter from running out of control set a speed limit value in P039 forward or P040 reverse Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 O Terminal O 01 Ol Terminal Ol P033 Torque reference input 02 O2 Terminal O2 00 _ selection 03 OPE Digital Operator 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P034 Torque reference setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Torque reference when P033 03 00 Sign Signed P035 Polarity Selecion al 01 Direction Depends on the RUN 00 torque reference via O2 re direction 4 126 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P039 Speed limit value in 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Hz torque control forward P040 Sp
354. ion range specification reverse side to P061 command 1 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 1 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P062 command 2 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 2 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P063 command 3 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 3 268435455 to 268435455 2 Yes 5 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to Z P064 command 4 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 4 268435455 to 268435455 P a z 2 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 2 P065 command 5 Position range specification forward side 0 5 Position set 5 268435455 to 268435455 lt Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to PO66 command 6 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 6 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P067 command 7 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 7 268435455 to 268435455 Zero return mode 00 Low Speed P068 Homing mode select 01 High speed 1 00 Yes g 02 High speed 2 Zero return direction P069 selection oQ FWD Forward side 00 Yes ee 01 REV Reverse side Homing direction 2nd 3rd c
355. ips the Inverter displaying E13 if the power is turned on with the RUN command to the Inverter turned on Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Does not start the Inverter with the power turned on while the RUN command is input 13 USP USP function Starts the Inverter with the power turned on while the OFF as RUN command is input Available input terminals C001 to C008 eTo reset a trip perform the reset operation or turn off the RUN command Example 1 e f a trip is reset with the RUN command input turned on the Inverter restarts operation immediately after the trip is reset Example 2 lf the RUN command is turned on after the power is turned on the Inverter operates normally Example 3 e Allocate 13 USP to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 84 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Example 1 Power supply FW USP RS Alarm Output frequency The following shows how the power recovery restart prevention function works ea a a Power Power supply supply g l FW a ee USP USP s __ 1 as et a e Goo a e Output Z Output M frequency frequency Commercial Switching 4 85 eYou can use this function to drive a system with large moment of inertia during acceleration and deceleration by using the Inverter and during constant speed by using a commercial power supply e Allocate 14 CS to
356. item other than Line A097 A098 00 is selected for the acceleration deceleration pattern the acceleration deceleration time is prolonged when this function is used with analog input A001 01 Pattern Selection Select an acceleration deceleration pattern with reference to the following table Set values Parameter AE 00 01 02 03 04 No Line S shape U shape Inverted U shape EL S shape a Ey a gt gt ao97 g E 8 Acceleration 2 3 2 2 a fe fe fe 6 6 Time Time Time Time Time 3 g 3 gt 3 A098 Deceleration amp 2 Fi Z ES ie O 6 6 6 Time Time umg Time Time Accelerates Helps prevent the Helps with tension control and roll break Provides shockless Decelerates collapse of cargo prevention for a winding machine etc start stop as with Description linearly before on the elevating the S pattern but p reaching the set machine or the intermediate output frequency conveyor section is linear value 4 39 4 2 Function Mode Pattern Curve Parameter Curve Factor Determine a curve factor with reference to the figures below Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Target Target Target frequency frequency frequency 100 gt 100 gt mpa i 100 gt 96 9 99 6 A gee 82 4 ee aS 68 4 64 6 65 Ce ey ee 35 4 31 6 12 5 17 6 6 25 3 1 0 39 25 50 75 i Time 25 50 75 i Time 25 50 75 Time Accelerati
357. ithout recovery 03 NS2 Enabled with recovery 00 No b051 Starting voltage of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 0 to 1000 0 220 440 No b052 Stop deceleration level of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 0 to 1000 0 360 720 No b053 Others Deceleration time of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 01 to 3600 00 1 00 No b054 Deceleration starting width of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 No Hz b055 Proportional gain setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 Yes 4 60 b056 Integral time setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 000 to 65 535 0 100 Yes 4 63 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 36 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default cles Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation Set an upper limit level b060 Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 l 100 Yes O upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 poSI O lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit
358. ive to an external 100 frequency reference of 10 to 10 V O2 start ratio to 100 A114 O2 end ratio Set an end ratio relative to an external 100 frequency reference of 10 to 10 V Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 Below is the ratio from 10 to 10 V Example 3 10 to 0 V 100 to 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 e For example to input voltage ranging from 5 to 5 V on the O2 L terminal set A113 to 50 and A114 to 50 Forward max frequency 10 A112 100 A113 A114 100 Analog input A A111 10 V 02 Reverse max frequency O O2 OI Sampling eYou can set the built in filter applied to frequency setting signals of the external voltage current input Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 1 to 30 A016 O O2 Ol sampling 31 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz 31 hysteresis Related functions A011 to A016 C001 to C008 Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit eSet a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise Note that the larger the data value is the slower the response time This parameter specifies a filter time constant for a set value of 1 to 30 x 2 ms eWhen 31 is selected a filter time constant of 500 ms and a hysteresis of 0 1 Hz are set Factory default 4 15 4 2 Function Mode Multi step Speed Operation Function eYou can set RUN speeds using codes and s
359. l data Range Initial data 00 VC Const torque Vit A044 on VP Reduced torque 00 VC Const torque p o 02 Free V F 00 Const 00 Const characteristi A244 01 VP Reduced torque os selection A344 03 SLV sensorless vector torque 02 Free V F torque 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless 05 V2 Sensor vector ae nos4 Oto 100 0 4 to 55kW 50 0 4 55KW 0 to 70 0 4 to 55kW 50 0 4 55kW Sher 0 to 80 75 to 132kW 40 75 132kW 0 to 50 75 to 132kW 40 75 132kW Startup DC injection A057 0 to 100 0 4 to 55kW 0 0 to 70 0 4 to 55kW 0 braking 0 to 80 75 to 132kW 0 to 50 75 to 132kW 7 power DC injection braking A059 0 5 to 15 0 kHz 0 4 55kW 5 0 kHz 0 5 to 12 0 kHz 0 4 55kW 3 0 kHz carrier 0 5 to 10 0 KHz 75 132kW 0 4 55kW 0 5 to 8 0 kHz 75 132kW frequency Electronic 0 20 to 1 00 x Rated Rated current 0 20 to 1 00 x Rated Rated current b012 thermal level current A current A Overload b022 0 20 to 2 00 x Rated limit level b222 current A 0 4 55kW 1 50 x Rated 0 20 to 1 50 x Rated 1 20 x Rated Overload 0 20 to 1 80 x Rated current A current A current A limit level 2 b025 current A 75 132kW Carrier b083 0 5 to 15 0 KHz 0 4 55kW 5 0 kHz 0 5 to 10 0 kHz 0 4 55kW 3 0 kHz frequency 0 5 to 10 0 kHz 75 132kW 0 4 55 kW 0 5 to 8 0 kHz 75 132kW Motor j H003 Depends on One size up a H203 0 2 to 160 kW type 0 4 to 160 kW than HD
360. l sized wires are connected to one pole 0 14 to 0 5 mm 0 14 to 1 0 mm If two equal sized wires are connected to one pole 0 14 to 0 2 mm 0 25 to 0 5 mm 5mm 0 22 to 0 25 Nem screw size M2 External controler d oo d y e SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN ESetting RS485 communication requires the following settings Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 02 Loop back test Communication speed 03 2400 bps C071 selection 04 4800 bps 05 Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps C072 Communication station 1 to 247 A _ No selection Communication bit 7 7 bit anys length selection 8 8 bit B m gees i 00 No parity co74 Communication party 01 Eyen 00 a 02 Odd Communication stop bit 1 1 bit coe selection 2 2 bit 1 _ 00 Trip nae 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop coza Communication error 02 Ignore 02 z 03 Free RUN Free run stop 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 Communication 0 00 s timeout disconnection judgment time 4 146 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C078 Communication waittime 0 to 1000 Time to wait for response from the 0 m Inverter Communication method 00 ASCII ea selection 01 ModBus RTU oi _ Related functions A001 A002 Communication Test
361. lay 3 4 uonesado Operation 3 3 Test Run Procedure 3 3 Test Run Procedure ae Reference Item Description page Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions 2 1 e Make sure that the installation conditions are met y Wiring and Connection Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices 2 5 e Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications and wire correctly Power On Check the following before turning on the power e Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 are wired correctly e 3G3RX A2D 3 phase 200 to 240 V AC e 3G3RX A40 3 phase 380 to 480 V AC e Make sure that the motor output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor correctly e Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off e Set the motor to no load status i e not connected to the mechanical system e After checking the above turn on the power y Display Status Check Make sure that there are no faults in the Inverter y e When the power is turned on normally the display shows e RUN LED indicator OFF ALARM LED indicator OFF POWER LED indicator ON e Data display Displays the set value in d001 e If an error occurs th
362. lection A039 R W 03 FRS RUN Free running on jogging stop Enabled in operation 04 DEC RUN Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DB RUN DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation 123Ah Not used 4 188 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name FuneHon R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes oly No code tion 123Bh Torque boost selection A041 R W 90 Manvel torque poosi 01 Automatic torque boost taai Oua aroe boos Ao42 Rw 0 0t020 0 0 1 voltage 123Dh Manual torque boost A043 Rw 0 0 to 50 0 0 4 frequency 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque V f characteristics characteristics 123Eh s lection A044 R W 02 Free V f characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 V2 Sensor vector control 123Fh Output voltage gain A045 R W 20 to 100 1 Automatic torque boost 1240h voltage compensation A046 R W 0 to 255 1 gain 1241h AUtomatic torque boost A047 RW 0to 255 1 slip compensation gain 1242h to Not used 1244h 00 OFF Disabled DC injection braking 01 ON Enabled teen selection A051 RAN 02 ON FQ Frequency control A052 set a value iaer DO iniecion braking A052 R W 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 frequency Hz 1247h m
363. lerates during regeneration b022 Overload limit level 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated 1 50 x Rated A current 0 4 to 55 kW current 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated 1 50 x Rated b025 Overload limit level 2 current 75 to 132 kW current A b023 Overload limit parameter 1 00 s 0 10 to 30 00 b026 Overload limit parameter 2 1 00 s 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during Overload waning Riana acceleration deceleration constant C040 ik oe g speed 01 P 01 Const Enabled only during constant speed C041 Overload warning level 0 0 Does not operate Rated current 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current A C111 Overload warning level 2 75 to 132 kW Rated current Outputs OL and OL2 signals when reaching the overload warning level Related functions C001 to C008 C021 to C025 C026 Overload Limit 4 49 The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation in order to lower output frequency automatically according to the overload limit parameter once the motor current reaches the overload limit This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during acceleration or caused by rapid load fluctuations during constant speed operation eYou can set two types of overload limit functions in b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 eTo switch between b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 allocate 39 OLR to a multi
364. leration and Overvoltage suppression function during deceleration to suppress overvoltage trip during deceleration Therefore the RX Series provides tough operational capabilities regardless of the severe time setting of acceleration and deceleration Various Applications Sensor less Vector Control at 0 Hz The RX Series provides sensor less vector control which is useful for up down applications It can provide a high torque of 150 even at a speed reference of 0 Hz 150 torque is available when the Inverter capacity is increased by one rank This function contributes to simplification of control programs and extension of the service life of the brake Emergency Shutoff Function By switching the dedicated switch SW1 this function enables you to change the multi function input input 3 to the emergency shutoff input You can directly turn off a motor control power module without operating the software This function simplifies construction of safety applications Built in Braking Circuit up to 22 kW The Inverter models with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a braking transistor enabling space saving configuration for applications that need rapid acceleration and stop Restart Speed Search Function For a free running motor e g a fan motor this function checks the direction of rotation and frequency enabling smooth restart of the motor High torque Multi operation The RX Series enables balanced torque control for the whole
365. ling 44 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz hysteresis 2 ne pF ers Drive Programming 0 Disable A017 EzSQ Selection 1 PRG start 00 No 2 Always ON 2 A019 Multi step speed OG Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals 00 No 4 16 2 selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals e Multi step speed 3 A020 reference 0 0 00 to Max Frequency A004 6 00 Yes Hz n 2nd multi ste a A220 P 0 00 to Max Frequency A204 6 00 Yes Hz ae speed reference 0 4 16 wn 5 A320 3rd multi step speed 0 00 to Max Frequency A304 6 00 Yes Hz 5 reference 0 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 25 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Multi step speed Ae reference 1 0 99 Multi step speed BOS reference 2 0 00 Multi step speed A023 reference 3 O00 Multi step speed cis reference 4 0 09 Multi step speed A025 reference 5 9 90 Multi step speed POSG reference 6 oe Multi step speed Aver reference 7 9 09 A028 Multi step speed 0 00 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 16 reference 8 i i al A029 Multi step speed 0 00 c reference 9 D D S Ao30 Multi step speed 0 00 a reference 10 oO o i 2 A031 Multi
366. llocated to multi function inputs Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes lt Analog input mode gt Sets a torque limit value depending on the voltage applied to terminal O2 on the control terminal block 0 to 10 V correspond to torque limit values of 0 to 200 Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes lt Option option 1 option 2 mode gt Enabled when an optional 3G3AX DI01 board is used For details refer to the optional board instruction manual elf the torque limit enable function TL is set for a multi function input the torque limit function set in b040 is enabled only when TL is turned on When TL is off the torque limit setting is disabled and the maximum value is defined as the torque limit value Unless the torque limit enable function TL is set for a multi function input the torque limit function set in torque limit selection b040 is always enabled e With this function the torque limit value is set with the Inverter s maximum output current as 200 This means output torque varies depending on the combination of motors Note that the torque limit value is not the absolute one eWhen the torque limit signal is selected in the multi function output selection the torque limit signal is turned on when the above torque limit function is activated e The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with 00 four quadrant separate setting selected in torque limit selection b0
367. lt in injury and or damage to the equipment 3 When the target position is reached press the Enter key on the Digital Operator Press the key on the data display screen the PRG LED indicator is lit 4 142 suoloun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 The current position is set to the area corresponding to the position command source set in teaching selection P074 However the P074 setting is not stored After the power is shut off or after reset this parameter is indicated as 00 x00 P074 set values Position commands to be set 00 PO60 Multi step position command 0 01 P061 Multi step position command 1 02 P062 Multi step position command 2 03 P063 Multi step position command 3 04 P064 Multi step position command 4 05 P065 Multi step position command 5 06 PO66 Multi step position command 6 07 P067 Multi step position command 7 Servo ON Function This function brings the Inverter into speed servo lock status via an input terminal when 05 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 Allocate 54 SON to the desired multi function input The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the SON terminal is turned on when SON is allocated If the SON terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter goes into free run status When the SON terminal is turned on again the Inverter restarts according to the s
368. m offline auto tuning to determine the motor parameters eTo use the online auto tuning function described later be sure to perform offline auto tuning in advance This function is applicable to 1st 2nd control not to 3rd control For motor parameters the Inverter inputs data on one phase of Y connection at 50 Hz Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 ON STOP 00 02 ON Rotation 00 Standard motor parameter 01 Auto tuning parameter H002 H202 Motor parameter selection i 00 02 Auto tuning parameter Online auto tuning enabled H003 H203 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 00 Factory default kW Motor pole number H004 H204 selection 2 4 6 8 10 4 Pole H030 H230 Motor parameter Ri i gioas 585 Depends anaien S auto tuning data motor capacity H031 H231 Motor parameter R2 0 001 to 65 535 Depends on the Q auto tuning data motor capacity 4 111 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H032 H232 Motor parameterL 01 to 655 35 Depends oo tne j auto tuning data motor capacity H033 H233 Motor parameter IO 0 01 to 655 35 Depends on the A auto tuning data motor capacity H034 H234 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 Depends onthe kgm auto tuning data motor capacity A003 Base frequency 30 to Max frequency 50 Hz 00 OFF Disabled A051 DC
369. mand selection 22 b037 Display selection 8 A003 Base frequency 23 b083 Carrier frequency 9 A004 Maximum frequency 24 b084 Initialization selection 10 A005 O OI selection 25 b130 Overvo Hage protection function selection during deceleration 11 A020 Multi step speed reference 0 26 b131 Overvoltage protectionilevel during deceleration 12 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 27 C021 PAE AuDeNON ourpurterinidal I selection 13 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 28 C022 Multifunction output terminal 12 selection 14 A023 Multi step speed reference 3 29 C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 contact 15 A044 V f characteristics selection Related functions U001 to U012 Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON You can select the Digital Operator screen to be displayed at power on among the following items By factory default 01 d001 is selected Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b038 Initial screen selection 000 to 202 001 Note With 00 screen on which the Enter key was last pressed selected if the last screen is other than d or F the entrance of each group is displayed Example When the power is turned off and then on after a change in the A020 setting A is displayed 4 56 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode User Parameter Automatic Setting Function eWhen user parameter automatic setting function b039 is se
370. mbient i Is the ambient temperature high temperature Decrease the ambient temperature Is there any large electrical noise source Gate arra around ay Trips when a fault is detected in Countermeasures against electrical communi aise cations communication behavior between E23 0 noise pio the built in CPU and the gate array Has any internal cable been disconnected Check the connector 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 3 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy ee Prevents Inverter damage due to Is there any input power supply phase input phase loss when the input loss Input open phase loss protection selection is F240 Check the input wiring o phase trip enabled b006 01 and trips Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or Trips when the phase loss time is Mg approximately 1 s or more Replace MCCB Mg Is there any large electrical noise source around Trips when the gate array cannot Countermeasures against electrical Main circuit confirm IGBT ON OFF because of a noise main element failure a load short Has the main element IGBT been error AA E25 0 4 circuit or an erroneous operation damaged resulting from radiated electric
371. mentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 The set value will not be changed If b052 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent DC voltage or equivalent after rectification incoming voltage x V 2 the Inverter is brought into the LAD STOP status at power recovery during execution of this function disabling deceleration The Inverter will accept neither a STOP command nor frequency reference change until operation is complete Make sure that the b052 setting is higer than the normal incoming voltage or equivalent 2 This function is not reset before the operation is complete and stopped To run the Inverter after power recovery during this function input the RUN command following the STOP command RUN command OFF after a stop condition 3 If the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration starting width 0054 is too large an overcurrent trip occurs because of rapid deceleration If b054 is too small or if the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration time b053 is too long an undervoltage trip occurs because of insufficient regeneration power Main circuit P N voltage VPN V b052 b051 Undervoltage level Time s Output frequency Hz Time s 4 64 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop DC Voltage Constant Control b050 02 without recovery b050 03 with recovery elf a momentary power interruption or main cir
372. mit Upper limit level Lower limit hys level x 2 Analog operation bozo evelatO 0 to 100 no ignored no No 456 disconnection Discon Level O Analog operation b071 level atol 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Discon Level OI Analog operation b072 level at OF 100 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Discon Level 02 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 22 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas N Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page o setting operation Integrated power b078 clear aoe with the Enter key after changing to 00 Yes z Clear kWh data 4 4 Integrated power b079 display gain 1 to 1000 1 No kWh display gain pos2 Starting frequency 010 to 9 99 0 50 No Hz 4 68 Start Frequency i to 15 0 se to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz b083 Carrier frequency erating enabled 4 68 Carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 4 120 p X 3 0 No kHz Derating enabled 00 no Clears the trip monitor 01 Trip data Initializes data 02 Parameters Clears the trip monitor and Initialization selection initializes data posg Initialize Mode 03 Trip Param Clears the trip monitor and o0 No _ parameters 4 70 04 Trp Prm EzSQ Clears trip monitor
373. mmand is activated the rotation direction is judged as being normal If sensor vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters de pending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Operation status Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item During startup ee sie quring Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 During Reduce the speed response H005 Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 During ee Set a overload limit level lower than that of the b021 torque limit q gan od torque b041 to b044 eee Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 Related function A001 A044 F001 b040 H002 H003 H004 H020 H021 H022 PTAS ARSS H023 H050 H051 H052 P011 P012 Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is at 2 1 kHz or lower the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 To use a lower rank motor size than the Inverter set a torque limit value 6041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out a Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value 4 125 for a 200 calculated wit
374. n error communication between the Inverter and digital command board E60 0 Bred Note 5 7 Input mode is determined by the combination of DIP and rotary switches Check the settings of the DIP and rotary switches on the digital command board for any abnormal operation 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Function List of the DIP and Rotary Switches on the digital command board 83G3AX DI01 ae Resolution setting gt otary DIP switch Switch 5 Torque Posi TYPE Acceleration Deceleration har CODE Set frequency S limit tion time setting setting setting Switch No i Setting go1Hz 0 1Hz 1Hz Rate 00tsec 0 1sec 1sec 1 1 pulse 1 2 code 0 O 1 O OFF 2 O Batch 3 O input mode 4 O PAC 5 For factory adjustment Do not set 6 O N 7toF For factory adjustment Do not set BCD 0 O input 1 O O BCD 2 O OFF Binary 3 O input 4 O O BIN ON Dividing __ 2 5 a input 6 O mode DIV 7 O O 8 O 9 O A O O B O CtoF For factory adjustment Do not set How to Read the Input Mode List Example 1 Switch setting when setting the frequency with a resolution of 1 Hz via binary input BIN in the batch input mode PAC TYPE CODE 1 2 OFF BIN OFF PAC Example 2 Switch setting when setting the frequen
375. n A073 Response is slow even with P gain raised Raise D gain A074 eWith P gain raised the feedback value vibrates and isn t stable Lower D gain A074 MExcessive Deviation Output eYou can set PID deviation excessive level C044 during PID control With this function allocated the multi function output terminal is turned on when the PID deviation reaches the set level in C044 C044 can be set from 0 to 100 The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value e Allocate 04 OD to any of multi function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal C026 Mi Feedback Comparison Signal e f a PID feedback value is out of the specified range it can be output to a multi function output terminal e Allocate 31 FBV to any of multi function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal C026 4 34 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode PID Integral Reset PID feedback FW FBV C052 OFF level C053 ON level ON E ee eS OFF ON wsl l 1 4 EPID Feedback Value Monitor eYou can monitor the PID feedback value eThe monitor value is displayed as the product of the feedback value and PID scale A075 Monitor display Feedback value x A075 setting Clears the integral value of PID operation Allocate 24 PIDC to any of multi function inputs C001 to C008 Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on Do not turn on
376. n Position range specification reverse side to P062 AEE a 5 Position range specification forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P063 REA 5 Position range specification forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 es Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P064 PO Position range specification forward side 0 e 268435455 to 268435455 4 136 fe E Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P065 AEE Position range specification forward side 0 5 268435455 to 268435455 9 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P066 command Position range specification forward side 0 3 268435455 to 268435455 no 2 as Position range specification reverse side to lt z P067 OOE EREN Position range specification forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 00 Low speed P068 Zero return mode 01 High speed 1 00 Yes 02 High speed 2 Zero return direction 00 FWD Forward side o P069 selection 01 REV Reverse side 99 ae pozo LOW speed zero 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency Bora High speed zero 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency 4 136 Position range PORRA 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 P072 specification 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 268435455 Yes forward 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allo
377. n a wide range of applications But special precaution and selection should be done when very large braking torque or continous regeneration is required for example cranes 5 The specified conditions contain restrictions Make sure there are not any issues Calculated based on using a standard 4 pole motor The simplified selection table above cannot be used in cases where a 10 ED is exceeded 7 20 suoieodiyineds Specifications 7 3 Options DC Reactor AX RCOOOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing Figure 1 Figure 2 i Cyr Ss O O gt Cc j O O c n D E T Reference Dimensions oltage i g AX RC as B C D E F G H Kg 10700032 DE 96 1 22 06750061 DE 84 113 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 03510093 DE 02510138 DE 116 1 95 01600223 DE 1 108 135 124 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 20 01110309 DE 136 9 5 5 20 120 152 135 94 00840437 DE 146 6 00 200V 7 00590614 DE 160 11 4 150 177 160 115 2 00440859 DE 182 6 14 3 00301275 DE 161 88 17 0 195 162 5 185 10 00231662 DE 196 123 25 5 00192015 DE 2 188 109 34 0 00162500 DE 240 198 200 228 119 12 38 0 00133057 DE 228 149 42 0 43000020 DE 96 1 22 27000030 DE 84 113
378. n b079 is set to 1000 up to 999000 kWh can be displayed Display 0 to 999999 9 Displays in increments of 1 kWh b079 set value Total RUN Time d016 Displays the total RUN time of the Inverter Display 0 to 999999 Displays in increments of 1 hour Power ON Time Monitor d017 Displays the total power ON time of the Inverter Display 0 to 999999 Displays in increments of 1 hour Fin Temperature Monitor d018 Displays the temperature of the fin inside the Inverter Display 020 to 200 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 C 4 4 suoiloun4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Motor Temperature Monitor d019 Displays the temperature of the thermistor connected between the control circuit terminals TH and CM1 Set thermistor selection b098 to 02 NTC enabled Display 020 to 200 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 C Note When b098 01 PTC enabled the motor temperature monitor is disabled Life Assessment Monitor d022 This monitor indicates a life assessment result The following two items can be monitored 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan rpm reduction MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL d022 Life C F l l H001 00 OFF t dJ Note 1 The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes If the Inverter is turned on off frequently within this interval the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed Note 2 While the cooling fan is s
379. n code 10 2 Function code 10 3 Start address MSB 11 3 Start address MSB 11 4 Start address LSB 02 4 Start address LSB 02 5 ear of holding registers 00 5 ise of holding registers 00 6 eer of holding registers 02 6 ia of holding registers 02 7 Number of bytes 04 7 CRC 16 MSB E5 8 Change data 1 MSB 00 8 CRC 16 LSB 34 9 Change data 1 LSB 04 10 Change data 2 MSB 93 11 Change data 2 LSB EO 12 CRC 16 MSB 9E 13 CRC 16 LSB OF 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start address is reduced by 1 3 Specifies the number of actual bytes to change not the number of holding registers If writing into multiple holding registers cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section lt Exception Response gt The master requires the response for a query except for broadcast Though the Inverter should re turn a response corresponding with the query it returns an exception response if the query has an 4 173 error The exception response has the field configuration shown in the following table Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 The detailed field configuration is shown below The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added The exception code shows the cause of exception response 4 4 Communication Function Function code Exception code
380. n display 04 Basic display 000 Screen when the Enter key was pressed last Initial screen 001 060 d001 d060 displayed selection b038 Power On 201 F001 Output frequency setting monitor 202 Monitor screen User parameter 00 Disabled factory default automatic setting b039 function selection 01 Enabled 3 18 uonesado 3 8 Parameter Transition 3 8 Parameter Transition Operation Example for Complete Display Default b037 00 Displays all parameters FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL Operation I I ES M ml A cr FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL J y b 8g FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL FUNCTION Ml1 STOP ALL 3 8 Parameter Transition E User Functions The extended function mode U is the parameter to optionally register or automatically record other extended function codes and differs in operation from other extended function modes oO A 5 Endid FUno on oE lt L153 fuss 600 A G Endid Finl on ode lt y C83 22 o A 5 Endid Finl on ad v is co mI oO f m8 5 ws FUNCTION M1 STOP A
381. n name Data Default setting Unit 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 A002 RUN command 03 RS485 ModBus communication 01 selection 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 Related functions F004 C001 to C008 C019 Data RUN command source 01 Turn on off the FW or RV allocated to terminals The STOP command is activated if both Forward Reverse commands are input simultaneously 02 Use the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator 03 Use the ModBus communication 04 Use option board 1 05 Use option board 2 Base Frequency Match the Inverter output frequency voltage to the motor rating Be careful especially if you set a base frequency below 50 Hz Otherwise the motor may burn out Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A003 Base frequency 30 to Max frequency A004 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd max frequency A204 50 Hz A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd max frequency A304 Related functions A004 A204 A304 A081 A082 To switch to the 2nd 8rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 11 For the base frequency and motor voltage selections match the Inverter output frequency voltage to the motor rating Output voltage AVR voltage selection A082 Base frequency A003 A203 A303 gt Output frequency Hz lf you apply a base fre
382. n operation 02 DB DC injection braking on joggingstop Disabled in operation 03 FRS RUN Free running on jogging stop Enabled in operation 04 DEC RUN Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DB RUN DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation A039 Jogging stop selection 04 When jogging stop selection A039 is set to 02 or 05 the DC injection braking settings are required Refer to page 4 24 e Allocate 06 JG to the desired multi function input Jogging Frequency JG T E Output frequency i i A038 H i e Setting a high jogging frequency causes the Inverter to easily trip Adjust the set value of jogging frequency A038 to prevent the Inverter from tripping 4 18 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Functio n Mode Jogging Stop Selection Note To perform the jogging operation turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal Do the same if the RUN command source is set to the Digital Operator Example 1 ee c FW EE a ee frequency With jogging stop selection A039 set to 00 01 or 02 jogging does not function if the FW signal is turned on first Torque B oost Example 2 bc At k Fw Deceleration Normal operation Output J Jogging operation ee frequency Free running Accelerates according to the b088 setting With A039 set to 03 04 or 05 jogging
383. n overcurrent trip may occur Example 3 Active Frequency Matching restart e After the retry wait time b003 elapses the FW DoS l Inverter starts output from the b030 set value The Inverter then decelerates according to b029 RS while keeping the output current at the b028 set b028 value Output e When the frequency matches the voltage the curent lt L Decelerates Inverter accelerates again and then output frequency is restored to the original level according to b029 e If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 set value Inverter output frequency N i Frequency selected Trip occurs in b030 Motor rpm EE en a ee lt _ 4 72 suoloun4 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function This function automatically reduces carrier frequency according to an increase in output current This function is enabled when automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b089 is set to 01 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Enabled b089 Automatic carrier reduction When output current exceeds 60 72 84 and 96 of the rated current the carrier frequency is reduced to 12 9 6 and 3 kHz respectively When the output current falls below 5 of each level this function will be reset 4 Carrier frequency reduction starting level Reduced carrier frequency kHz
384. n selection POIS FAH 01 REF Position command side 4 211 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 4614h Electronic gear ratio P020 R W 4 to 9999 numerator 4615h Electronic gear ratio P021 R W 4 to 9999 denominator teren onMon centrol Po22 R W 0 00 to 655 35 0 01 feedforward gain 1617h Position loop gain P023 R W 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 1618h Position bias amount P024 R W 2048 to 2048 Secondary resistance 1619h compensation enable P025 R W i SRE disable selection 161Ah E error detection pops RW 0 0to 150 0 0 1 161Bh Peed deviation error P027 R W 0 00 to 120 00 0 91 detection level Hz 161Ch_ Motor gear ratio numerator P028 R W 1 to 9999 1 terph Mott gearratio Po29 R W 1to9999 1 denominator 161Eh Not used 00 OPE Digital Operator Acceleration deceleration 01 Option 1 161Fh ime input type ROSI BAN 02 Option 2 E 03 EZSQ Drive Programming N 00 OPE Digital Operator 1620h alae tear Slop position P032 R W 01 Option 1 put typ 02 Option 2 00 O Terminal O 01 Ol Terminal Ol Torque reference input 02 O2 Terminal O2 1621h Selection FOSS BWN 03 OPE Digital Operator E 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW n 1622h Torque reference setting P034 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1
385. n the nee M const R1 motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 2nd motor ae H220 parameter R1 motor M const R1 M2 capacity Depends Motor parameter R2 on the oSI M const R2 motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 4 115 2nd motor ps H221 parameter R2 mot r M const R2 M2 capacity Depends o Motor parameter L on the 3 Hoe M const L motor capacity T 0 01 to 655 35 No mH g 2nd motor roe S H222 parameter L fe motor O M const L M2 capacity Depends Motor parameter IO on the H023 M const IO motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A 2nd motor pias H223 parameter IO slat M const IO M2 capacity 4 115 Depends Motor parameter J on the H924 M const J motor capacity 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm 2nd motor es H224 parameter J Fistor M const J M2 capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 38 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Genes Mie Function name Monitor or data range setting wing Unit Page 5 9 operation Motor parameter R1 Depends auto tuning data E H030 M const R1 motor A Tune capacity fondo 0 001 to 65 535 neces Ne o parameter R1 oh the H230 auto tuning data motor M const R1 M2 capacit A Tune a Motor parameter R2 Depends auto tuning data on the t1091 M con
386. n the cooling system measles Clean the air filter eCheck that all parts that need tightening are secure i Screws and bolts may become loose because of vibration or temperature change eCheck that there is no corrosion or damage to the conductors and or insulators e Measurement of insulation resistance eCheck and replace the cooling fan smoothing capacitor and relay 6 2 soueUD UIe Y pue UOI Dedsu Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Ambient temperature Check ambient 10 C to 50 C Thermomet Ambient temperature as O Refer to 2 1 no freezing er environment well as humidity Installation Ambient Hygrometer and dust levels humidity 90 Recorder max no condensation General Check that there Entire device ae na abnormal O visual or acoustic No faults vibrations or inspection sounds Power Check that the Measure the voltage Must be within Tester S da between Inverter allowable non supply main circuit O Ets i digital voltage voltage is normal main circuit terminals fluctuation of multimeter R L1 S L2 and T L3 AC voltage Disconnect the I O wirings of the Inverter main circuit terminal block detach the control terminal block board and remove the short circuit bar Megger check u
387. n the filter is first switched on The amount of this flow has already been minimized by constructional circuit details Nevertheless ground fault monitoring devices possibly present may be triggered Ground currents with high frequency components and DC components may also flow under normal operating conditions If faults occur large DC carrying ground currents may flow possibly preventing the ground fault monitoring device from responding For this reason the use of ground fault monitoring devices is not recommended But should they be prescribed in certain applications for safety reasons you should choose moni toring devices which are suited for DC AC and HF ground currents In addition you should ensure that their responsiveness and time characteristics are adjustable so that a disturbance is not immediately caused the first time the frequency inverter is switched on Components susceptible to interference The following components must be classified as particularly susceptible to interference from elec tromagnetic fields Special attention should therefore be paid to them during installation e Sensors with analog output voltages lt 1 volt e Load cells eTractive force meters e Torque measuring hubs e Resistance thermometer PT100 e Thermoelements e Anemometers e Piezoelectric sensors e AM radios only long and medium wave Video cameras and TV sets Office PCs Compacitive proximity switches and filling level sensors e Inductive pr
388. nal the other is the internal method performed automatically to start stop the motor Even if DC injection braking is used however the motor may not stop depending on the moment of inertia of the motor load Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 OFF Disabled A051 DC injection braking 01 ON Enabled 01 _ selection 02 ON FQ Frequency control A052 set value A052 DC injection braking 9 99 to 400 00 0 50 Hz frequency A053 DE IMjecnen BEING GGio8 0 0 0 s delay time O to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 A054 DC injection braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 A055 DC injection braking time 0 0 to 60 0 0 5 s DC injection braking 00 Edge operation A056 A 01 method selection 01 Level operation Kone Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 0 j braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 0 A058 Slarnup DE mjestana longa 80 0 0 0 s braking time A059 DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 He carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 Related functions C001 to C008 4 24 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode HDC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency You can set a DC injection braking carrier frequency in A059 Note that setting a 5 kHz or higher frequency automatically reduces the braking power Refer to the following figure DC injection braking power limit oO DNWDO OO Max braking power a N 3 5 7 9 11
389. nal turns off although the brake release signal is output 4 77 4 2 Function Mode Overvoltage Protection Function During Deceleration This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration eYou can set whether to enable or disable this function with overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration b130 lf overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to 01 enabled DC voltage constant control the Inverter automatically decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage rise due to deceleration start at the overvoltage protection function level setting 6131 lf overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to 02 enabled with acceleration the main circuit DC voltage increases because of deceleration start When the main circuit DC voltage exceeds the overvoltage protection function level setting 6131 the Inverter starts acceleration according to the setting of overvoltage protection parameter b132 After that when the main circuit E DC voltage falls below the b131 level the Inverter starts deceleration again Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Overvoltage protection J0 OFF Disabled n 01 V const DC voltage kept constant b130 function selection 42 01 5 during deceleration example 1 O 9 02 Accel Acceleration enabled example 2 5 Overvoltage protection gt 200 V
390. nctions and Troubleshooting cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteteeeeeee 5 1 5 2 Warning CEO each ea gad a a a ata conection 5 10 Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeneaaaes 6 1 13 Contents Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List cece ee cee eee cecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneneeaeeeaeeeeees 7 1 7 2 Dimensional Dra Win Grae ics cache Seciea Peck de dschas vac Seas oe dundee seeded cade veiwevauingeses 7 7 fis me 01 ALE eer ee or ror E eee ere cert te eere reer er reer ee E 7 15 Chapter App Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List uxonieee een a aad App 1 Appendix 2Product Life Curve nsec ceder prc b Acer be a beelancied eenecveceecvere ada gk App 47 Appendix SLife Alarm Output e acaciras dias kian are hee eA es App 48 Appendix 4EC Declaration of Conformity 00 0 2 ccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeaees App 49 Aale fe E E irra ea rete ret One eT EE vr eT ae Index 1 14 Chapter 1 Overview Ted AEUNMCHONS wccsnsessaravesstnctessstusscreversvistavseavarerserestes 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 1 4 1 1 Functions sa 1 1 Functions RX Inverter Models 2 Z Rated voltage Enclosure rating Max applicable motor capacity Model g 0 4 kW 3G3RX A2004 O 0 75 kW 3G3RX A
391. ncy and current using the AM and AMI terminals on the control a E AM AMI Selection T e Select a signal to output from the following table 5 O p Parameter Function name Data Deew Unit O No setting 5 00 Output frequency 0 to Max frequency Hz 01 Output current 0 to 200 02 Output torque 0 to 200 04 Output voltage 0 to 100 05 Power 0 to 200 06 Thermal load rate 0 to 100 prs 07 LAD frequency 0 to Max frequency Hz AM selection 09 Motor temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or C028 C029 AMI selection lower 9 10 Fin temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 1 Output torque signed n AM output only 0 to 200 13 Drive programming output YA1 AM selection only 14 Drive programming output YA2 AMI selection only 19 Option board 1 OP1 AM selection only 20 Option board 2 OP2 AM selection only 1 This output is enabled only when SLV 0 Hz SLV or V2 is selected Refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 2 Below are the specifications of the output torque signed AM output V AM gain setting C106 100 4 AM gain setting C106 200 5 i AM bias setting C109 50 Te o 0 100 200 orque 3 In any other method the real output frequency of the inverter including compensations different
392. ng Unit Page No setting operation Auto tuning selection 00 OFF Dis bled Hoo1 PA ae select 01 ON STOP 00 No 4111 g 02 ON Rotation Motor parameter H002 selection 00 Motor data select 00 Standard motor parameter 4 111 01 Auto tuning parameter No a 4 113 2nd motor 02 Auto tuning parameter 4 115 parameter selection online auto tuning enabled H202 00 Motor data select M2 Motor capacity H003 selection Factory default Motor capacity 0 20 to 160 0 No kW 2nd motor capacity Factor H203 selection Biter 4 19 iS Motor capacity M2 4 111 oO E Motor pole number 4 115 H004 selection 4 4 118 a 5 Motor poles 2 4 6 8 10 No Pole 5 2nd motor pole H204 number selection 4 Motor poles M2 H005 Speed response 1 590 M speed const 4 89 Sad 7 0 001 to 80 000 Yes 4 92 2nd speed response 5 t205 M speed const M2 1990 Stabilization H006 parameter 100 M stabil const 2nd stabilization H206 parameter 0 to 255 100 Yes 4 120 M stabil const M2 3rd stabilization H306 parameter 100 M stabil const M3 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 37 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter A 3 Default ke Function name Monitor or data range j during Unit Page No setting operation Depends Motor parameter R1 o
393. ng capacitor The value shown ranges from a few to a few dozen Q in a conduction state The Inverter or converter is in good shape if the values from various parameters are nearly equal though they are not consistent depending on the types of elements or testers Note 3 The regenerative braking circuit is provided for Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or lower Tester polarity Measurement Satie ae Inverter unit red black value 3 Oeren en D1 R L1 PD 1 No conduction PD 1 R L1 Conduction D2 S L2 PD 1 No conduction ioe UTi PD 1 S L2 Conduction S L2 V T2 O O i T L3 WAIS PD 1 T L3 Conduction O O N S L2 No conduction Nj Regenera Regenerative braking circuit T L3 PD 1 No conduction S D3 D T S R L1 N Conduction S D4 O N R L1 No conduction S L2 N Conduction D5 T L3 N Conduction D6 N T L3 No conduction U T1 P No conduction TR1 P U T1 Conduction V T2 P No conduction TR2 P V T2 Conduction s W T3 P No conduction TR3 P W T3 Conduction o D U T1 N Conduction z TR4 N U T1 No conduction V T2 N Conduction TR5 N V T2 No conduction W T3 N Conduction TR6 N W T3 No conduction Regenerative braking circuit TR7 RB P No conduction P RB Conduction RB N No conduction N
394. nitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b120 Brake control selection Brake control sell 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Enabled 00 No b121 Brake wait time for release Brake w time Rels 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No b122 Brake wait time for acceleration Brake w time Accel 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No b123 Brake wait time for stopping Brake w time Stop 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No b124 Brake wait time for confirmation Brake w time Confirm 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No b125 Brake release frequency Brake Release FQ 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz b126 Brake release current Brake Release 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW Rated current No b127 Brake input frequency Braking Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 77 Others b130 Overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration Over V supp select 00 OFF Disabled 01 V const DC voltage kept constant 02 Accel Acceleration enabled 01 No b131 Overvoltage protection level during deceleration Over V supp level 200 V class 330 to 390 400 V class 660 to 780 380 760 No b132 Overvoltage protection parameter Over V supp constant 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No b133 Overvoltage protection proportional ga
395. npu 2005 TRUE nes Multi function input terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF d005 monitor i 4 2 Input io HLHLLLLHH Ca eee ee gee lool 00 OfF Tn e001 00 OFF ama J Multi function 4006 Output Multi function output terminals 12 11 ON d006 output monitor PUnne i Seen A ore 4 2 i LLLLH output terminals 15 f i Output TRAET T era 00d OOE Soe J Output frequency monitor 0 00 to 39960 00 a007 after conversion Output frequency x Conversion factor of b086 _ ves o oe Scaled FQ Real frequency d008 monitor 400 00 to 400 00 Hz 4 3 Actual FQ Torque reference d009 monitor 200 to 200 4 3 Torque command Torque bias d010 monitor 200 to 200 4 3 Torque bias Output torque d012 monitor 200 to 200 4 3 Output Torque Output voltage d013 monitor 0 0 to 600 0 V 4 3 Output Voltage App 1 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter 5 Default a Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation dog MPU power monttor 69 10 990 w 44 Input Power Power ON time d015 monitor 0 0 to 999999 9 4 4 Watt hour Total RUN time d016 RUN time 0 to 999999 h 4 4 Power ON time d017 monitor 0 to 999999 h 4 4 ON time Fin temperature d018 monitor 020 to 200 0 C 4 4 Heatsink Tmp
396. ns 4 134 Output Current MONItOF 0 eee ee eeeteeeeeetteeeeeenaeeeeees 4 1 output frequency MONItOL eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeee 4 1 4 2 output frequency setting monitor 0 eee 4 8 output signal delay hold output signal logic operation Output torque MONILON eee eee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeenaeeeees Output voltage Gain cece eee e eee eee output voltage MONItOL 0 cece eee e eee Overcurrent SUPPFeSSION eeeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeeneeees overload liMMt inches ii a ease dalaia overload warning OVEMOIGU ECs s5ou sce case taceestl A cov deteeciaeeeeecebnenets overvoltage protection function during deceleration 4 78 preliminary excitation cece cere e eee 4 119 pulse train frequency input eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 144 Index 2 Index R real frequency MONItOF ee ee ee eee eee eee tee eeeeees reduced voltage Startup oo eee eens eeeeee relay Output terminals cece eee eeeee eres retry Selecto eae era ertia aeeiiaii DAEAR PES TaS reverse rotation prevention secondary resistance compensation ee 4 114 sensor vector control sensorless vector control Servo ON E sii Seated miaaiadeinanken SEIUAOiSF 7 ccsecipecccpk Sis seeceeselesdeceetece Side crecas iaoa signal during RUN eee eee eee eeneeenee SIMKIOOIC i acetates fen haces et cubes e RE A Ea Slide SWIECH w sseecsesccncedevassesecacsdecacdeaeescecusecacb
397. nt 0 100 S power interruption b050 02 03 only 4 63 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop Deceleration Stop b050 01 e After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level 0052 eTo use this function remove the J51 connector cable connected between terminals Ro and To and connect the cable from main terminal P to Ro and from N to To The cable size should be 0 75 mm or larger elf the power is shut off during operation and the voltage falls below the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 the frequency deceleration width decreases at the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration starting width b054 and then the Inverter decelerates for the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration time b053 elf an overvoltage condition momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052 or higher occurs because of regeneration during deceleration the Inverter is kept in the LAD STOP status until the overvoltage condition is reset 1 When the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052 lt the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 the Inverter performs this function by increasing the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052 to the mo
398. nto the holding register cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section lt Loop back Test 08h gt Used to check the communications between master and slave A random value can be used for test data Example Loop back test to the Inverter with slave address 1 Query Response No Field name aren No Field name Ain 1 Slave address 01 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnostic sub code MSB 00 3 Diagnostic sub code MSB 00 4 Diagnostic sub code LSB 00 4 Diagnostic sub code LSB 00 5 Data MSB Random 5 Data MSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC Broadcasting cannot be performed The diagnostic sub code corresponds only with the query data echo 00h 00h not any other commands 4 171 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into Multiple Coils OFh gt Rewrites consecutive multiple coils Example Change the status of multi function input terminals 1 to 6 on the Inverter with slave address 5 Set the multi function input terminals as shown in the following table e yee go peed el a Coil No 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Query Response No Field name erate No Field name ara
399. ntrol A044 A244 selection 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 00 05 V2 Sensor vector control b046 Reverse rotation 00 OFF Disabled 00 A prevention selection 01 ON Enabled Torque LADSTOP Function lf 03 Sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in control method A004 A244 this function temporarily stops the frequency deceleration function LAD when the torque limit function is activated Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A044 A244 V f characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 00 Selgclon 05 V2 Sensor vector control 00 4 quadrant Four quadrant separate setting ta 01 TRQ input Terminal switch b040 Torque limit selection 02 O input Analog input 00 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 O to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 1 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b041 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled forward power running Forward power running under four quadrant separate setting O to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 2 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b042 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled reverse regeneration Reverse regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 150 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 3 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b043 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled
400. ny of C021 to C026 07 C055 to C058 46 Any of C021 to C026 21 C063 47 Any of C021 to C026 24 25 C045 C046 48 Any of C021 to C026 33 C142 to C144 49 Any of C021 to C026 34 C145 to C147 50 Any of C021 to C026 35 C148 to C150 51 Any of C021 to C026 36 C151 to C153 52 Any of C021 to C026 37 C154 to C156 53 Any of C021 to C026 38 C157 to C159 54 Any of C021 to C026 42 C064 User Setting Displays only the parameters optionally set in U001 to U012 eIn addition to U001 to U012 d001 F001 and b037 are displayed Data Comparison Display Displays only the parameters changed from the factory default Note that analog input adjustments C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 and C123 and thermistor adjustment C085 are not displayed e All monitors d and F001 are displayed 4 55 4 2 Function Mode MBasic Display e Displays basic parameters Below are the parameters displayed when this function is enabled No Data Function name No Data Function name 1 d001 to d104 Monitor display 16 A045 Output voltage gain 2 F001 Output frequency setting monitor 17 A085 RUN mode selection 3 F002 Acceleration time 1 18 b001 Retry selection 4 F003 Deceleration time 1 19 b002 Allowable momentary Power interruption time 5 F004 Operator rotation direcion 20 b008 Trip retry selection selection 6 A001 Frequency reference selection 21 b011 Trip retry wait time 7 A002 RUN com
401. o 200 x 2 ms 1 time 2 q4aeh LPH terminal response C162 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 3 14a7h PPUt terminal response C163 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 4 q4agh INPUt terminal response C164 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 5 anothers terminal response C165 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 6 fara e terminal response C166 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 7 q4aBn PPUt terminal response C167 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 8 14ACh R OSPS C168 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 14aph Multi step speed position C169 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 determination time 14AEh to Not used 1500h 00 OFF Disabled 1501h Auto tuning selection H001 R W 01 ON STOP 02 ON Rotation 00 Standard motor parameter 1502h Motor parameter selection H002 R W oe Auto tuning parameter 02 Auto tuning parameter online auto tuning enabled 1503h Motor capacity selection H003 R W 0 20 to 160 0 0 1 kW iaga Mere Pelesnumbe Hoo4 Rw 2 4 6 8 10 Pole selection H005 1505h HIGH R W Speed response 6s 0 001 to 80 000 0 001 1506h LOW R W 1507h Stabilization parameter H006 R W 0 to 255 1 1508h to Not used 1514h 4 209 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Eunguon R W Monitor and setting parameters Ree gu No code tion 1515h 020 R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter R1 T 0 001 to 65 535 o 020 1516h LOW R W 1
402. o return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the high speed zero return frequency 3 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on 4 The Inverter runs in reverse at the low speed zero return frequency 5 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned off 6 The Inverter runs forward at the low speed zero return frequency 7 The Inverter performs positioning at the first Z pulse position after the ORL signal is turned on 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Forward Reverse Run Stop Function FOT ROT With a signal from the control range limit switch this function prevents the Inverter from running out side the specified operation range The torque limit is set to 10 on the forward side when the FOT terminal is turned on and on the reverse side when the ROT terminal is turned on This function can be used as the limit switch at the machine end To do so allocate 71 FOT and 72 ROT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Position Range Setting Function Set a forward reverse position control range in position range setting forward P072 and position range setting reverse P073 If the current position counter exceeds the setting range a position control range trip E63 or E73 occurs and the Inverter goes into free run status The upper limit setting of multi step position commands
403. ode 3h is replied The data received as the response shows the status of coils 7 to 14 The data received here 17h 00010111b should be read with coil 7 as LSB as follows Coil No 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Coil status OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON If the read coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data such coil data is regarded as 0 and sent If the coil status reading command has not been performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 168 suoloun4 em Query Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Reading Holding Register Content 03h gt Reads consecutively the specified number of holding register contents from the specified holding register address Example Read past trip data from the Inverter with slave address 5 Below is the data on past three trips RX command d081 Previous factor d081 Previous Inverter status Holding register No 0012h 0013h Trip factor high order Overvoltage E07 During deceleration 02 Response No Field name Peale No Field name Example HEX HEX 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 03 2 Function code 03 3 Register start number MSB 00 3 Number of data bytes 04 4 Register start number LSB 11 4 Register start number MSB 00 5 Number of holding registers MSB
404. og power supply terminals between H and L and or the interface power supply terminals between P24 and CM1 Doing so may result in failure of the Inverter E Arrangement of the Control Circuit Terminal Block Terminal screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 7 N m 0 8 max E Selecting the Input Control Logic By factory default the terminal FW and the multi function input terminal are set to source logic PNP To change the input control logic to sink logic PNP remove the short circuit bar between the terminals PLC and CM1 on the control circuit terminal block and connect it between the terminals P24 and PLC 2 20 Design 2 2 Wiring E Selecting the Sequence Input Method Sink Source Logic When the Inverter s internal interface power supply is used When external power supply is used Remove the short circuit bar from the control terminal block Sink logic Output unit etc 24V DC Output unit etc Inverter Source logic Output unit etc Inverter Output unit etc Inverter E Selecting the Sequence Output Method Sink Source Logic Sink logic Source logic Inverter Inverter 2 21 2 2 Wiring Wiring the Digital Operator e The RX Series Inverter can be operated with the optional 3G3AX OP01 or AX OPO5 E as well as the standard Digital Operator e To use the Digital Operator apart from the Invert
405. on Mode Free Setting To protect the motor according to load you can freely set the electronic thermal characteristics Below is the setting range Torque x1 0 x0 8 Inverter output 0 5 40 frequency Hz Example Output frequency b017 Trip time s Output current value A b020 b018 b016 O b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Max frequency Hz x 0018 Rated current x 109 y 0018 Rated current x 150 z 0018 Rated current x 200 60 3 0 Motor current A Ratio to the rated 0 x y z current of the Inverter Thermal Warning This function outputs an alarm signal before electronic thermal overheat protection is activated The warning level can be set in C061 e Allocate 13 THM to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 4 48 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Overload Limit Overload Warning This function helps prevent an overcurrent trip due to rapid load fluctuation in acceleration or constant speed operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b021 Overload limit selection 00 OFF Disabled 01 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 02 ON Cnst Enabled in constant speed b024 Overload limit selection 2 operation i l 01 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation acce
406. on Mode Overtorque OTQ This function outputs a signal when detecting a motor output torque estimated value exceeding a specified level Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal 11 to 15 selection Relay output AL2 AL1 07 OTQ Overtorque C026 05 function selection 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C055 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 200 o Forward power running OTQ signal output level for forward power running 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C056 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 200 o Reverse regeneration OTQ signal output level for reverse regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C057 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 200 o Reverse power running OTQ signal output level for reverse E power running O to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C058 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 200 Forward regeneration OTQ signal output level for forward regeneration Related functions A044 A244 A344 C063 e Enabled when overtorque signal is selected in the multi function output selection You can use this function only when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 A244 With other settings the output is unstable For elevating machines use this signal for releasing the brake To close the
407. on time before reaching the Acceleration time before reaching the Acceleration time before reaching the output frequency set value 100 output frequency set value 100 output frequency set value 100 The S pattern has an intermediate section where acceleration deceleration time is shortened elf LAD cancel LAC is selected for a multi function input and that input is turned on the acceleration deceleration pattern is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows the reference frequency suoloun4 HEL S Curve Ratio If the EL S pattern is used you can set a curve ratio A151 to A153 individually for acceleration and deceleration If all settings are 50 the Inverter operates in the same manner as with the S curve Output frequency ratio 109 Curve ratio 2 during acceleration A151 Curve ratio 1 during deceleration A152 50 Curve ratio 2 during deceleration A153 Curve ratio 1 during Time s acceleration A150 4 40 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Operation Frequency Function e Two systems of frequency reference operation results are available for the frequency reference and PID feedback value Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit ae input A setting Operation frequency mite input B setting Operation frequency 00 Operator Digital Operator FO01 A020 A220 A320 VR Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Ena
408. onitor or data range f during Unit Page o setting operation Thermistor selection 097 Disabled b098 3 01 PTC enabled 00 No 2 Thermistor select f D 02 NTC enabled 4 75 s O b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999 3000 No Q Thermistor level Free V f frequency 1 b100 Free V F F1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 0 No Hz Free V f voltage 1 b101 Free V F V1 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V Free V f frequency 2 b102 Free V F F2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 0 No Hz Free V f voltage 2 b103 Free V F V2 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V Free V f frequency 3 b104 Free V F F3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 0 No Hz Free V f voltage 3 b105 Free V F V3 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V D Free V f frequency 4 Z b106 Free V F F4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 0 No Hz Free V f vol ar ree V f voltage 4 b107 Free V F V4 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V Free V f frequency 5 b108 Free V F F5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 0 No Hz Free V f voltage 5 b109 Free V F V5 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V Free V f frequency 6 b110 Free V F F6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 0 No Hz Free V f voltage 6 b111 Free V F V6 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V Free V f frequency 7 b112 Free V F F7 0 to 400 0 No Hz Free V f voltage 7 b113 Free V F V7 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 24 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Mo
409. ontrol is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 44 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation Low speed zero po7o return frequency 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Yes Hz LowSpeed homing FQ High speed zero P071 return frequency 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 136 HiSpeed homing FQ Position range specification 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 P072 forward 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 euge POR Wi Es Position range FWD z Position range Q specification 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 S e A c P073 reverse 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 P TR fe fe Position range REV 00 X00 Multi step position command 0 5 P060 Q 01 X01 Multi step position command 1 2 P061 02 X02 Multi step position command 2 P062 4 137 03 X03 Multi step position command 3 Teaching selection P063 Por Teaching select 04 X04 Multi step position command 4 90 Yes _ P064 05 X05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 X06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 X07 Multi step position command 7 P067 Drive Program P100 id U 00 to to 0 to 65535 0 Yes P131 EZSQ parameter U 00 to EZSQ parameter U 31 Option I F cmd W P160 register 1 to 10 to Op I F cmd W reg 1 0000 to FFFF 000
410. operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Lock SFT Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Only FQ SET Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 02 Lock Data other than b031 cannot be changed 03 Only FQ Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 RUN chg mode Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed Related functions C001 to C008 SFT input b031 Soft lock selection 01 e Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the above table eTo use a multi function input terminal allocate 15 SFT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 51 4 2 Function Mode RUN Time Power ON Time Exceeded elf the total RUN time of the Inverter exceeds the time set in ON time setting b034 a RUN Power ON time exceeded RNT ONT signal is output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b034 RUN Tiel Ove FON Ioi SESE 0 time setting Related functions C021 to C025 C026 d016 d017 ERUN Time Exceeded RNT e Allocate 11 RNT to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Set a time in RUN time Power ON time setting b034 EPower ON Time Exceeded ONT e Allocate 12 ONT to any of multi function outp
411. operation ON Stops with auto recovery contacts 21 STP 3 wire stop OFF Irrelevant to the motor operation ON Reverse 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse OFF Forward Available input terminals C001 to C008 Required settings A002 01 eSet RUN command selection A002 to 01 control circuit terminal block 4 88 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The following operations become possible when 20 STA 21 STP and 22 F R are allocated to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Allocating the STP terminal disables the FW and RV terminals Below are the outputs via terminal operation STA ON OFF STP ON OFF F R Output frequency Control Gain Switching Function This function provides two types of gain and time constant settings for the speed control system proportional integral compensation You can switch over these settings when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 03 SLV Sensorless vector control A044 A244 V f characteristics selection 0a AH Hzsensorlass vector 00 05 V2 Sensor vector control C001 to C008 Miui eon inputs 26 CAS control gain switching 1 to 8 selection H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 80 000 1 590 H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H051 H251 PI inte
412. or output terminals NO NC switchable sink source logic switchable 1 relay SPDT contact output terminal NO NC switchable Terminal function 6 functions can be selected from among 45 Signal during RUN RUN Constant speed arrival signal FA1 Over set frequency arrival signal FA2 Overload warning OL Excessive PID deviation OD Alarm signal AL Set frequency only arrival signal FA3 Overtorque OTQ Signal during momentary power interruption IP Signal during undervoltage UV Torque limit TRQ RUN time exceeded RNT Power ON time exceeded ONT Thermal warning THM Brake release BRK Brake error BER O Hz signal ZS Excessive speed deviation DSE Position ready POK Set frequency exceeded 2 FA4 Set frequency only 2 FA5 Overload warning 2 OL2 Analog FV disconnection detection FVDc Analog FI disconnection detection FIDc Analog FE disconnection detection FEDc PID FB status output FBV Network error NDc Logic operation output 1 LOG1 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 Logic operation output 4 LOG4 Logic operation output 5 LOG5 Logic operation output 6 LOG6 Capacitor life warning WAC Cooling fan life warning WAF Starting contact signal FR Fin overheat warning OHF Light load detection signal LOC Operation ready IRDY Forward run FWR Reverse run RVR Fatal fault MJA Window comparator FV WCFV Window comparator FI WCFI Window comp
413. or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PRO
414. or the speed control system between proportional integral compensation and proportional compensation when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 03 SLV Sensorless vector control V f characteristics penis Dank A044 A244 A344 s lection 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 control A344 is blank 05 V2 Sensor vector control C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 43 pp P PI switching 1 to 8 selection H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 80 000 1 590 H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H051 H251 PI integral gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 e If P PI switching is selected in the multi function input selection proportional integral compensation is enabled while the signal is off proportional compensation is enabled while the signal is on If P PI switching is not selected in multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 proportional integral compensation is enabled Normally the Inverter performs proportional integral compensation PI control for speed control so that the difference between frequency reference and actual rpm becomes zero If one load is operated by several motors however proportional control P control may be required To enable proportional control P control alloca
415. orward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 S fe Position range setting reverse side P067 TEE T Di to Position range setting forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 00 Low speed P068 Zero return mode 01 High speed 1 00 02 High speed 2 Po69 Zero return direction 00 FWD Forward side 00 o selection 01 REV Reverse side P070 Lewrspeedizele ia agta 10 00 0 00 Hz return frequency P071 High speed zero 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Hz return frequency 4 136 suonun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Position range P we ee 0 to 268435455 When APR2 is selected EQ Specification 0 to 1073741823 When HAPR is selected 2094935433 forward Position range F ee 268435455 to 0 When APR2 is selected PoR specification _1973741823 to 0 When HAPR is selected 208435455 reverse 00 X00 Multi step position command 0 P060 01 X01 Multi step position command 1 P061 02 X02 Multi step position command 2 P062 F 03 X03 Multi step position command 3 P063 Ror Teaching selection 04 X04 Multi step position command 4 P064 o9 05 X05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 X06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 X07 Multi step position command 7 P067 Multi step C169 speed position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 ms determination time 1073741823 to 1073741823 when
416. output 2 R PON 0 OFF 0036h LOG3 logic operation output 3 R nN 0 OFF 0037h LOG4 logic operation output 4 R ON 0 OFF 0038h LOGS logic operation output 5 R ON 0 OFF 0039h LOG6 logic operation output 6 R TON 0 OFF 003Ah WAC capacitor life warning signal R ees 0 OFF 003Bh WAF cooling fan life warning signal R TON 0 OFF 003Ch FR starting contact signal R on 0 OFF 003Dh OHF fin overheat warning R TON 0 OFF 003Eh LOC light load detection signal R TON 0 OFF 003Fh MO1 Drive Programming output 1 R W oN 0 OFF P 1 ON 0040h MO2 Drive Programming output 2 R W i 0 OFF 1 ON 0041h MO3 Drive Programming output 3 R W i 0 OFF 1 ON 0042h MO4 Drive Programming output 4 R W 0 OFF 1 ON 0043h MO5 Drive Programming output 5 R W 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 178 suoiloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description 3 X 1 ON 0044h MO6 Drive Programming output 6 R W 0
417. oximity switches and metal detectors 2 32 2 2 Wiring e Ripple control transmitters baby talkers etc i e all communication devices which use low voltage systems as transmission medium Devices which do not comply with the pertinent EMC requirements Built in filter specifications 2 3G3RX E1F includes a embedded EMC filter However when using the inverter in Europe you should comply with the following specifications and requirements to meet the EMC Directive and other standards in Europe Power supply requirements a Voltage fluctuation must be 15 to 10 or less b Voltage imbalance must be 3 or less c Frequency variation must be 4 or less d Total harmonic distortion THD of voltage must be 10 or less eWiring requirements a A shielded wire screened cable must be used for motor wiring and the length of the cable must be according to the following table b The carrier frequency must be set according to the following table to meet EMC requirements c The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring e Environmental requirements a Ambient temperature must be within the range 10 C to 40 C b Relative humidity must be within the range 20 to 90 non condensing c Vibrations must be 5 9 m s 0 6 G 10 to 55 Hz or less 0 4 to 22 kW 2 94 m s 0 3 G 10 to 55 Hz or less 30 to 132 kW d The inverter must be installed indoors not exposed to corrosive gases and dust
418. peed I O 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O 4 Extended control I O BOE jinstance Number 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O i No gt m monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 8 20 Not used 00 Trip Operation setting at oi Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop 2 P048 idle mode detection 92 Ignore 90 No E 2 03 Free RUN 6 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 No _ rotation speed 32 34 36 38 Pose Pulse train frequency 4 0 to 50 0 25 0 No kHz scale pose Pulse train frequency 0 04 to 2 00 0 10 No s filter time constant 4 144 P057 Pulse train frequency 100 to 100 0 No bias amount posg Pu se train frequency 0 to 400 100 No limit 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 55 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to PO60 RRE 5 Position range specification forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P061 arma a Position range specification forward side 0 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step positio
419. pending on the actual load conditions However this function can automatically set an acceleration deceleration time making full use of the Inverter s capacity The acceleration time is a time during which acceleration is performed within a current value set in the overload limit parameter when the overload limit function is enabled or within approx 150 of the rated current when the overload limit function is disabled The deceleration time is a time during which deceleration is performed within approx 150 of the rated current value or within a DC voltage in the Inverter circuit of approx 370 V 200V class or approx 740 V 400 V class Thus the Inverter enables real time response to a change in applied load and inertia and sets acceleration deceleration time automatically e Note the following before use Note 1 This function is not suitable for a machine that needs a fixed acceleration deceleration time Acceleration deceleration time varies depending on applied load and inertia Note 2 If the machine inertia exceeds approx 20 times that of the motor shaft the Inverter may trip In this case reduce the carrier frequency Note 3 Acceleration deceleration time varies depending on fluctuations in current value even with the same motor Note 4 The automatic optimum acceleration deceleration setting is enabled only during V f control When sensorless vector control is selected the Inverter performs normal operation 4 36
420. pends on the terminal selected in frequency reference selection A001 other than that in A076 When A001 is set to 01 terminal the setting of O OI selection A005 is disabled eWhen analog input is selected for PID feedback and A001 is set to 01 terminal the PID target value is selected depending on the A006 set value as shown in the following table PID target value PID feedback selection A076 A006 00 A006 01 A006 02 A006 03 00 OI L O O2 Not reversible O O2 Reversible O 01 O L Ol O2 Not reversible Ol O2 Reversible Ol Ol included in operands O O2 Not reversible O O2 Reversible O 10 O included in operands Ol O2 Not reversible Ol O2 Reversible Ol operation result Oranda arete O2 Reversible operands eTo select RS485 for PID feedback transfer data as described below 4 32 Functions 4 2 Function Mode lt ASCIl C078 00 gt Transfer data using command 01 To transfer feedback data set the most significant byte of frequency data to 1 Example To send 5 Hz Transmission data is set value x 100 and expressed in 6 bytes Set the most significant byte to 1 ASCII conversion Note With ASCII data the set value is frequency Hz lt ModBus RTU C078 01 gt Write data in holding register address 0006h 100 10000 000500 100500 31 30 30 35 30 30 Register No Function name Function co
421. peration Checking the Operating Status e After making sure that the operating direction is correct and that the Inverter is operating smoothly at a slow speed increase the frequency reference By changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction make sure that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor Make sure that the output current output current monitor d002 is not excessive 3 16 Operation 3 7 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator 3 7 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator Part Names and Descriptions RUN LED POWER LED WARNING LED ALARM LED OMRON HITACHI LCD display REMOTE LED OPERATION N KEY KEY ENABLED LED N Name Function POPER POWER LED indicator Light on when the power is supplied to the LCD digital operator RN RUN LED indicator Light on when the Inverter is runing o WARNING LED Light on when set value is incorrect WARNING indicator AMi ALARM LED indicator Light on when the Inverter trips Light on when the REMOTE key makes the compulsion operation function effective It doesn t light when the o Remote LED i eer i compulsion operation function is effective by input terminal OPE Press the key more than 2 seconds Key Enabled LED Light on only when operation command is set in LCD digital operator LCD Display Displays relevant data such as frequency reference output current and
422. peration 00 OFF Disabled 2 A051 DC injection braking 01 ON Enabled 01 No _ 4 24 selection 02 ON FQ Frequency control A052 set 4 112 a value 5 ae 3 A052 Be injection braking 9 99 to 400 00 050 No Hz 2 requency O was 7 A A053 RO injection braking 9 9 f 50 0 0 No s delay time iniecti i O to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No A054 DC injection braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 No aos DC injection braking 4 9 19 60 0 0 5 No s gt time A056 DC injection braking 00 Edge operation 01 No 4 24 method selection 01 Level operation 5 Startup DC injection O to 100 0 4 to 55 kW MODE braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW y No 1 O TERETE A aosg Startup DC injection 9 9 to 60 0 0 0 No s braking time pee DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 No kHz A061 Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to Max frequency 0 00 3 2nd frequency 0 00 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max No Hz A261 a 0 00 o upper limit frequency A062 Frequency lower limit eal frequency to Frequency upper 0 00 4 28 s j No Hz a A262 a las lower 0 00 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency 0 00 2 imit upper limit gt A063 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Jump frequency A064 width 1 0 50 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 00 3 Jump frequency 0 0 to 400 0 No Hz aose YUMP frequency Jump frequency width 0 0 to 10 0 0 50 width 2 g A0
423. perator 3G3AX OP M3G3AX OP01 7 10 fii omron SYSDRIVE POWER O 3G3AX OP01 ALARM O Be fF ee RUN command O LED indicator eae e Oo ree STOP OPRG RESET Operation keys FREQ adjuster r 2 M3 c Panel cut dimensions External dimensions Height 55 mm x Width 70 mm x Depth 10 mm 7 29 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List c cceeeee App 1 Appendix 2 Product Life Curve ccccccccsssee App 47 Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output ccceeeeee App 48 Appendix 4 EC Declaration of Conformity App 49 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Appendix 1 Parameter List Monitor Mode d e The default setting displays d001 at power on To select the optional display change the setting in b038 Changes Paiemeier Function name Monitor or data range Deru during Unit Page No setting operation Output frequency d001 monitor 0 00 to 400 00 Yes Hz 4 1 Output FQ Output current d002 monitor 0 0 to 9999 0 A 4 1 Output current Rotation direction FWD Forward d003 monitor STOP Stop 4 1 Rotation REV Reverse PID feedback value 00 to 999000 00 d004 monitor ae 4 1 PID FB Enabled when the PID function is selected M Iti f ti i t a E input terminals 7 2 1 ON u a unction I
424. power interruption DC Volt ctrld decel 0 0 to 1000 0 220 440 No b052 Stop deceleration level of non stop function at momentary power interruption OV Ivl ctrld decel 0 0 to 1000 0 360 720 No b053 Others Deceleration time of non stop function at momentary power interruption Decel time ctrld dec 0 01 to 3600 00 1 00 No b054 Deceleration starting width of non stop function at momentary power interruption FQ drop ctrld decel 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 No Hz b055 Proportional gain setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption P gain ctrld decel 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 Yes 4 60 b056 Integral time setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption I gain ctrld decel 0 000 to 65 535 0 100 Yes 4 63 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 21 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Pais N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page O setting operation Window comparator Set an upper limit level O upper limit level Setting range 0 to 100 6 po60 Windw comp O Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 190 Kes e max width x 2 Set a lower limit level eng comparator Setting range 0 to 100 b061 O lower limit level grang
425. ption Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 05 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 156 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function e Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Each monitor s data at the time of 440 bytes P tripping Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Each trip monitor stores the past six trips together with total trip count 8 bytes Total count Trip data 1 ceccocococoo Trip data 6 Monitor item Unit Magnification Data size Note Trip factor 8 bytes Code display Inverter status A 8 bytes Inverter status B 8 bytes See Command 04 Inverter status C 8 bytes MSB Output frequency Hz x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Total RUN time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code ia Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII co
426. put YAO 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 1 This output is enabled only when SLV O Hz SLV or V2 is selected Refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 Example 1 Set values 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 12 Example 2 Set values 03 08 ety t i T i T i SS a gt Cycle T Constant 6 4 ms Cycle T Variable Duty ratio t T Variable Duty ratio t T Fixed to 1 2 2 Digital current monitor e When the monitor displays the value set in digital current monitor reference value C030 1440 Hz is output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C030 Digital current monitor 0 2 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated current Rated current A reference value Set a current value at 1440 Hz output 3 In any other method the real output frequency of the inverter including compensations different than d001 value is displayed 4 109 4 2 Function Mode MFM Adjustment e Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meter connected to the FM terminal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the FM monitor 100 Related functions C027 b081 Analog Output AM AMI Terminals circuit terminal block The AM terminal provides 0 to 10 V analog output The AMI terminal provides 4 to 20 mA analog output You can monitor the output freque
427. put FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 08 Pulse Digital current monitor 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 11 Out TRQ sign Output torque lt signed gt 13 YA1 Drive programming 19 OP1 Option board 1 20 OP2 Option board 2 00 No C029 AMI selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output FQ Output frequency 01 Output Output current 02 Output TRQ Output torque 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency 09 Motor tmp Motor temperature 10 Heatsink tmp Fin temperature 14 YA2 Drive programming 00 No 4 110 4 118 C030 Digital current monitor reference value 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Current value at the digital current monitor output 1440 Hz Rated current Yes A 4 109 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 44 uoesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter F Default Ciegas N Function name Monito
428. quency of over 60 Hz a special motor is required This may require the Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor Set the motor voltage selection according to the motor specifications If the voltage exceeds the specified level the motor may burn out 4 2 Function Mode Maximum Frequency Set the maximum value of the output frequency The value set here is the maximum value e g 10 V in the range from 0 to 10 V of the external analog input frequency reference e The maximum Inverter output voltage from base to maximum frequencies is the voltage set in AVR voltage selection A082 The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage Output voltage AVR voltage selection A082 i gt Base frequency Max frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting 30 to 400 A004 Maximum frequency A204 2nd maximum frequency A304 3rd maximum frequency 50 Tl c gt O Unit ce gt Hz Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Analog Input O O2 Ol The Inverter has three types of external analog input terminals O L terminal 0 to 10 V voltage input OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA current input O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V voltage input Below are the s
429. r wv It is used to run reverse the motor only when the operation AN REV RUN key command A002 is set in Digital operator It is used to stop the motor or reset an alarm It is also possible stor to invalidate the STOP key by B087 parameter Besides it does RESET STOF RESE I key not response when LCD digital operator is reading or writing the parameters from to the inverter Display System and Key Sequence of Each Code e This section explains the examples of typical operation Basic display Complete display and the extended function mode U as a special operation This operation can be performed when other display modes are selected The display indicates the setting of 0038 when the power is turned on For details refer to Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 56 When b038 1 factory default output frequency monitor d001 is displayed Note The Digital Operator display varies depending on the settings of display selection b037 ini tial screen selection b038 and user parameter automatic setting function selection b039 For details refer to Display Selection page 4 53 Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 56 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function page 4 57 Item Function code Data Description 00 Complete display factory default 01 Individual display of functions Display selection b037 02 User setting 03 Data compariso
430. r goes into free run status If the FOC terminal is turned on again the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free run stop selection b088 FOC FW RV Does not operate because Output frequency the FOC terminal is OFF Free running Restarts according to b088 Excitation current flows Related functions A044 A244 C001 to C008 High torque Multi operation When sensorless vector control or 0 Hz sensorless vector control is selected with a single Inverter this function controls two motors of the same type to drive a single load eTo use this function you set the same parameters as when you select Sensorless Vector Control page 4 116 or O Hz Sensorless Vector Control page 4 117 However set the motor parameters as follows Set motor parameters R1 R2 and L to one half of the set value for one motor Set motor parameter lo to be twice the set value for one motor Set motor parameter J to one half of the total moment of inertia of two motors and loads connected to these motors Select the motor capacity value closest to the total capacity of two motors eWhen different loads are driven with two motors a fluctuation in one load affects the operating condition of the other which may hinder normal control To prevent this be sure to operate a system in a way that the load driven by two motors is regarded as one load A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 HO02 H202 H00
431. r or data range 3 during Unit Page O setting operation Multi function output C031 terminal 11 contact selection Multi function output C032 terminal 12 contact g selection E D Multi function output C033 terminal 13 contact Dee No 00 a 01 NC z selection fa No 4 96 S Multi function output 5 C034 terminal 14 contact 5 selection Multi function output C035 terminal 15 contact selection C036 Pie ace AL2 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 01 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 selection 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during Light load signal acceleration deceleration constant C038 ze ut teat speed 01 No p 01 Const Enabled only during constant 4 106 speed C039 Light load detection 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A level 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during Overload Warmin acceleration deceleration constant coag signal output fod speed o Mo B o g P 01 Const Enabled only during constant z speed EA 4 49 T 0 0 Does not operate E verl ad wamin 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated 5 C041 ual 9 0 4 to 55 kW areca Ne A z 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 2 75 to 132 kW 7 P co42 Arrival frequency 9 99 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 6 during acceleration 3 4 98 S co43 Amval frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during deceleration Boag ED deviation 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 No 431 e
432. r repair the CT output current and a trip occurs Is the load too large Reduce the loading factor Is the thermal level correct Monitors the Inverter output current Adjust the thermal level to an appropriate and shuts off the output displaying level Overload an error if the built in electronic Note The electronic thermal function is set to trip thermal function detects overload E05 0 work easily at 5 Hz or lower If a large 4 46 4 against the motor load inertial moment is applied the Trips depending on the electronic overload protect function works when thermal function settings the motor starts accelerating and the load prevents it from accelerating In this case increase the torque boost or take other measures for adjustment Is there any rapid deceleration Increase the deceleration time Braking Shuts off the output and displays an Esha operation eycieauenny resistor error if the usage rate of Decrease the number of operation cycles 4 8 overload regenerative braking circuit exceeds Eve is the Sagan ate setting of the regenerative 4 74 braking function low trip the b090 set value Set to an appropriate level Note Pay attention to the allowable power of the resistor g oh 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Points to check and remedy pl Extremely high DC voltage between P and N may result in failure This function therefore shuts off the
433. r running C058 Overtorque level Forward regeneration C111 Overload warning level 2 eln the Normal Duty VT these terminals are not available eIntelligent input terminal that cannot set Normal Duty Code Intelligent input terminal name 44 BOK Brake confirmation 45 ORT Orientation 47 PCLR Position deviation error 48 STAT Pulse train position command input permission 52 ATR Torque command input permission 54 SON Servo ON 55 FOC Preliminary excitation 66 CP1 Position command selection 1 67 CP2 Position command selection 2 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit signal 70 ORG Zero return startup signal 71 FOT Forward driving stop 72 ROT Reverse driving stop 73 SPD Speed Position switching 4 61 4 2 Function Mode e Intelligent output terminal that cannot set Normal Duty Code Intelligent output terminal name 19 BRK Brake release 20 BER Brake error 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation 23 POK Position ready When the parameter becomes outside a set range when changing to Heavy Duty gt Normal Duty it changes to an initial value An initial value of the following parameters is different in Heavy Duty ratings and Normal Duty ratings When Heavy Duty Normal Duty is changed with b049 items other than HO03 H203 are changed to an initial value Func HD ND Name i code Range Initia
434. rameter ranges are shown below From F002 A001 b001 C001 H001 and P001 For F001 use command 01 2 Refer to command 06 e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 161 Negative response Refer to page 4 161 lt Command 08 gt Initializes each set value Initialization conforms to the setting of initialization selection b084 If b084 is 00 the trip data is cleared eTransmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes o1 10 94 and FEComm nicat n with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 08 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 161 Negative response Refer to page 4 161 lt Command 09 gt Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM e Transmission frame Frame format 4 4 Communication Function STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to
435. rd gain 1 P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 50 rad s 4 129 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Note Below are the block diagrams of the electronic gear function First order lag filter Position control feedforward gain Speed P019 00 FB Position command command Position feedback First order lag filter Position control feedforward gain P019 01 REF Speed Position command command Position feedback 1 It is recommended that position control feedfoward gain adjustment should be started with P022 2 00 To reduce the position deviation between the main and sub motors increase the feedforward gain If motor hunting occurs reduce the feedforward gain 2 It is recommended that position loop gain adjustment should be started with P023 2 00 To increase positioning accuracy and holding power increase the position loop gain If an increased position loop gain causes hunting reduce the position loop gain 3 Make sure that the N D setting is within the range of 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 D Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 Example Synchronous Operation Slave Inverter Master Inverter For the Inverter master Inverter on the main motor side you can select either the speed control or pulse train position control mode For the Inverter slave Inverter on the sub motor side
436. rd reverse stop command Sets frequency reference Sets multi function input terminal status Reads all monitor data Reads the Inverter status Reads trip data Reads a parameter Sets a parameter Initializes each set value Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM Stores a set value in EEPROM Re calculates internal parameters Available Available Available Not available Not available Not available Not available Available Available Not available Available Available Enabled only when b084 is set to 01 or 02 Clears trip data The following describes each command 4 148 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 149 lt Command 00 gt Inputs the forward reverse stop command To use this command set A002 to 03 RS485 Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes ol to 32 and FF Communication with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 00 Data Transmission data 1 byte Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Data Description Note 0 Stop command 1 Forward command 2 Reverse command
437. reases the capacitive current and electromagnetic emission It is recommended that the motor cable length does not exceed 50m in any case also depending on the inverter power range It is recommended to install output AC Reactors motor chokes if the cable length exceeds 50m The EMC filters contain capacitors between the phases and the phases to ground as well as discharging resistors After switching off the line voltage you should wait a minimum of 60 seconds before removing protective covers or touching terminals to avoid electric shock The protective conductor connection between filter and drive is recommended without interruptions such as plug or contactors If power plug or contactor become necessary they should be of the highest quality to provide neligible losses The use of ground fault monitoring devices is not recommended Should they be compulsory in certain applications for safety reasons you should choose monitoring devices which are suited for DC AC and HF ground currents Standard ground monitoring devices may fail due to the switching nature of the inverter control The line filters have been developed for use in grounded systems Use in ungrounded systems is not recommended If installed according to the following directions indicated in this section the frequency inverter comply with the following standards Emissions EN 61800 3 EN 55011 group 1 Category C1 C2 C3 Class B A Immunity EN61800 3 industrial
438. rence 1 Determination time C169 ZS CF1 CF2 CF3 CF4 4 17 4 2 Function Mode MBit Operation By allocating 32 to 38 SF1 to SF7 to any of multi function inputs selection 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select from multi step speeds 0 to 7 For SF1 to SF7 frequency settings set multi step speeds 1 to 7 A021 to A027 Multi step speeds SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1 ia a Pe Tomiie Oth Digital Operator or Oth OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th the external analog input terminal 1st x x x x x x ON 2nd x x x x x ON OFF SFI 3rd x x x x ON OFF OFF opp Ld 4th x x x ON OFF OFF OFF srs AA m SE S pes 25 eS 2 ee oe 5th x x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF SF4 ss _LL___ OS 6th x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF SFe 0 7th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF sp lum e When several terminals are simultaneously turned on priority SF8 en 2 Nn is given to the terminal with the smallest number ew STU The x mark in the above table indicates that speed is selected regardless of ON OFF status Jogging Operation Function The motor rotates while this function is turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Hz 00 FRS Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation 01 DEC Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled i
439. requency Matching 99 ia E FA restart Automatic carrier 00 OFF Disabled b089 eduction 01 ON Enabled 99 Me aoe OS Usage rate of b090 regenerative braking 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 74 function A 00 Decel Stop Deceleration gt Stop F b091 Stop selection 01 Free RUN Free run stop 00 No 4 70 00 Alws ON Always ON b092 Cooling fan control 01 ON in RUN ON during RUN 01 No Regenerative braking 09 OFF Disabled b095 function operation ON ane Enabled Disabled during 00 No 4 74 Selection 02 Alws ON Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 360 poge function ON level 660 to 760 720 No y 00 Disabled b098 Thermistor selection 01 PTC enabled 00 No 02 NTC enabled 4 75 b099 Thermistor error level O to 9999 3000 No Q 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 38 uonesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas N Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page o setting A operation b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 0 No Hz b101 Free V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 0 No Hz b103 Free V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b104 Free V f frequency 3 O to Free V f frequency 4 0 No Hz D b1
440. requency rRISTENGE 06 Pulse train frequency 01 selection A076 PID feedback selection 03 Pulse Pulse train frequency 00 A141 Operation frequency impul 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency 02 a A setting A142 Operation frequency input 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency 03 B setting Pulse train frequency processing block Frequency measurement Bias Limit Frequency reference Maximum frequency A004 Frequency scale P055 1 0 to 50 0 kHz First order lag filter P056 Note The SWENC switch on PG Board is available for OFF encoder disconnection detection disabled 4 144 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 4 Communication Function This function allows the Inverter to communicate with an external controller via the RS485 interface from the TM2 terminal on the Inverter s control terminal block board Communication Specifications Item ASCII method ModBus RTU method Note Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Select using the Digital Operator Communication method Half duplex communication Synchronous system Start stop synchronous system Asynchronous system Transmission code ASCII code Binary Transmission mode LSB first Compatible interface RS 485 Data bit length 7 or 8 bits 8 bits Select using the Digital Operator Parity No parity Even Odd Select using
441. rer recommendations as those are done to maximize immunity for the characteristic control system structure Installing the motor cable 2 29 If you use an EMC line filter or would like to observe certain limits of line conducted interference the motor cable which you use must be shielded The shield is to be grounded on both sides over a large area For this purpose turn the shield through 180 for instance and make large area contact 360 with the metal PG screw connections Use only copper mesh cable CV with 85 coverage Foil shields often have a higher coupling than mesh shields and are therefore unsuitable can OD 47 Some motors have terminal boxes and PG screw connections of plastic In these cases the shield should be connected on the motor side to the motor housing with as large an area as possible by means of a cable clamp Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing Very often the terminal boxes and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections are painted Make sure there is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of the motor cable the metal PG screw connection the terminal box and the motor housing and carefully remove this paint if necessary The shielding should not be interrupted at any point in the cable If the use of reactors contactors terminals or safety switches in the motor output is necessary i e if the shield must be interrupted th
442. rip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SETS 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 drive programming input 1 MI2 drive programming input 2 MI3 drive programming input 3 Ml4 drive programming input 4 MI5 drive programming input 5 MI6 drive programming input 6 MI7 drive programming input 7 MI8 drive programming input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 C
443. rminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forced to output an alarm code The following table shows the output alarm codes Multi function output terminals With 4 bit code selected With 3 bit code selected 14 13 12 11 Factor code Trip cause Factor code Trip cause AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO 0 0 0 0 Normal Normal Normal Normal E01 to E03 E01 to E03 F 0 0 0 1 E04 Overcurrent protection E04 Overcurrent protection Overload protection 0 0 1 0 E05 E38 Overload protection in a low E05 Overload protection speed range 0 0 A 1 E07 E15 Overvoltage Incoming E07 E15 Overvoltage Incoming overvoltage protection overvoltage protection 0 1 0 0 E09 Undervoltage protection E09 Undervoltage protection 0 A 0 1 E16 Momentary power interruption E16 Momentary power protection interruption protection 0 1 1 0 E30 IGBT error E30 IGBT error 0 A A A E06 Braking resistor overload Oihererrore protection 4 101 4 2 Function Mode Multi function output terminals With 4 bit code selected With 3 bit code selected 14 13 12 11 Factor code Trip cause Factor code Trip cause AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO EEPROM error CPU error 1 0 0 0 E08 E11 GA communication error Main E23 E25 i circuit error 1 0 0 1 E10 CT error A 0 A 0 E12 E13 External trip USP error M E35 E36 Thermistor error Brake error 1 1 0 0 E14 Grounding protection A A 0
444. s R L1 S L2 T L An earth leakage breaker may malfunction due to the effect of high frequency Use an earth leakage breaker with a large high frequency sensitivity current rating If the Inverter protection function is activated a malfunction or accident may have occurred to your system Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON OFF the magnetic contactor connected on the Inverter power supply input primary side and output Secondary side To start or stop the Inverter via an external signal use the operation command FW or RV on the control circuit terminal block This Inverter uses a 3 phase power supply A single phase power supply cannot be used Do not use this Inverter with a phase loss power input Doing so may damage the Inverter By factory default the phase loss input protection is disabled If a phase of power supply input is interrupted the Inverter reverts to the following status R L1 phase or T L3 phase is inter The Inverter does not operate rupted S L2 phase is interrupted The Inverter reverts to single phase operation causing a trip due to undervoltage overcurrent etc or damage to the Inverter Even if the power input is under a phase loss condition the internal capacitor is charged with voltage causing an electric shock or injury When changing the cable connections refer to the instructions on page 2 1 2 2 Wiring e
445. s 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the alarm relay output terminal C026 e Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 provide open collector output The alarm relay output terminal provides relay output eYou can select NO or NC contact output for each output terminal with C031 to C035 or C036 elf alarm code output is selected in C062 refer to page 4 101 alarm code output ACO to AC3 is provided via output terminals 11 to 13 for 3 bit code or via output terminals 11 to 14 for 4 bit code The C021 to C025 settings are disabled Data Description Reference item Page 00 RUN Signal during RUN Signal during RUN 4 98 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal Frequency arrival signal 4 98 02 FA2 Over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL Overload warning Overload limit Overload warning 4 49 04 OD Excessive PID deviation PID function 4 31 05 AL Alarm output 06 FA3 Set frequency only arrival signal Frequency arrival signal 4 98 07 OTQ Overtorque Overtorque 4 100 08 IP Signal during momentary power interruption Momentary power interruption Undervoltage 4 44 09 UV Signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ Torque limit Torque limit function 4 57 11 RNT RUN time over RUN time over 4 52 12 ONT Power ON time over Power ON time over 4 52 13 THM Thermal warning Electronic thermal function 4 46 19 BRK Brake release Brake control function 4 76 20 BER Brake error
446. s 2 bytes s Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Error Code List Error code Description 01H Parity error 02H Checksum error 03H Framing error 04H Overrun error 05H Protocol error 06H ASCII code error 07H Receiving buffer overrun error 08H Receiving timeout error 11H Command invalid error 12H 13H Execution disabled error 14H 15H 16H Parameter invalid error 17H During communication with all stations the Inverter sends no response 4 162 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function MIBCC Block Check Code Calculation Method Example To set 5 Hz using command 01 frequency reference setting When the target station No is 01 Transmission Frame Structure STX Station No Command 4 163 ASCII code Ox 02 gt 01 30 31 Ox gt 0 Ox 30 31 gt 000500 0x 3030 30 35 30 30 gt 05 Ox 30 35 gt 0x 00 To determine BCC the Inverter performs ASCII conversion from the station No to data and calcu lates a result of the exclusive OR Xor per byte For the above transmission frame BCC is calculated as follows 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 Xor D sor Xor 31 Xor 00 Xor 30 Xor 9o Xor 30 Xor 05 Xor 35 x Appendix ASCII Code Conversion Table
447. s the allowable momentary power interruption time Example 2 Even if the trip retry operation is selected the Inverter trips if the cause of the trip is not remedied after the retry wait time b003 elapses In this case increase the retry wait time Even if the retry operation is selected the Inverter trips when undervoltage remains for 40 seconds or longer If frequency matching start or Active Frequency Matching restart is selected for retry operation the Inverter abruptly restarts at power on by alarm reset or retry start e Below is the timing chart for frequency matching start retry selection b001 02 Note that the Inverter switches regardless of settings to the initial state when the power supply is turned on in the case of a complete power discharge t0 Momentary power interruption time t1 Allowable momentary power interruption time b002 t2 Retry wait time b003 Example 1 Example 2 Duration of momentary power interruption Duration of momentary power interruption lt Allowable duration of momentary power interruption b002 gt Allowable duration of momentary power interruption b002 Power supply Power supply Inverter Inverter output i output o Preg running i Free running Motor rpm Motor rpm 4 43 4 2 Function Mode Example 3 Motor frequency rpm gt b007 Example 4 Motor frequency rpm lt b007 Power supply J ff Power supply o Inv
448. s to be higher than the de aa Is the incoming supply voltage too high specification value for 100 seconds 7 Incoming d f while the Inverter is stopped while the Inverter is stopped overvoltage an haat E15 0 Lower the incoming voltage correct the Trips when the main circuit DC trip power supply fluctuation Fit an AC voltage reaches approximately 390 reactor to power supply input if needed V DC for 200 V class and 780 V DC p PRP i for 400 V class Shuts off the output when a momentary power interruption Has the incoming power supply voltage occurs for 15 ms or more Momentary A ak dropped If the shutoff time is long it is Rove normally recognized as a power E16 0 Power recovery 4 60 interruption y 9 p Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or A shutoff Note that when restart is tng selected the Inverter restarts at Mg power on as long as the RUN Replace MCCB Mg command remains Tempera ture error when the Appears if a decrease of the cooling Has the cooling efficiency been reduced rotation fan rotation speed has been 20 0 Replace the cooling fan _ speed of detected when a temperature error Is there any clogging in the heatsink fin the cooling occurs Clean the fin fan decreases Shuts off the output if the Have you installed the Inverter vertically Tempera temperature has risen in the main F210 Installation check A ture error circuit because of the high a
449. se RUN command 02 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 1 03 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 2 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 04 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 3 05 CF4 Multi step speed setting binary 4 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 06 JG Jogging Jogging operation 4 18 ARTET 5 DC injection braking external DC 3 C001 to 07 DB External DC injection braking injection braking 4 24 cue 08 SET 2nd control 2nd 3rd control function 4 82 09 2CH _ 2 step acceleration deceleration e step accelerationdeceleration 4 37 function 11 FRS Free run stop Free run stop 4 71 12 EXT External trip External trip 4 84 13 USP USP function Power recovery restart prevention 4 84 function 14 CS Commercial switch Commercial switch 4 85 4 79 4 2 Function Mode TE eee Data Function name Reference item Page 15 SFT Soft lock Soft lock 4 51 16 AT Analog input switching External analog input 4 12 17 SET3 3rd control 2nd 3rd control function 4 82 18 RS Reset Reset 4 87 20 STA 3 wire start 21 STP 3 wire stop 3 wire input function 4 88 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse 23 PID PID enabled disabled PID function 4 31 24 PIDC PID integral reset 26 CAS Control gain switching Control gain switching 4 89 27 UP UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN UP DWN function decelerated UP D
450. sed 133Eh Set an upper limit level 133Fh Window comparator O b060 R W Setting range 0 to 100 l 1 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1340h Window comparator O b061 R W Setting range 0 to 100 1 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window comparator O lower limit levels 1341h Comp b062 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width ges ae bed Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level 1342h Window comparator Ol b063 R W Setting range 0 to 100 l 1 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1343h Window comparator Ol b064 R W Setting range 0 to 100 1 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window comparator Ol wel limit lyels 1344h eee b065 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width ee Ae ate Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level 1345h Window comparator 02 b066 R W Setting range 100 to 100 l 1 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1346h Window comparator 02 b067 R W Setting range 100 to 100 1 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis
451. sed for switching the between main Inverter built in filter Maini General circuit terminal O function Then use a 5 MQ min 300 V DE circuit megger and ground megger to measure terminal the resistance between the ground terminal and the short circuited parts of terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P PD 1 N RB Ro and To 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 3 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check that any parts which may A need tightening O Tighten securely No faults General are secure Check that no part has indications of O Visual inspection No faults overheating Check that there is no distortion with O Connection the conductor conductor Visual inspection No faults and wire Check that there is no damage to the O wire Insulation Terminal Check thatther
452. select M2 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 V2 Sensor vector control see ake 00 VC Constant torque characteristics A344 sele tioi 01 VP Special reduced torque 00 8 V F select M3 characteristics 9 21 aoas Output voltage gain 55 t 100 100 Yes 4 24 V F gain oO 5 Automatic torque S aoge Doostvoltage oto 255 100 compensation gain A TQ BST V gain 2nd automatic Yes torque boost voltage A246 _ compensation gain 0 to 255 100 A TQ BST V gain M2 4 20 Automatic torque aoa7 2o stsiip lg to 255 100 compensation gain A TQ BST SL gain 2nd automatic Yes torque boost slip A247 compensation gain 0 to 255 100 A TQ BST SL gain M2 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 9 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page o setting operation Tore f 00 OFF Disabled nosi ation rakina Tot on tenable e lee DB enable 02 ON FQ Frequency control A052 set 4 112 value DC injection braking A052 frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 50 No Hz 4 24 DB Frequency DC injection braking A053 delay time 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 No Ss DB wait time DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No gt A054 power DB forc
453. selection Acc2 Dec2 sel A294 2nd 2 step acceleration deceleration selection Acc2 Dec2 sel M2 00 2CH Terminal Switched via multi function input 09 01 Preset FQ Switched by setting 02 FWD REV Enabled only when switching forward reverse 00 00 No A095 2 step acceleration frequency Acc 1 2 FQ A295 2nd 2 step acceleration frequency Acc 1 2 FQ M2 A096 2 step deceleration frequency Dec 1 2 FQ A296 2nd 2 step deceleration frequency Dec 1 2 FQ M2 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 0 00 No Hz 0 00 0 00 No Hz 4 37 A097 Acceleration pattern selection Accel curve select A098 Deceleration pattern selection Decel curve select 00 Line 01 S curve 02 U curve 03 inv U curve 04 EL S curve 01 No 01 No 4 38 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 13 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Pais N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation Ol start frequency A101 Ol start FQ 0 00 No Hz erent 0 00 to 400 00 a end frequency 5 A102 Ol end FQ 0 00 No Hz w Ol start ratio 9 PA A103 ION start 0 to Ol end ratio 20 No Yo 4 14 gt Ol end rat
454. ses Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Without determination time C169 7 Position command 4 CP1 CP2 CP3 Determination time C169 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Speed Position Switching Function SPD Allocate 73 SPD to one of the multi function inputs While the SPD terminal is turned on the current position counter is retained at 0 Therefore if the SPD terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter shifts to the position control mode Speed Position switching At this time if the position command is 0 the Inverter immediately stops Hunting may occur depending on the position loop gain setting While the SPD terminal is turned on the Inverter runs in the direction based on the RUN command When shifting from speed control to position control be careful about the polarity sign of the RUN command Output frequency Position count started Speed control Position control Time Target position 4 140 suoloun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Zero Return Function This function performs three types of zero return operations depending on the setting of zero return mode P068 When zero return is complete the current position is cleared to zero You can select the zero return direction in zero return direction selection P069 If zero return
455. sidering Lowest impedance to ground Connecting it with a grounding conductor of the lowest impedance or parallel multiple short ground connections if not possible The cross section of each single pro tective conductor terminal must be designed for the required nominal load Avoid ground loops Conductor loops act like antennas especially when the encompass large areas Consequently 1 Avoid unnecessary conductor loops and 2 Avoid parallel arrengement of clean and interference prone conductors over longer distances Use EMC filters only in grounded systems The line filters have been developed for use in grounded systems Use of the line filters in ungrounded systems or locations without proper ground quality is not recommended beacuse in these applications 1 Low current to ground increases 2 The effect of the filter is reduced and 3 The amount of line conducted and radiated interference increases in proportion to elementary frequency in frequency inverter Consider motor cable length The amount of line conducted interference also increases as motor cable length increases Output chokes may be required to countermeasure this effect Disconnect internal RFI filter Always when using external mount EMC filter make sure internal filter is disabled figure corresponds to a 400V 55kW case Soy j f N CVT oe i a pe x wae p 7 k SSD gt EUS F N ai a lt A 3 a amp Sy E gt sa gt x
456. speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC integr
457. ss using an external signal To use this function allocate 23 PID PID disabled to any of the multi function inputs While the PID terminal is turned on the Inverter disables the PID function and outputs normally eYou can limit the PID output under various conditions Basic Structure of PID Control Example Target value O0to10V 4 to 20 mA Feedforward Feedback 0to10V 4 to 20 mA Disabled 0to10V 4 to 20 mA 10 to 10 V aknad 1 _ Control volume Normal control O role Tds gt Sensor Transducer 4 31 Kp Proportional gain Ti Integral time Td Derivative time s Operator g Deviation 4 2 Function Mode EPID Operation P Operation Operation where the control volume is proportional to the target value Step transition Ramp transition Target value beu Large 4 N A072 A072 Control volume Xan DA Operation Operation where the control volume increases linearly according to time Target value Control volume PE ee gt a lt g gt suonoun4 D Operation Operation where the control volume is proportional to the variation ratio of the target value Target value Control volume PI operation is the combination of the above P and operations PD is P and D operations PID is P and D operations M Feedback Selection Select a terminal used for feedback signals in PID feedback selection A076 The target value de
458. st R2 motor A Tune capacity EA 0 001 to 65 535 mal O R parameter R2 x the H231 auto tuning data motor M const R2 M2 capacit A Tune rae Motor parameter L pues H032 auto tuning data motor Q M const L A Tune 3 capacity 3 a 0 01 to 655 35 Seles Wn ee ae g parameter L n the S H232 auto tuning data motor O M const L M2 capacit A Tune he Motor parameter lo oo H033 auto tuning data motor M const IO A Tune capacity ae Pee 0 01 to 655 35 eee A parameter lo i the H233 auto tuning data motor M const IO M2 capacit A Tune ee Motor parameter J sci H034 auto tuning data motor M const J A Tune capacity Dnd motor 0 001 to 9999 000 R No kgm parameter J A the H234 auto tuning data motor M const J M2 capacit A Tune au 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 39 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation H050 PI proportional gain 100 0 PI P gain s 2nd PI proportional 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes H250 gain 100 0 PI P gain M2 H051 PI integral gain 100 0 PI gain 4 89 JPI 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes 4 92 2n integral gain j H251 PI I gain M2 100 0 H052 P proportional gain 1 00 P gain 2nd P proportional 0 01 to
459. step speed reference 10 Multispeed 10 A031 Multi step speed reference 11 Multispeed 11 A032 Multi step speed reference 12 Multispeed 12 A033 Multi step speed reference 13 Multispeed 13 A034 Multi step speed reference 14 Multispeed 14 A035 Multi step speed reference 15 Multispeed 15 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Yes Hz 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 7 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Yes Hz Jog frequency gt 00 FRS Free running on jogging stop D Disabled in operation 2 01 DEC Deceleration stop on jogging stop 5 Disabled in operation iniacti i i f D Jogging stop 02 DB DC injection braking on jogging stop 4 18 D Disabled in operation a A039 selection 04 No 2 Jog stop mode 03 FRS RUN Free running on jogging 2 stop Enabled in operation 5 04 DEC RUN Deceleration stop on jogging 2 stop Enabled in operation 05 DB RUN DC injection brak
460. step speed 0 00 es reference 11 oO 5 Multi step speed 5 A032 reference 12 One Multi step speed A033 reference 13 0 99 Multi step speed R034 reference 14 0 00 Multi step speed A033 reference 15 oe A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Yes Hz 00 FRS Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation 01 DEC Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled in operation 02 DB DC injection braking on jogging stop A039 Jogging stop Disabled in operation 04 N 4 18 selection 03 FRS RUN Free running on jogging 2 _ stop Enabled in operation 04 DEC RUN Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DB RUN DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 26 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciegas Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation A041 Torque boost 00 selection 00 Manual torque boost x 01 Automatic torque boost No _ A241 2nd torque boost 00 selection A042 Manual torque boost 1 0 voltage A242 2nd manual torque 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 Yes boost voltage 4 19 A342 3rd manual torque 1 0 boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost 5 0 frequency Apada ena manua torque ha ragg 5 0 Yes i boost frequency K 2
461. subject to dust especially iron dust or salts eLocations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals eLocations subject to shock or vibration MTransporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the product Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Operation and Adjustment Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement J Precautions for Correct Use Precautions for Correct Use Bilnstallation Mount
462. suoloun4 4 2 Function Mode Note 5 If the jogging operation is performed when the automatic operation is selected the Inverter performs automatic acceleration which is different from normal jogging operation Note 6 When the applied load is larger than the rating deceleration time may be prolonged Note 7 If acceleration and deceleration are frequently repeated the Inverter may trip Note 8 When the internal braking circuit is used or when the regenerative braking unit is externally installed the motor cannot stop within the specified deceleration time because of braking resistance In this case do not use the automatic optimum acceleration deceleration function Note 9 When using a lower rank motor size than specified for the Inverter enable the overload limit function b021 and set the overload limit level b022 to 1 5 times the rated current of the motor 4 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Function eBy setting this function you can change the acceleration deceleration time during acceleration o deceleration c fe Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Oo A092 Acceleration time 2 S c a 5 A292 2nd acceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 s LL A392 3rd acceleration time 2 s A093 Deceleration time 2 s A293 2nd deceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 S A393 3rd deceleration time 2 s 2 step acceleration 00 2CH Terminal Switched via multi
463. system in proportion to multiple motor loads Deceleration Stop During Power Failure During a power failure or momentary power interruption the RX Series can decelerate and stop a motor by using the motor braking energy 1 2 M IAJ9AQ Overview 1 1 Functions MHuman Environment friendly Features More Simplified Parameter Settings and View Only parameters that have been changed from the default settings can be viewed eWith the user setting function only 12 parameters for frequent use can be viewed Compliance With Safety Standards The RX Series meets the requirements of the CE and UL cUL and complies with various standards The RoHS Directive The standard model meets the requirements of the RoHS Directive Easily Meets the Requirements Specified by the Ministry of Land Infrastructure and Transport of Japan The RX Series incorporates a zero phase reactor radio noise filter as a standard specification When an optional DC reactor is added the RX Series meets the requirements specified by the Min istry of Land Infrastructure and Transport of Japan 1 3 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts When the product is unpacked it appears as below Example of 3G3RX A2150 A4150 to A2220 A4220 Front cover Digital Operator agent reno urre RESET E I Terminal block
464. t Parameter Default Cietes No Function name Monitor or data range Kin during Unit Page i 9 operation 00 Always ON A081 A EAA 01 Always OFF o2 No x 02 OFF during deceleration z AVR vol Mi NER ay 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 No i 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 400 AVR voltage sel 2 00 Normal operation A085 ona 01 Energy saving operation 00 No P 02 Automatic operation o 2 o S a E Energy saving 4 36 T aoge Mesponse accurary g o te t00 0 50 0 Yes D adjustment 3 Energy saving tune o xe fe zZ 2 aa 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 12 xipueddy RUN mode Acceleration Deceleration functions Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A092 Acceleration time 2 Accel time2 A292 2nd acceleration time 2 Accel time2 M2 A392 3rd acceleration time 2 Accel time2 M3 A093 Deceleration time 2 Decel time2 A293 2nd deceleration time 2 Decel time2 M2 A393 3rd deceleration time 2 Decel time2 M3 0 01 to 3600 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 Yes A094 2 step acceleration deceleration
465. t 01 No selection during 02 Accel Acceleration enabled deceleration ee Aa 200 V class 330 to 390 380 4 y PR 400 V class 660 to 780 760 during deceleration pigg Cvorveliags 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s 4 78 protection parameter Overvoltage A f p133 Protection e 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 Yes proportional gain O setting Overvoltage b134 protection integral 0 000 to 65 535 0 060 Yes Ss time setting Auto return initial 00 OFF b164 display 01 ON g No _ F b166 Data Read Write 00 R W OK Read Write OK 00 No selection 01 R W Protected Read Write Protected a wis 00 No action b180 Initialize trigger 01 Initialize 00 No 5 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 40 uonesado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C001 Multi function input 1 selection C002 Multi function input 2 selection C003 Multi function input 3 selection C004 Multi function input 4 selection Multi function input terminals C005 Multi function input 5 selection C006 Multi function input 6 selection C007 Multi function input 7 selection C008 Multi function input 8 selection RV reverse CF1 multi step
466. t 03 OI Input Ol 1280h lig setting pute RAN 04 Modbus RS485 communication E 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency 00 ADD Addition A B 12B1h Operator selection A143 R W 01 SUB Subtraction A B 02 MUL Multiplication A x B 12B2h Not used 1283h 3 AET Frequency addition 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 amount A145 iN Hz 12B4h LOW Frequency addition 00 ADD Frequency reference A145 d2pan direction Uae ae 01 SUB Frequency reference A145 12B6h to Not used 12B8h 12B9h ELS curve ratio 1 during A4150 RW lotos50 1 acceleration BEAR Ee cune fato 2 curing im Aie RW 0 to 50 1 acceleration 12BBh ElL S curve ratio 1 during 44152 RW 0t050 1 9 deceleration 12Bch ESS cutve ratio 2 during 4453 RW lotos50 1 deceleration 12BDh to Not used 1300h 00 TRIP Alarm 01 0 Hz start 02 f match Frequency matching start 1301h Retry selection b001 R W 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart econ Wowable momentary boo2 RW 0 3t025 0 0 1 s power interruption time 1303h Retry wait time b003 R W 0 3 to 100 0 0 1 s Momentary power 00 OFF Disabled 3 01 ON Enabled 19041 interruption undervoltage boos RAW 02 Decel OFF Disabled during stop and _ trip during stop selection deceleration stop Momentary power 3 i 1305h interruption re
467. t 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd acceleration time deceleration time base frequency maximum frequency multi step speed reference 0 torque boost selection manual torque boost voltage manual torque boost frequency V f characteristics selection automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain automatic torque boost slip compensation gain frequency upper limit frequency lower limit acceleration time 2 deceleration time 2 2 step acceleration deceleration selection 2 step acceleration frequency 2 step deceleration frequency electronic thermal level electronic thermal characteristics selection motor parameter selection motor capacity selection motor pole number selection speed response stabilization parameter motor parameter R1 motor parameter R2 motor parameter L motor parameter 10 motor parameter J motor parameter R1 auto tuning motor parameter R2 auto tuning motor parameter L auto tuning motor parameter 10 auto tuning motor parameter J auto tuning PI proportional gain PI integral gain P proportional gain Limit at 0 Hz Parameters changeable during operation e The 1st 2nd 3rd control functions are displayed identicall
468. t C077 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C076 Communication error selection 00 Trip Trip after receiving timeout E41 01 Decel Trip Deceleration stop after receiving timeout Trip after stop E41 02 Ignore No trip and no alarm output 03 Free RUN Free run stop after receiving timeout No trip and no alarm output 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop after receiving timeout No trip and no alarm output 02 C077 Communication error timeout 0 00 to 99 99 Time before receiving timeout 0 00 C078 Communication wait time 0 to 1000 Wait time until response starts after reception is completed excluding silent interval Response from the Inverter Frame 2 is output as return after the Inverter receives the query Frame 1 not output independently 4 164 suoloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 165 Below is each frame format command Message Configuration Query Header Silent interval Slave address Function code Data Error check Trailer Silent interval lt Slave Address gt e Pre set numbers ranging from 1 to 247 in each Inverter slave Only the Inverter having the same slave address as the query takes in the corresponding query Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to 0 Data call or loop back cannot be performed while broadcasting lt Da
469. t Terminal to trip the Inverter when a temperature error voltage range T occurs 0 to 8 V DC al The CM1 terminal functions as the common Input circuit Sl ElS terminal o Oic 7 sae 8V DC c Olo Recommended thermistor characteristics LITA 10 kQ G lt Allowable rated power 100 mW min Impedance at temperature error 3 KQ Temperature error detection level is adjustable between 0 and 9999 Q Thermistor 1 kQ CM1 ESlide Switch SW1 Settings The built in slide switch is used to enable or disable the emergency shutoff function Factory Default Disabled For the location of the slide switch refer to page 2 11 Emergency Shutoff Function Factory Default Disabled 2 9 e This function is intended to turn off the Inverter output stop switching the main element via only the multi function input terminal of the hardware circuit without going through the CPU software This function stops switching of the main element The circuit is not electrically turned off While the power supply is ON do not touch the Inverter terminals and power cable e g motor cable Doing so may result in electric shock injury or ground fault eWhen this function is enabled the multi function input terminals 1 and 3 are exclusively used for this function No other function can be allocated to these terminals If another function has been allocated it will automatically be disabled and terminals 1 and 3 are changed to the emerg
470. t filter and some additional devices ferrite to minimize high frequency emissions from motor cable and DC reactor to countermeasure harmonic distorsion effect in supply network VA EMC filter 3G3RX A4015 g D a 5 pinha ENA TITA 73 modd sz Ferrite DC reactor Main Supply a 2 30 Design 2 2 Wiring The following figure shows a 3G3RX 400V 55kW inverter installed with a booktype filter and some additional devices ferrite to minimize high frequency emissions from motor cable and DC reactor to countermeasure harmonic distorsion effect in supply network 3G3RX A4550 EMC filter OlOWOWONOILO NONONO io Ferrite DC reactor Main Supply To Motor 2 31 2 2 Wiring E Additional notes Influence of motor cable length Shielded motor cables have quite a high cable capacity towards ground which increases linearly as cable length increases A typical rule of thumb figure is 200 pF per meter of cable But these figures vary among different types of cables and are also dependent on the current carrying capacity Long motor cables can give rise to the following Frequency inverter and servo amplifiers give a pulse width modulated square wave output voltage with quite steep slopes which causes high reverse charging currents in the table capacities towards ground This reverse charging current must be additionally supplied by
471. t to 01 enabled the parameters subjected to a data change are automatically stored in sequence from U001 to U012 This data can be used as changed data The screen information is stored when the Enter key is pressed The monitor screens d are also stored in the same manner U001 is the most recent parameter and U012 is the oldest The same parameter cannot be stored If the number of parameters stored exceeds 12 the oldest data U012 is erased Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b039 User parameter automatic setting function selection 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Enabled 00 Related functions U001 to U012 Torque Limit Function This function limits motor output torque when 03 sensorless vector control 04 O Hz sensorless vector control or 05 Sensor vector control is selected in control method A044 A244 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Wik characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector control A044 A244 i 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 00 selection 05 V2 Sensor vector control 00 4 quadrant Four quadrant separate setting os y 01 TRQ input Terminal switch b040 Torque limit selection 02 O input Analog input 00 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 1 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b041 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled 150 for
472. ta gt Sends the function command The RX corresponds with the following data formats used in the ModBus Data name Description Coil 2 value data 1 bit long that can be referred to or changed Holding register 16 bit long data that can be referred to or changed lt Function Code gt e Specifies the function for the Inverter to perform Below are the function codes supported by the RX Function Code Maximum number of Maximum data number in Function code Function data bytes in 1 message 1 message Oth Reading coil status 4 32 coils in bits 03h Beading holding register 8 4 registers in bytes content 05h Writing into the coil 2 1 coil in bits 06h Writing intothesholding 2 1 register in bytes register 08h Loop back test OFh Writing into multiple coils 4 32 coils in bits 10h Writing into multiple registers 8 4 registers in bytes lt Error Check gt eCRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is used for the ModBus RTU error check The CRC code is a 16 bit data generated for the block of random length data in the 8 bit unit eTo prepare the CRC code use a generation polynomial of CRC 16 X18 X15 X 1 4 4 Communication Function CRC 16 Calculation Example CRC 16 calculation CRC FFFFh All target data CRC CRC register 2 bytes Exists CRC CRC XOR target data completed y
473. tage drop 4 V max at power on NO contact Max allowable voltage 27 V DC OFF Max allowable current 50 mA 5 ON 01 N NC contact Orr OFF WSpecifications of the Relay Output Terminals eThe relay output terminals have an SPDT contact configuration Below is its operation L Inside the Inverter O Default value C036 01 Example When the relay output terminals are used for alarm ODEN TIT Resistance load i C036 status Inductive load Inverter set Power Max ealiee status AL2 AL1 contact 200VAC 2A 250V AC 0 2 A ALO ALO 30 V DC 8 A 30 V DC 0 6 A AL2 capacity ALO Mi Abnormal Closed Open ee TOV ACAO MA 5 V DC 100 mA capacity ON Max 250VAC 1A 250V AC 0 2 A 00 Normal Open Closed contact 30V DC 1A 30 V DC 0 2A AL1 capacity ALO Min 100 V AC 10 mA OFF Open Closed contact 5 V DC 100 mA capacity Abnormal Open Closed o1 ON Default Normal Closed Open OFF Open Closed 4 97 4 2 Function Mode Signal During RUN eWhile the Inverter is running this signal is output via multi function output terminals 11 to 15 or the relay output terminal e Allocate 00 RUN to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 This signal is also output during DC injection braking Below is the time chart Output frequency A N
474. tartup b036 R W _ to 255 Reduced voltage startup time selection Long 4 195 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 00 All Complete display 01 Utilized Individual display of functions 1327h Display selection b037 R W 02 User User setting 03 Compare Data comparison display 04 Basic Basic display 1328h Initial screen selection b038 R W 000 to 202 User parameter automatic 00 OFF Disabled 19220 setting function selection p939 RAWY 01 ON Enabled 00 4 quadrant Four quadrant separate setting Tp 01 TRQ input Terminal switch 132Ah Torque limit selection b040 R W 02 O input Analog Input 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 Torque limit 1 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 132Bh Four quadrant mode b041 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 forward power running no Torque limit disabled Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 132Ch Four quadrant mode b042 R W Oto 180 75 to 132 kW 1 reversed regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torque limit 3 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 132Dh Four quadrant mode b043 R W Oto 180 75 to 132 kW 1 reversed power running no Torque limit disabled Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 132Eh Four quadrant mode b044 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torqu
475. tches the AC power supply voltage 2 2 g a 5 Design 2 1 Installation Hinstallation Environment lncreased ambient temperatures will shorten the life of the Inverter Keep the Inverter away from heating elements such as a braking resistor DC reactor etc If the Inverter is installed in an enclosure keep the ambient temperature within the range of the specifications taking dimensions and ventilation into consideration Save enough space to prevent the upper and lower wiring ducts from blocking Airflow 5 cooling airflow Inverter g 1 10cm min 5 cm min 5 cm min Ao cmrmin Note that replacing the smoothing capacitor requires 22 cm or more eWhen several RX models are installed in an enclosure and a ventilation fan is mounted in the enclosure be careful about the layout of the Inverters and the air intake apertures Depending on the internal layout of the panel the Inverter s cooling effect may deteriorate resulting in an increase in ambient temperature Also use thorough caution in making sure that the Inverter s ambient temperature is within the allowable operating temperature range AL Ventilation fan Ay Ventilation fan Inverter Inverter BZ Correct example Incorrect example Before installing the Inverter place a cover over all the ventilation openings to shield them from foreign objects After completing the installation process be sure to remove the covers from
476. te the P PI switching function to any of multi function input terminals 1 to 8 set 43 in any of C001 to C008 A P control Sy oo PI control Torque via the Digital Operator and turn on the terminal If youchoose to 100 enable proportional control set a KPP value in H052 P proportional gain The relationship between the KPP value and speed change ratio is expressed broadly in the following formula rpm 0 10 Speed change ratio KPP set value The relationship between speed change ratio and speed error is expressed broadly in the following formula Speed error at rated torque A x 100 Speed change ratio Synchronous rpm at base frequency 4 92 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Forced Terminal Block Function F TM This function forcibly enables operation via the control terminal block by turning on off the multi function terminal if the frequency reference RUN command sources are not set to the control terminal block Data Symbol Function name Description 51 F TM Multi function input selection Forced terminal Available input terminals C001 to C008 Related codes A001 A002 elf the Forced Terminal Block function is selected in the multi function input selection the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is
477. ted current 1 50 ae 0 4 to 55 kW x p022 Overload limit level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated Ne A 75 to 132 kW current poza verona lint 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s parameter 4 49 5 00 OFF Disabled E 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation a b024 Overload limit 02 ON Cnst Enabled in constant speed 01 No _ S selection 2 operation 5 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration g constant speed operation Accelerates 6 during regeneration z 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 tes 0 4 to 55 kW x 8 ROE OyerloadilimitIevel 2 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated No A 5 75 to 132 kW current gt 6 eae pose ov etona linit 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s parameter 2 Overcurrent 00 OFF Disabled pork suppression function 01 ON Enabled o9 no _ Ta 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current b028 Active Frequency 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A Matching restart level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency 4 43 b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 No s 4 71 parameter Starting frequency at 00 Off FQ Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max FQ Max frequency 00 No Matching restart 02 Set FQ Set frequency 00 Lock SFT Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Only FQ SFT Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be c
478. ted current 75 to 132 kW 0 1 A 1382h Brake input frequency b127 R W 0 00 to 400 00 ie 1383h Not used 1384h Not used 4 199 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name puncion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion Overvoltage protection 00 OFF Disabled 1385h function selection during b130 R W 01 V const DC voltage kept constant deceleration 02 Accel Acceleration enabled Overvoltage protection 200 V class 330 to 390 V 1386h level during deceleration 19 R W 400 V class 660 to 780 V 1M iaz Oro eee protecion b132 Rw 0 10 to 30 00 0 01 s parameter 1388h OVervoltage protection b133 RW 0 00 to 2 55 0 01 proportional gain setting sdoht 2 cleo proteron b134 RW _ 0 000 to 65 535 0 001 s E integral time setting 1390h to Not used 1400h suonun4 4 200 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register No Function name Function code Monitor and setting parameters Resolu tion 1401h Multi function selection input 1 C001 R W 1402h Multi function selection input 2 C002 R W 1403h Multi function selection input 3 C003 R W 1404h Multi function selection input 4 C004 R W 1405h Multi function selection input 5 C005 R W 1406h Multi function selection
479. ter may not store data correctly e Allocate 27 UP and 28 DWN to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 e This function is enabled only when frequency reference selection A001 is set to 01 or 02 If 01 terminal is selected however this function is enabled for multi step speed operation only eWhen you use an external analog input as frequency reference input or when you set the jogging operation frequency this function is disabled While the UP DWN terminal is turned on the acceleration deceleration time depends on F002 F003 F202 F203 F302 and F303 To switch between the 1st 2nd 8rd controls allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn on off the SET terminal eYou can store a frequency set value after UP DWN adjustment Choose whether to store the value with C101 Also you can clear the stored frequency set value By allocating 29 UDC to a multi function input and turning on off the UDC terminal you can clear or store the frequency reference setting adjusted at UP DOWN Parameter No Data Description 00 Does not store the frequency reference adjusted at UP DWN Gioi After restoring the power returns to the value set before UP DWN adjustment 01 Stores the frequency reference adjusted at UP DWN After restoring the power maintains the set value after UP DWN adjustment RUN command FW RV Output C C UP C DW
480. th without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature and Fin temperature Allowable max current 2mA AMI Multi function analog output Current This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 4 to 20 mA DC Current Output monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature and Fin temperature Allowable load impedance 250 Q max Monitor output FM Multi function digital output This terminal outputs a signal selected from the O to 10 V DC Voltage Output PWM monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature Fin temperature Digital output frequency and Digital current monitor Digital output frequency and Digital current monitor output a digital pulse at 0 10 V DC pulse voltage and 50 duty ratio Allowable max current 1 2mA Max frequency 3 6 kHz Digital contact Power supply P24 Internal 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply for contact input signal When the source logic is selected this terminal functions as the contact input common terminal Allowable max output current 100 mA CM1 Input common Common terminal for the interface power supply P24 termin
481. than d001 value is displayed 4 110 Functions 4 2 Function Mode BH AM AMI Adjustment e Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the AM monitor 100 0 to 100 C109 AM Dies suing Set an offset for the AM monitor o C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the AMI monitor 100 C110 AMI bias setting Oto 100 20 Set an offset for the AMI monitor Note The offset data is set in Example If AMI provides 4 to 20 mA output the offset value is 20 4 20 Default value Operation Selection During Option Error If the built in optional board causes an error you can set whether the Inverter trips or continues to run regardless of the option error Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Operation selection at 00 Trip option error 01 RUN Continues operation 99 P001 P002 lt Group H Motor Control Parameters gt Offline Auto Tuning Function This function enables measurement and automatic setting of the motor parameters required for sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control and sensor vector control eTo perform sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control for a motor with unknown motor parameters perfor
482. the Inverter before operation Below is the heat radiation according to the Inverter capacity Inverter capacity kw 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 Load with 70 loss W 64 76 102 127 179 242 312 435 575 698 Load with 100 loss W 70 88 125 160 235 325 425 600 800 975 Efficiency at rated output 85 1 89 5 92 3 93 2 94 0 94 4 94 6 94 8 94 9 95 0 Inverter capacity kw 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Load with 70 loss W 820 1100 1345 1625 1975 2675 3375 3900 4670 Load with 100 loss W 1150 1550 1900 2300 2800 3800 4800 5550 6650 Efficiency at rated output 95 0 95 0 95 1 95 1 95 1 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 eTo raise the carrier frequency reduce the output current or derate the rated current 2 3 2 1 Installation Backing Plate Inverter with 22 kW or Lower Capacity When running cables cut the points between the backing plate and unnecessary portions with nippers or a wire cutter and remove ie Connecting points M Ps lt Unnecessary portion T E inverter with 30 kW or Higher Capacity U g a 5 For Connection Without Cable Conduit Make a cut in the rubber bushing of the backing plate with nippers or a wire cutter and insert a ca ble lt lt Backing plate
483. the device Unwanted switch off due to overload may occur eLong motor cables produce more line conducted interference eLong motor cables lead to the triggering of a ground fault monitoring device that may be present eLong motor cables lead to thermal overload of the line filter due to the higher line conducted interference If a motor output choke of appropriate size is used you have the following advantages elt can counteract unwanted shut off due to overload described above The thermal load on the EMC line filter is reduced g as 5 Multiple motor applications In multiple motor applications i e a frequency inverter feeds several motors connected in parallel you should try to minimize the effective cable capacity and or the effective length of the shielded cable You can achieve this by creating a neutral cross connecting point from which you can supply all motors Layout to be done so that the shielding is maintained over the entire length of the cable if possible or is only very briefly interrupted It is better to install this neutral cross connecting point in a metal housing with as much HF damping as possible The shield connection from to the metal housing should again be made with the smallest possible HF impedance as already described Influence of ground fault monitoring devices In the line filter capacitors are placed between the phases and ground which can cause larger charge currents to flow to ground whe
484. the multi function output terminal contact selection is set to 01 the output signal may chatter when the DC power supply is turned off e Tightening torque for terminals Ro and To M4 1 2 Nem 1 4 max 2 19 2 2 Wiring Wiring Control Circuit Terminals e Terminals L and CM1 are insulated from each other via the input and output signal common terminals Do not short circuit or ground these common terminals Do not ground these common terminals via external equipment Check the external equipment ground conditions Ea e For wiring the control circuit terminals use twisted shielded cables recommended size 0 75 mm and connect the shielded cable to each common terminal e The control circuit terminal connection cables should be 20 m or less e Separate the control circuit terminal connection cables from the main circuit cable power cable and the relay control circuit cable u s q e For the connection of the TH thermistor input terminal twist cables with the terminal CM1 individually and separate them from other PLC common cables Since a weak current flows through the thermistor the thermistor connection cable must be separated from the main circuit cable power cable The thermistor connection cable should be 20 m or less PLC QODKRKOOOODOHEL QDOOOCOEX e To use a relay for the multi function output terminal connect a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the coil e Do not short circuit the anal
485. the product vertically on a wall with the product s longer sides upright The material of the wall has to be noninflammable such as a metal plate Main Circuit Power Supply Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage WError Retry Function Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start MINon Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non stop function at momentary power interruption selection b050 because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on Operation Stop Command e Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed e When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product Precautions for Correct Use Warning Labels Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration Be sure to follow the instructions i
486. the single motor You should add a motor shaft conversion value of the load machine s moment of inertial to parameter J eWith a machine e g lift ball screw whose motor shaft rotation is limited the machine may be damaged if the allowable rotation limit is exceeded In this case set H001 to 01 auto tuning without motor rotation eWith a motor whose no load current is unknown measure the current at 50 Hz in the V f setting mode and perform auto tuning after setting the current value in HO23 H223 eEven if 01 auto tuning without motor rotation is selected in H001 the motor may slightly rotate eTo perform auto tuning for one rank lower motor size enable the overload limit function and set the overload limit level to 1 5 times the rated current of the motor 4 112 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Operating Procedure 1 Set auto tuning selection H001 to 01 or 02 2 Turn on the RUN command Turning on the RUN command starts automatic operation in the following sequence 1 1st AC excitation Motor does not run 2 2nd AC excitation Motor does not run 3 1st DC excitation Motor does not run 4 V f operation Motor accelerates up to 80 of the base frequency 5 SLV operation Motor accelerates up to x of the base frequency 6 2nd DC excitation Motor does not run 7 The auto tuning result is displayed Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Note 1 Note 2
487. thout terminal operation at start stop of the Inverter To use internal DC injection braking set DC injection braking selection A051 to 01 Set the startup DC injection braking power in A057 In A058 set the startup DC injection braking time regardless of the edge or level operation Example 4 a Example 4 b Set DC injection braking power A054 to define the braking power other than at startup Set the DC injection braking starting frequency in DC injection braking frequency A052 Once DC injection braking delay time A053 is set the Inverter stops output when the frequency reaches the A052 value after the RUN command FW has been turned off During the set time in A053 the motor remains in free run status After the set time in A053 DC injection braking starts e Edge and Level operations for internal DC injection braking work differently when the RUN command switches from STOP to RUN Edge operation Giving priority to DC injection braking time A055 performs DC injection braking for the set time in A055 DC injection braking operates for the set time in A055 when the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command FW is turned off Even if the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking the latter is effective during the set time in A055 Example 5 a Example 6 a Level operation Giving priority to the RUN command shifts to normal operation ignoring DC injec tion braking time A055 When the RU
488. ting 4 134 Electronic gear Me i ras 00 FB Position feedback side P013 Setting position 01 REF Position command side 005 ee selection P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 Yes S aeae numerator 4 129 P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 Yes denominator po22 Position control 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 Yes feedforward gain 4 124 4 128 P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 50 Yes rad s 4 129 4 134 4 136 P024 Position bias amount 2048 to 2048 0 Yes rad s 4 128 Secondary resistance compensation 00 OFF Disabled o x P025 enable disable 01 ON Enabled 00 Ne oe selection poze OVerspeed error 0 0 to 150 0 135 0 No 5 7 detection level po27 Speed deviation error 4 00 to 120 00 7 50 No Hz 4 124 detection level 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 53 3 9 Parameter List Parameter A Default Eke N Function name Monitor or data range r during Unit Page o setting operation P028 Motor gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 No numerator i 4 133 otor gear ratio P029 denominator 1 to 9999 1 No Acceleration n a Operator P031 deceleration time p 00 No 4 8 input tyn 02 Option 2 put typ 03 EZSQ Drive Programming 00 OPE Digital Operator P032 cd ba S o 01 Option 1 o No Oo R put typ 02 Option 2 p 00 O
489. tion 00 OFF Disabled 00 No 4 51 01 ON Enabled OC suppress select Active Frequency 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current b028 Matching restart level 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A Curnt Active F 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current current match 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency Matching restart b029 parameter 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 No s 4 43 Decel rate act F 4 71 match Starting frequency at Active Frequency 00 Off FQ Frequency at interruption b030 Matching restart 01 Max FQ Max Frequency 00 No Start FQ act F 02 Set FQ Set Frequency match 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 18 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Lock SFT Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Only FQ SFT Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON s 02 Lock Data other than b031 cannot be S paar otoc selecon changed o1 No J 4 51 9 Softlock select g 03 Only FQ Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 RUN chg mode Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed RUN time Power ON b034
490. tion 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 400 2 00 Normal operation 2 A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 No 02 Automatic operation T 2 w 2 o S o 7 ra 4 36 2 Energy saving 5 A086 response accuracy 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Yes g adjustment 2 o xe fs E zZ gt 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 29 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default CHENES Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation A092 Acceleration time 2 10 00 A292 2nd acceleration 10 00 time 2 A392 3rd acceleration 10 00 time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 Yes s A093 Deceleration time 2 10 00 A293 2nd deceleration 10 00 time 2 a c 3rd deceleration A393 time 2 10 00 Cc 2 2 step acceleration c gt S A094 deceleration 00 2CH Terminal Switched via multi 00 selection function input 09 4 37 g 2nd 2 step 01 Preset FQ Switched by setting Ea No 2 on acceleration 02 FWD REV Enabled only when switching r deceleration forward reverse 3 selection oO x S A095 2 step acceleration 0 00 2 frequency g 2nd 2 step No Hz A295 acceleration 0 00 Zz frequency 0 00 to 400 00 A096 2 step deceleration 0 00 frequency 2nd 2 step No Hz A296 deceleration 0 00 frequency
491. tion enables thermal protection of the external equipment e g motor if its internal thermistor is connected to the Inverter Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled b098 Thermistor selection 01 PTC enabled 00 02 NTC enabled 0 to 9999 b099 Thonnistorsiror level Set a temperature resistance value to trip 3000 Q the Inverter according to the specifications of your thermistor C085 Thermistor adjustment ae ee Factory default Used for gain adjustment Note If thermistor selection b098 is set to 01 without connecting an external thermistor the Inverter trips 4 75 Connect an external thermistor between control terminals TH and CM1 Set the following functions according to the specifications of your thermistor eWhen this function is used keep the cable length between the motor and Inverter within 20 m Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak you must take measures to prevent noise due to motor current For example place the thermistor cable away from the motor cable 4 2 Function Mode Brake Control Function This function allows the Inverter to control the external brake of equipment including an elevating system When brake control selection b120 is set to 01 enabled the Inverter operates as follows 1 At RUN command input the Inverter starts output and accelerates to the release frequency 2 After the release frequenc
492. tion range HIGH 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 i specification forward P072 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 1653h LOW R W 1654h P073 R W Position range HIGH 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 f specification reverse P073 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 1655h LOW R W 4 214 suonoun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Bes oly No code tion 00 X00 Multi step position command 0 P060 01 X01 Multi step position command 0 P061 02 X02 Multi step position command 0 P062 03 X03 Multi step position command 0 1656h Teaching selection P074 R W P063 04 X04 Multi step position command 0 P064 05 X05 Multi step position command 0 P065 06 X06 Multi step position command 0 P066 07 X07 Multi step position command 0 P067 1656h to Not used 1665h 1666 Drive Program parameter P199 to 00 to UG p to R W 0 to 65535 1 1685h P131 1686h to Not used 16A1h 16A2h P160 to r VE emd W registar to R W 0000 to FFFF 16ABh P169 16ACh P170 to a VE cma R register to R W 0000 to FFFF 16B5h P179 16B6h Profibus node address P180 R W 0 to 125 16B7h Profibus clear mode P181 R W o0 clear 01 Last value 00 PPO 16B8h Profibus Map selection P182 R W 01 Conventional 02 Flexible mode 16BBh CANOpen Node a
493. tly Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off Set the motor to no load status i e not connected to the mechanical system Power On e After checking the above turn on the power Display Status Check eWhen the power is turned on normally the display shows Normal RUN LED indicator during RUN ON ALARM LED indicator OFF POWER LED indicator ON Data display Displays the set value in d001 elf an error occurs refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations and make the necessary changes to remedy Fault RUN LED indicator during RUN OFF ALARM LED indicator ON POWER LED indicator ON Data display An error code such as E01 is displayed The display varies depending on the type of error 3 14 uoesado 3 6 Test Run Operation Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters using the following procedure eTo initialize the parameters set parameter b084 to 2 and parameter b180 to 1 Key sequence Display example Description ronron am so TUE P Pa mm m m d i i Power On 0 00Hz c ke Press the Prev Page or Next Page key until function mode is T displayed ben Q O Press the Set key to enter function mode With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys write the parameter b084 Press the Set
494. to P196 no U005 User 5 selection no d001 to P196 no oO amp U006 User 6 selection no d001 to P196 no es 4 53 S U007 User7 selection no d001 to P196 no oO 3 U008 User 8 selection no d001 to P196 no U009 User 9 selection no d001 to P196 no U010 User 10 selection no d001 to P196 no U011 User 11 selection no d001 to P196 no U012 User 12 selection no d001 to P196 no 2nd 8rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 46 xipueddy Appendix 2 Product Life Curve Appendix 2 Product Life Curve Ambient temperature C 24 hour power supply day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life year Note 1 Ambient temperature refers to the temperature measured at the location approximately 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter atmospheric temperature It refers to the temperature inside if the Inverter is stored in an enclosure Note 2 The smoothing capacitor which will deteriorate because of the chemical reaction caused by the temperatures of the parts should normally be replaced once every 10 years which is the expected design life and not guaranteed However if the ambient temperature is high or the Inverter is used with a current exceeding the rated current for example under overload conditions its life will be significantly shortened Appendix App 47 Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output
495. to the speed command Position feedback variation Position bias Position command variation Speed bias ADD terminal Set with A146 Speed control Speed feedback value Related functions A145 A146 Orientation Function This function determines a motor position at a single desired point during one rotation of the motor and can be used to exchange tools for the machine tool main spindle or others During positioning the Z pulse one rotation position signal is used as the reference signal Input Z pulse between EZP and EZN Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 128 to 65535 P011 Encoder pulses 10000 to 65530 1024 Pulse P014 Orientation stop position O to 4095 0 f 2 Setting frequency to Max frequency P015 Orientation speed setting upper limit 120 0 5 00 Hz 00 FWD Forward side P016 Orientation direction setting 00 01 REV Reverse side P017 Position ready range setting 0 to 10000 5 Pulse P018 Position ready delay time 00 to 9 99 0 00 s setting P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 50 rad s C001 to C008 M lti function inputs 45 ORT orientation 1 to 8 selection C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal o San 11 to 15 selection K 23 POK position ready C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection 4 134 suoloun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Us
496. topped with b092 set to 01 the cooling fan rpm is judged as being normal Program Counter d023 Refer to Drive Programming Manual Display 0 to 1024 Program Number d024 Refer to Drive Programming Manual Display 0 to 9999 Drive Programming Monitor UMO to UM2 d025 to d027 Refer to Drive Programming Manual Display 2147483647 to 2147483647 4 1 Monitor Mode Pulse Counter Monitor d028 You can monitor a total pulse count of multi function input function pulse counter 74 PCNT Display 0 to 2147483647 Position Command Monitor Absolute Position Control Mode d029 You can monitor a position command in absolute position control mode Note This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 or 03 in sensor vector control mode Display 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is selected 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected Current Position Monitor Absolute Position Control Mode d030 You can monitor the current position in absolute position control mode Note This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 or 03 in sensor vector control mode Display 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is selected 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected Clock d031 Setting Date and Time for the LCD digital operator Display 2000 1 1 to 2099 12 31 Displays in increments of 1 day 00 00 to 23 59 Displays in increments
497. tor capacity 004 0 4 kW 185 18 5 kW 007 0 75 kW 220 22 kW 015 1 5 kW 300 30 kW 022 2 2kW 370 37 kW 037 3 7 kW 450 45 kw 040 4 0 kW 550 55 kW 055 5 5 kW 750 75 kW 075 7 5 kW 900 90 kW 110 11 kW 11K 110 kW 150 15 kW 13K 132 kW Voltage class 2 3 phase 200 V AC 200 V class 4 3 phase 400 V AC 400 V class Enclosure rating Panel mounting IP20 min or closed A wall mounting models B IP00 WEChecking the Accessories Note that this manual is the only accessory included with the RX model Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user Revision History Revision History HA manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the lower left of the front and back covers Cat No 1560 E2 04 Revision code Revision code Revision date Description 01 April 2009 First version 04 February 2012 Major changes 11 About This Manual About This Manual This User s Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user s convenience as follows Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product Overview Chapter 1 Overview Describes features and names of parts Provides external dimensions installation dimensions peripheral device Chapter 2 Design design selection instructions and other information necessary
498. tput current falls below the light load detection level C039 eIn light load signal output mode C038 you can set whether this output is enabled in any operation mode or only in constant speed operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal 11 to 15 selection 43 LOC light load detection signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during Light load signal output acceleration deceleration constant C038 9 A P speed 01 a3 01 Const Enabled only during constant speed 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW C039 Light load detection level 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW Rated current A Set an output level for low current signals Output current A Low current signal detection level C039 Low current signal Operation Ready Signal e This signal is output when the Inverter becomes ready for operation ready to receive the RUN command Even if the RUN command is input while this signal is not output the Inverter does not recognize the RUN command elf this signal is not output check if the input power supply voltage R L1 S L2 T L3 is within the specified range Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal 11 to 15 selection 50 IRDY operation ready signal
499. trol unit area in the same control cabinet connected at the same PE Potential the screen should be connected on both sides of the cable with PE potential is same Control system in separate cabinet Connect shield only one side All analog and digital control lines are laid shielded With distributed systems if the communications control unit is not in the same cabinet and there is a distance between the systems we recommend to put the screen only on the side of the frequency inverter to avoid ground loops beacuse different PE potential Distance between sensitive signals and interference sources The distance between an inter ference source and an interference sink interference threatened device essentially determines the effects of the emitted interference on the interference sink The interference field emitted by the frequency inverter falls sharply with increasing distance Please note that the emitted interference field frequency range 30 MHz 1 GHz of a drive drive system is measured at a distance of 10 m in accordance with EN61800 3 Every device placed closer than 10 m to a source of interference will thus be impacted by appreciably higher interference amplitudes For this reason you should use only interference free devices and mantain a minimum distance of 0 25 m from the drive Devices which react sensitively to interference from electric and magnetic fields should be kept at least a distance of 0 25 m from the following componen
500. try time b005 R W 99 16 times 5 01 No limit selection Input phase loss 00 OFF Disabled _ Tapeh protection selection pope RW 01 ON Enabled 4 193 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Pane ion R W Monitor and setting parameters nes at No code tion 1307h BOOY R W Frequency matching lower HIGH 0 01 oar 0 00 to 400 00 limit frequency setting b007 Hz 1308h LOW R W 00 TRIP Alarm 01 O Hz start 02 f match Frequency matching start 1309h Trip retry selection b008 R W 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart 130Ah Undervoltage retry time b009 R W nee 16 times selection 01 No limit 430Bh Overvoltage overcurrent b010 R W 1103 E retry time selection 130Ch Trip retry wait time b011 R W 0 3 to 100 0 0 1 s 130Dh Electronic thermal level b012 pw ooo Rated current to 1 00 x Rated 0 1 A current 00 Reduced TRQ Reducted torque Electronic thermal enetacenenee 130Eh ae b013 R W 01 Const TRQ Constant torque characteristics selection at characteristics 02 Free set Free setting 130Fh Not used 4310h Fee setting electronic b015 R W 0 to 400 1 Hz thermal frequency 1 dati eee seming clectionle b016 R W 0 0to Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 1 1312h Free setting electronic b017 R W Oto 400 1 Hz
501. ts e Frequency inverter e EMC input output filters e Input or output reactors transformer Motor cable even if shielded e External braking resistor and its wiring even if shielded e AC DC commutator motors including any attached separate fans DC intermediate circuit coupling wiring even if shielded Connected inductors like relays contactors solenoid valves brakes even if shielded Avoid parallel runs of power and control lines The parallel running in same conduit without proper distance of power lines even shielded cables and control lines is not allowed This is source of most of EMC disturbance coupling Crossing power lines and control lines Should power and control lines have to cross unavoid ably each other then they should be layout with a 90 crossing Cevitrol cables Motor power cable 2 28 g a 5 Design 2 2 Wiring If control system recommendations conflict with these in this section Always follow additional recommendations of control system manufacturer If these recommendations happen to conflict with those in this section is usually beacuse the control system has a different internal power and isolation structure If the conflicting recommendation is to connect the shield to a propietary point other than PE power ground point in the control connector please respect so and DO NOT CONNECT THE SHIELD TO PE on the inverter side only follow control system manufactu
502. tuning data motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No mH 2nd motor pati H232 parameter L motor auto tuning data capacity Depends H033 Motor parameter IO on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A 2nd motor sat H233 parameter IO f motor auto tuning data i capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 51 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ke Function name Monitor or data range j during Unit Page No setting operation Depends Motor parameter J on the H034 auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm Fu p Depends 4 115 2nd motor onthe H234 parameter J f motor auto tuning data capacity H050 PI proportional gain 100 0 i 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes H250 2nd PI proportional 100 0 gain H051 PI integral gain 100 0 4 89 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes 4 92 _ H251 2nd PI integral gain 100 0 9 o 3 H052 P proportional gain 1 00 6 j 0 01 to 10 00 Yes S H252 2nd P proportional 1 00 5 gain H060 Limit at 0 Hz 100 0 O 0 0 to 100 0 Yes H260 2nd limit at O Hz 100 0 H061 Boost amount at SLV 50 4 117 startup 0 Hz ii 0 to 50 Yes 2nd boost amount at H261 SLV startup 0 Hz 39 Ho7o For PI proportional 9 9 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes gain switching Ho71 For PI integral gain 9
503. ue is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 180 suoiloun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funeiten Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 001Ch Fault monitor 2 factor Soe Inverter inp Factor List page 4 183 001Dh Fault monitor 2 Inverter status moe invertor Trip Factor List page 4 183 001Eh Fault monitor 2 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 001Fh_ Fault monitor 2 frequency LOW Hz 0020h Fault monitor 2 current d082 Output current value at thetime of 0 1 A tripping 0021h Fault monitor 2 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0022h Fault monitor 2 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0023h Fault monitor 2 RUN time LOW 0024h Fault monitor 2 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0025h Fault monitor 2 ON time LOW 0026h Fault monitor 3 factor See sven iTrip Factor ISt page 4 183 0027h Fault monitor 3 Inverter status See VSE MIP Eaclor LISI page 4 183 0028h Fault monitor 3 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 0029h Fault monitor 3 frequency LOW Hz 002Ah Fault monitor 3 current d083 Ouip t current value atthe timet 0 1 A tripping 002Bh Fault monitor 3 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping
504. uency for the orientation speed because positioning must be completed within two rotations during deceleration Otherwise overvoltage protection may cause a trip Note 2 Orientation stop position is defined as 4096 0 to 4095 divisions of one forward rotation from the reference point The number of divisions is fixed to 4096 regardless of the encoder s number of pulses The reference point is defined as the point where the pulse is input between EZP and EZN Below is the layout of the stop target position Positive phase connection Position of Z pulse Motor shaft viewed from motor Reference point shaft load side 0 1024 3072 2048 Orientation stop position conceptual drawing 4 135 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Absolute Position Control Mode eTo use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selection P012 to 02 APR2 Absolute position control eWhen 03 high resolution absolute position control is selected in V2 control mode selection P012 control is based on x4 the number of pulses used for internal operations Set the multi step position command and position range setting for x4 multiplication control e The position command can be changed up to 8 steps depending on combinations of multi function input terminals Zero return speed can be selected from one low speed and two high speeds The orientation function described in the previous sect
505. uency reference power supply A H EM Digital monitor output 500 to 2 kW PWM output Frequency reference input voltage Q Frequency reference auxiliary input voltage Option 1 g DC10V Option 1 a Lis the common reference for analog input and also for analog output 2 2 Wiring E Main Circuit Terminals Terminal symbol Terminal name Description u s q R L1 S L2 Main power supply input Connect the input power supply T L3 terminal U T1 V T2 Inverter output terminal Connect to the 3 phase motor W T3 PD 1 P External DC reactor Remove the short circuit bar between terminals PD 1 terminal and P and connect the optional power factor improvement DC reactor P RB Braking resistor Connect optional external braking resistors The RB connection terminals terminal is provided for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity P N Regenerative braking Connect optional regenerative braking units unit connection terminal G Ground terminal Inverter case ground terminal Connect this terminal to the ground type D 200 V class type C 400 V class E Control Circuit Terminal ES Ulu Terminal name Description Specifications symbol H Frequency reference 10 V DC power supply for the O terminal Allowable load current power supply output 20 mA max O Frequency reference With a 0 to 10 V D
506. uit of the load Safety Information Operation and Adjustment 3 1 Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Precautions for Use Error Retry Function Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start HNon Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non stop function at momentary power interruption selection b050 because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on Operation Stop Command Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal with the main power supply applied if a signal voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal 3 2 uoesado Operation 3 1 Operation Method 3 1 Operation Method This Inverter has the following operation methods that are selected by the RUN command frequency reference settings The features and the r
507. un4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Sensor Vector Control Speed Control To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selec tion P012 to 00 speed control Sensor vector control can be selected for 1st control only To use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Inverter model RX user s manual Chapter 4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Motor Parameter Se lection Also be sure to set the number of your encoder pulses With V2 control mode selection P012 you can select four types of control modes Speed control Pulse train position control Absolute position control and High resolution absolute position control Note the following before use e Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor size e If the Inverter does not normally accelerate or if overload protection is activated check the phase order of the encoder signal If phase A is advanced by 90 from phase B during forward run it is judged as being normal When running the Inverter with V f characteristics selection A044 set to 00 VC you can check the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008 If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated or if negative frequency is detected when the reverse co
508. unction output terminal 14 selection Output 14 function C025 Multi function output terminal 15 selection Output 15 function C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection Alarm relay function 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FAS set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal during momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power ON time over 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation POK position ready FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FA5 set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG logic operation output 3 annan 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin ov
509. uption IP 4 44 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Example 8 b004 00 Inverter is stopped Inverter is running Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary ON Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 9 b004 01 Power supply Power supply RUN command m RUN command Inverter output N Inverter output utpu ORR e utpu Alarm cue Undervoltage Alarm O f l ON Signal during momentary ON Signal during momentary OFF power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 10 b004 02 Inverter is stopped Power supply Power supply RUN command ee RUN command Inverter output ON Inverter output Alarm ON __ Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary OFF power interruption IP power interruption IP Note 1 You can allocate the momentary power interruption signal IP 08 and the undervoltage signal UV 09 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 selection C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Note 2 If power interruption is retained for 1 second or longer refer to the reset description Reset page 4 87 Restarting Procedure Frequency matching restart This method restarts the Inverter by detecting frequency and rotation direction based on the motor s residual voltage e Active Frequency Matching restart The Inverter starts output at th
510. urrent Rated current No b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection b213 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection b313 3rd electronic thermal characteristics selection 00 Reduced TRQ Reduced torque characteristics 01 Const TRQ Constant torque characteristics 02 Free set Free setting 00 No 4 46 Electronic Thermal b015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 to 400 No Hz b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 33 3 9 Parameter List Parameter x Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page o setting operation 00 OFF Disabled 01 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation b021 Overload limit 02 ON Cnst Enabled in constant speed 01 No _ selection operation 03 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Ra
511. ut terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Set a time in RUN time Power ON time setting b034 Rotation Direction Limit Selection eLimits motor rotation directions e Enabled in either control circuit terminal block or Digital Operator control mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 FREE Forward and Reverse are b035 Rotation direction limit enabled 00 o selection 01 FWD Only Forward is enabled 02 REV Only Reverse is enabled 4 52 suoloun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reduced Voltage Startup Selection Slowly increases voltage during motor startup eTo increase torque during startup reduce the set value of reduced voltage startup selection b036 Note that if the value is too small the motor starts in full voltage starting mode possibly resulting in an overcurrent trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Reduced voltage startup disabled 01 to 255 b036 Reduced voltage startup 01 Short approx 6 ms 6 Sa selection o i 255 Long approx 1 53 s Related functions b082 FW o Starting frequency Da b082 Output frequency Output voltage Display Selection eYou can change the items to be displayed on the Digital Operator Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 All Complete display 01 Utilized Individual display of functions
512. uts off the hardware output and Did any error occur in the external cy shutoff displays an error when the EMR E37 0 devices when the emergency shutoff 2 9 9 terminal S3 is turned on with SW1 i function was selected on the logic board ON Correct the external device error If an overload is detected in the lowest speed range of 0 2 Hz max Overload an electronic thermal trip inside the 2 R he loadi tripiin low Inverter works to shut off the Inverter E38 0 ls the load tea large Reduce the loading speed factor range output 2nd electronic thermal However a higher frequency could remain in the error history ModBus eset E sore Is the communication speed correct communic E41 0 Is the wiring distance appropriate 4 147 ations error Modbus RTU communication Trip by the C076 setting Connection check 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 4 suoieisdo sdueud UIeLy Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy series Option 1 Deiectsanerror onane board E60 0 Has the option board been securely error mounted on option port 1 to mounted _ P p i E69 0 Check that the mounting is correct Option 2 Detects an error on the board gi S
513. via the RS terminal 5 5 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting LCD Digital Operator Error Message 3 Resetting Display Cause Check item Action aaa Avoid issuing the RESET Reset the inverter signal continuously for tng Signal e receiveditroi Check inverter type more than 5 sec COM ERROR Sig Sn Check the connector for Change the correct the inverter within 4 sec loseness disconnection inverter type Check the cable for break Replace the cable and the connector Check if the WRITE key is the WRITE key should be The WRITE key is pressed pressed while the inverter pressed only while the INV in RUN while the inverter is is running inverter sions Press mode running Check if the WRITE key is Relaase ee Soft Lock of STOP Soft lock is turned ON pressed while soft lock is RESET the inverter ON key INV in TRIP WRITE key is pressed Check if the inverter trips Reset the inverter from mode while inverter trips trip status An attempt was made an INV Type writing parameters E a I Un match between different inverter YP inverters type Read lock In case of display READ _ i enabled LOCK Release the Read Lock EEPROM of LCD digital If the same error appears Data Check Sum operator is overloaded It _ after the power is supplied Error reaches the EEPROM s several times the operator Write Limitation is defective Supply the power T
514. ward power running Forward power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 2 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b042 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled 150 reverse regeneration Reverse regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 3 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b043 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled 150 reverse power running Reverse power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Torque limit 4 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW b044 Four quadrant mode no Torque limit disabled 150 forward regeneration Forward regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 5 ue 40 TL Torque limit enabled C001 to C008 escheat 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 z 42 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal 11 to 15 10 TRQ Torque limit selection Related functions A044 A244 C001 to C008 4 57 4 2 Function Mode eYou can select any of the following four torque limit functions from torque limit selection b040 lt Four quadrant separate setting mode gt Sets torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 for four quadrants forward power running regeneration reverse power running and regeneration lt Terminal switching mode gt Switches over torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 depending on combinations of torque limit switchings 1 and 2 TRQ1 and TRQ2 a
515. wer interruption Power interruption protection Input phase loss protection Braking resistor overload protection Ground fault current detection at power on USP error External trip Emergency shutoff trip CT error Communication error Option error etc z Ambient Storage 2 temperature 10 C to 50 C 20 C to 65 C 20 to 90 RH with no condensation Humidity 2 2 3G3RX AN004 to A0220 eae ts 5 9 m s 0 6G 10 to 55 Hz D Vibration 3G3RX A0300 to A0550 B4750 to B413K g 2 94 m s 0 3G 10 to 55 Hz jon O Location At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors without corrosive gases or dust 2 Feedback option Sensor vector control no 6 Digital input option 4 digit BCD 16 bit binary Other options Braking resistor AC reactor DC reactor Digital Operator cables Noise filter Braking unit etc Complies with the test method specified in JIS C0040 1999 Note Insulation distance complies with UL CE standards 7 6 suoieodiyineds Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4040 255 62 7 7
516. witch between the set speeds via the terminal For multi step speed operation you can select either 4 terminal binary operation with 16 steps max or 7 terminal bit operation with 8 steps max Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 F terminals A019 Multi step speed selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 00 terminals A020 Multi step speed reference 0 2nd multi step speed A220 reference 0 6 00 A320 3rd multi step speed reference 0 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 i 2 A022 Multi step speed reference 0 0 Starting frequency to A A023 Multi step speed reference 3 Max frequency A024 Multi step speed reference 4 A025 Multi step speed reference 5 0 00 A026 Multi step speed reference 6 A027 Multi step speed reference 7 A028 to A035 Multi step speed references 8 to 15 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on e During multi step speed operation if frequency reference selection A001 is set to the terminal 01 and the external analog input O O2 Ol setting mode based on a combination of O OI selection A005 O2 selection A006 and the AT terminal is set to reversible the RUN command is inverted when main frequency reference auxiliary frequency reference is less than zero 4 16 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode
517. x 1 8 E 1 2 S 1 5 3G3RX A2015 2 2 2 M4 2 4 E 30A max 1 8 gt D 2 2 3G3RX A2022 2 2 2 M4 2 4 ie T 30 A max 1 8 3 7 3G3RX A2037 3 5 3 5 3 5 M4 3 5 4 A 30 A max 1 8 5 5 3G3RX A2055 5 5 5 5 5 5 M5 R5 5 5 G 100 A 4 0 max 7 5 3G3RX A2075 8 8 8 M5 R8 5 ma 100A 2 4 0 max T g 4 0 S 11 3G3RX A2110 14 14 14 M6 R14 6 g 100 A 4 4 max Ss B i 15 3G3RX A2150 22 22 22 M6 22 6 125 A 4 9 max 3 45 18 5 3G3RX A2185 30 22 30 M6 38 6 j 5 125 A 4 9 max 9 D 22 3G3RX A2220 38 30 38 M8 38 8 aes z 125 A 8 8 max 30 3G3Rx A2300 30 Ms 60 8 eal S 254 22 x 2 8 8 max o x 100 4 f 8 1 37 3G3RX A2370 38 x 2 38 M8 100 8 20 0 max 3 225A 100 p 8 1 T 45 3G3RX A2450 38 x 2 38 M8 100 8 20 0 max 250 A 150 19 6 55 3G3RX A2550 60 x 2 60 M10 150 10 22 0 max 300 A 2 17 2 2 Wiring Power External Applicable cable brakin Circuit device Motor mm Ground Ing Terminal Tightening Applicable resistor Crimp break Earth Gh Inverter model Benes Cabe between SON terminal torque eror kW U V W mm2 size Nem leakage PD 1 and fuse breaker PD 1 2 eake P N RIS n ELB 0 4 3G3RX A4004 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 he 20A max 1 8 0 75 3G3RX A4007 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 12 20A max 1 8 a 1 2 S 1 5 3G3RX A4015 2 2 2 M4 2 4 a 20A max 1 8
518. xcessive level co45 Arival frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during acceleration 2 4 98 cog Attival frequency 9 09 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during deceleration 2 C052 PID FB upper limit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 No 4 31 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 45 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Overtorque level C055 Forward power 200 No running Overtorque level C056 Reverse 200 No o regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 760 T Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Z C057 Reverse power 200 No running E 2 Overtorque level 5 C058 Forward 200 No 5 regeneration o 5 coe1 Thermal warning 0 to 100 80 No 4 46 z level E 00 OFF Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit 00 No 4 101 02 4 bit C063 0 Hz detection level 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 No Hz 4 101 C064 a warming 0 to 200 120 No oC 4 105 02 Loop back test Communication 03 2400 bps C071 speed selection 04 4800 bps 05 No Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps Gaze Communication liga 1 No station No selection Communication bit 7 7 bit SS length selection 8 8 bit 8 No gt Cc 2
519. xtended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O P046 Instance Number 4 Extended control I O 1 No _ Instance No 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O _ monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 8 20 Not used 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 43 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default CHENES Function name Monitor or data range i during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Trip Operation setting at 01 Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop P048 idle mode detection 02 Ignore 00 No Act Network idle 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop Polarity setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 P049 rotation speed 32 34 36 38 0 No Poles of RPM Pulse train frequency P055 scale 1 0 to 50 0 25 0 No kHz z Pulse FQ scale 2 Pulse train frequency P056 filter time constant 0 01 to 2 00 0 10 No s Pulse FQ filter 4 144 Pulse train frequency P057 bias amount 100 to 100 0 No Pulse FQ bias Pulse train frequency P058 limit 0 to 100 100 No Pulse FQ limit Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to PO60 command 0 Position range specification forward side 0 Position set 0 268435455 to 268435455 Multi step position Posit
520. y PID target value PID feedback value PID operation 4 2 Function Mode EPID Output Limit Function This function limits PID output within a variable range relative to the target value eTo use this function set PID output limit function A078 The output frequency will be limited within a range of target value A078 with the maximum frequency defined as 100 eWith A078 set to 0 0 this function is disabled PID output PID output range PID target value LS Ne PID variable range A078 PID variable range A078 Time s EPID Reverse Output When a PID operation result is a negative value under normal PID control the frequency reference to the Inverter is limited at 0 Hz However if PID selection A071 is set to 02 reverse output enabled reverse output can be provided for the Inverter when the PID operation result is a negative value eWhen A071 02 the above mentioned PID variable range limit function and the PID output stop function are disabled EPID Gain Adjustment lf a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation adjust each gain as follows according to the situation Feedback value variation is slow when the target value is changed Raise P gain A072 eThe feedback value changes fast but isn t stable Lower P gain A072 The target and feedback values wouldn t match smoothly Lower gain A073 The feedback value fluctuates unstably Raise gai
521. y You ll see which one is enabled by checking whether the terminal is turned on off e When both SET and SET3 terminals are turned on priority is given to SET and the 2nd control function is enabled e During operation you cannot switch between the 1st 2nd and 3rd control functions You can switch them only during stop 4 83 E e 4 2 Function Mode External Trip This function trips the Inverter via an error trip signal from a peripheral system To use this function allocate 12 EXT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Sets the motor to free run status by shutting off output 12 EXT External trip OFF The motor is in normal operation Available input terminals C001 to C008 Note Do not turn on the EXT terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise the Inverter may not store data correctly eWhen the EXT terminal is turned on E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to stop output eWhen the Inverter has tripped indicating E12 the trip is not reset even if the error signal from external equipment is reset EXT terminal is turned off To reset the trip perform the reset operation or turn the power off and on again Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function RUN commands FW RV Free running Motor rom _ ese RS terminal es cee 2 e Alarm output terminal e This function tr
522. y A203 R W 30 to 2nd Max frequency 1 Hz 2204h 2nd maximum frequency A204 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 2205h to Not used 2215h 2216h l e R W end multisstep speed 0 00 to 2nd Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 0 A220 RAN 2217h LOW 2218h to Not used 223Ah 223Bh 2nd torque boost selection A241 R W 00 Manual torque boost 01 Automatic torque boost 223Ch 2NA manual torque boost A242 R W 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 voltage 223Dh 2nd manual torque boost A243 R W 0 0 to 50 0 0 1 frequency 4 216 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 00 VC Constant torque characteristics 01 VP Special reduced torque ae characteristics 223Eh aA ee A244 R W 02 Free V f characteristics 03 SLV Sensorless vector control 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 V2 Sensor vector control 223Fh_ Not used 2nd automatic torque 2240h boost voltage A246 R W Oto 255 1 compensation gain 2nd automatic torque 2241h boost slip compensation A247 R W 0 to 255 1 gain 2242h to Not used 224Eh 224Fh A26 R W MRE HIGH 0 00 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd frequency upper limit 0 01 Hz A261 R 2nd Max frequency 2250h LOW 2251h peer R W ae HIGH 0 00 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency lower limit a5 0 01 Hz A262
523. y A303 R W 30 to 3rd Max frequency 1 Hz 3204h 3rd maximum frequency A304 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 3205h to 3215h Not used 3216h mien R W 3rd multistep speed 0 00 to 3rd Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 0 A320 RN 3217h LOW 3218h to 323Bh Not used 323Ch 3rd manual torque boost A342 R W 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 voltage 323Dh 3rd manual torque boost A343 R W 0 0 to 50 0 0 1 frequency 00 VC Constant torque 3rd V f characteristics characteristics aoe selection Agaa iii 01 VP Special reduced torque gt characteristics 323Fh to 326Ch Not used A392 326Dh HIGH R W 3rd acceleration time 2 7 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 392 326Eh LOW R W A393 326Fh HIGH R W 3rd deceleration time 2 rere 0 01 to 3600 00 0 01 s 3270h LOW R W 3271h to 330B Not used 330Ch 3rd electronic thermal b312 R W 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated 0 1 A level current 4 220 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Reggie Function name Bugis R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 00 Reduced TRQ Reduced torque 3rd electronic thermal characteristics 330Dh R b313 R W 01 Const TRQ Constant torque characteristics selection ae characteristics 02 Free set Free setting 330Eh to 3506h Not used 3507h 3rd stabilization parameter H306 R W 0 to 255 1 From 3508h Not used 4 221
524. y brought into LAD cancel status The higher the position loop back gain the shorter the acceleration deceleration time For details on the pulse train input mode refer to the following e Mode 0 Pulse train with 90 phase difference sn L ee pe ee r Pulse train input Detected pulses Pulse train input Forward Reve rse N Time 4 128 suoloun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Mode 1 Forward Reverse command Pulse train sn LJ Lh LO LOr L Pulse train input SBP l SBN Forward Reverse command Detected pulses Forward Reverse Time Mode 2 Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train saP_fL_f 7 LST E sn LS LS LS LEE Forward pulse train input SBP l j l j SBN J l j l j Reverse pulse train input Detected pulses erse Forward Revi Time Electronic Gear Function This function allows you to set a gain relative to position command or position feedback and to change the main sub motor rotation ratio particularly for synchronous operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P019 Electronic gear setting 00 FB Position feedback side 00 o position selection 01 REF Position command side P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 o numerator P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 n denominator P022 Paon ceo 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 feedforwa
525. y is reached the Inverter outputs the brake release signal BRK after the brake release establishment wait time b121 elapses However if the Inverter s output current is less than the current value set in release current b126 the Inverter does not output the brake release signal In this case the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER 3 If the brake confirmation signal BOK is allocated to a multi function input when 44 is set in any of C001 to C008 the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal for the period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without accelerating after the brake release signal is output If the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 4 after the brake release signal is output 4 After the brake confirmation signal is input or after the brake release signal is output if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts acceleration up to a set frequency after the period set in acceleration wait time b122 elapses 5 After the RUN command is turned off the Inverter decelerates to the brake release frequency b125 and turns off the brake release signal BRK 6 If the brake confirmation signal BOK is allocated to a multi funct
526. you need to select the pulse train position control mode 4 130 suoloun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Configuration Example Main motor Number of encoder pulses 1024 eSub motor Number of encoder pulses 3000 Main motor rom Sub motor rpm 2 1 For operation under the above conditions set the following data in the slave Inverter Pulse train mode selection P013 00 pulse with 90 phase difference Electronic gear setting position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 1024 x 2 2048 The following shows an example of the ratio of slave rpm to master rpm depending on the P019 to P021 settings Note that the same number of encoder pulses 1024 pulses should be set on both Inverters Electronic gear setting position selection REF Position REF Position FB Position feedback side FB Position feedback side P019 command side command side Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 1024 2048 1024 2048 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 2048 1024 2048 1024 Slave rpm Master rpm 1 2 2 2 1 2 Configuration Example Main motor Number of encoder pulses 1024 Sub motor Number of encoder pulses 3000 Main motor rom Sub motor rpm 2 1 For operation under the above conditions set the following data in the slave Inverter Electronic
527. ystem which requires sufficient torque in a low frequency range at startup e g crane hoist eTo use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 A244 to 04 eTo use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Motor Parameter Selection page 4 115 The parameters for 0 Hz SLV control are as follows eIn O Hz limit HO60 H260 you can set a current value used for constant current control in the 0 Hz range generally 3 0 Hz or lower This parameter is expressed as a ratio of the output current to the Inverter s rated current eIn O Hz SLV startup boost amount H061 H261 you can set a current boost amount at startup in the 0 Hz range A current value expressed as a ratio to the Inverter s rated current is added to the current value set in HO60 H260 at startup only Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit HO60 H260 Limit at 0 Hz PRT 100 0 Current limit in low frequency range H061 H261 Bogst amount at SEY 0 to 50 Current boost amount at startup 50 startup 0 Hz eNote the following before use Select an Inverter with one rank higher in capacity than the motor s Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor size eIn the 0 Hz sensorless control mode the digital command board 3GAX DI01 cannot be used elf O Hz sensorless vector control cannot prov
528. yte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 04 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Data 8 bytes z Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 163 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Inverter status data includes the following three elements A B and C Data Status A Status B Status C 00 Reserved Inverter status A Inverter status B Inverter status C Code Status Code Status Code Status 00 Initial status 00 During stop 00 01 01 During RUN 01 Stop 02 During stop 02 During trip 02 Deceleration 03 During RUN 03 Constant speed 04 During FRS 04 Acceleration 05 During JG 05 Forward 06 During DB 06 Reverse 07 During retry 07 Forward to reverse 08 During trip 08 Reverse to forward 09 During UV 09 Forward run start 10 Reverse run start 4 155 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 05 gt Reads trip data e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Descri

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LA RÉCEPTION DE LA BD « ESPACE PROTÉGÉ » VISANT À LA    AS/Mon(2008) - Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe    Toshiba L9363/58 User's Manual  cahier des charges achat d`un tracteur de type - Noës-près  Dossier de Presse Sommaire :  Carolo Mag` n° 185 - décembre 2014 - Ville de Charleville  Betriebsanleitung UBK2  Moxa EDS-G509 network switch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file